Home

SRW-5000 SRW-5500

Contents

1. Item number Item Setting Function 741 CHROMA GAIN 0 0 OH Adjusts the chroma gain of HD UC SD and DC output ALL The chroma level increases with larger setting values of this HD UC SD DC z item preset 100 100 4000H 4000H 141 3 5A70H 742 CHROMA PHASE 127 Adjusts the chroma phase HUE of HD UC SD and DC ALL output HD UC SD DC 0 preset 0 127 743 BLACK LEVEL 31 0 OH Adjusts the black level of HD UC SD and DC output ALL i beareo omma pa 4000H i The range of control possible from the HKDV 900 503 is 31 0 220H 8 0 to 8 0 755 MASTER LEVEL 0 0 OH Adjusts the level of the D1 video signal output from SD SDI D1 OUT Simultaneously adjusts the Y B Y and R Y level preset 100 4000H 100 4 4000H 141 3 5A70H 756 Y LEVEL D1 0 0 0H Adjusts the level of the D1 video signal output from SD SDI preset 100 OUT Adjusts the Y level of the video signal 4000H 100 4000H 141 3 5A70H 757 B Y LEVEL D1 0 0 0H Adjusts the level of the D1 video signal output from SD SDI preset 100 OUT Adjusts the B Y level of the video signal 4000H 100 4000H 141 3 5A70H 758 R Y LEVEL D1 0 0 OH Adjusts the level of the D1 video signal output from SD SDI preset 100 OUT Adjusts the R Y level of the video
2. Item number Item Setting Function 937 CRISP 0 Adjustment of the down converter image enhancer and THRESHOLD setting an amplitude so that low amplitude signals are not DC 15 enhanced preset 0 938 LEVEL DEPEND Adjustment of the down converter image enhancer and THRESHOLD DC setting the brightness range of enhanced contours Sub items DEPEND BLACK 0 DC 8 15 DEPEND WHITE DC 15 939 H DETAIL 2 6 MHz Adjustment of the down converter image enhancer and FREQUENCY 3 4 MHz setting the central frequency for enhanced contours select DC 4 3 MHz 6 7 MHz 940 H V RATIO DC 0 Adjustment of the down converter image enhancer and preset 3 setting the horizontal to vertical ratio for enhanced 3 contours 7 941 GAMMA DC on Activates or deactivates the GAMMA LEVEL setting by the off item 941 942 GAMMA LEVEL 128 Adjustment of the down converter image enhancer and DC setting the slope of the correction curve preset 0 0 Valid only when the GAMMA LEVEL setting is activated by the menu item 941 128 943 CROSS COLOR 0 Sets the crisp level for down converter output cross color CRISP DC 4 E preset 4 15 3 944 V FILTER SELECT mode 0 Sets the vertical interpolation filter coefficient for HD SD 2 mode 1 converter output ai mode 2 mode 3 945 D C LEGALIZE OF
3. Item number Item Setting Function 129 STOP CODE Stop code detection mode and adjustment of stop position FUNCTION when a stop code is detected Sub items DETECT BEEP on on When a stop code is detected sound a beeper off off When a stop code is detected do not sound a beeper DETECT STOP on on When a stop code is detected stop the tape D off STOP appears in the information display off When a stop code is detected do not stop the tape STOP ADJUST 150 fr When a stop code is detected adjust the tape stop position O fr from the normal stop position in the direction of the SOM point program start point in the range 0 to 150 frames REC ADJUST 5sec Specifies how many seconds before the SOM point to start 4sec recording a stop code 3sec 2sec sec 130 S LCD DIMMER 16 to 11 to O Adjusts the information display luminance 131 CHANGED MENU Changes the display color of items whose setting has been HIGHLIGHT changed Sub items ITEM SETTING off off Changed menu setting values do not change display on color on Changed menu setting values are displayed in yellow DEFAULT off off Menu numbers with changed DEFAULT values do not SETTING on change display color on Menu numbers with changed DEFAULT values are displayed in yellow 132 KNOB MODE set default Selects the behavior of the unit when the MULTI CONTROL move window knob
4. Button Indication Function Settings F2 SERVO REF Selects the reference signal for output ext input auto F4 MASTER HD Adjusts the Y Pg and Pr output levels prst 0 0 to 141 3 simultaneously F5 Y HD Adjusts the Y output level prst 0 0 to 141 3 F6 Pp HD Adjusts the Pg output level prst 0 0 to 141 3 F7 Pr HD Adjusts the Pr output level prst 0 0 to 141 3 F8 SETUP HD Adjusts the setup level prst 10 0 to 10 0 F9 SYNC HD Adjusts the sync phase prst 128 to 127 F10 FINE HD Fine adjustment of the sync phase prst O to 1024 ALT F1 MASTER LEVEL D1 Adjusts the Y B Y and R Y output prst 0 0 to 141 3 levels simultaneously ALT F2 Y LEVEL D1 Adjusts the Y output level prst 0 0 to 141 3 ALT F3 B Y LEVEL D1 Adjusts the B Y output level prst 0 0 to 141 3 ALT F4 R Y LEVEL D1 Adjusts the R Y output level prst 0 0 to 141 3 ALT F5 VIDEO GAIN ALL Adjusts the video gain prst 0 0 to 141 3 ALT F6 CHROMA GAIN ALL Adjusts the chroma gain prst 0 0 to 141 3 ALT F7 CHROMA PHASE Adjusts the chroma phase prst 127 to 127 ALL ALT F8 BLACK LEVEL ALL Adjusts the black level prst 31 0 to 31 0 ALT F9 SETUP LEVEL CST Adjusts the setup level prst 0 to 10 0 4 5 VIDEO Menu sBunjes nue p se deyo 93 4 5 1 Selecting the Reference Signal SERVO REF
5. Item number Item Setting Function 017 PB EE SELECT Selects output video and audio signals MENU Sub items STAND BY OFF PB MU Selects the video and audio output signals in the standby EE EE off mode PB MU The playback video signal is output The audio output is muted EE EE The input video and audio signals are output STAND BY ON PB MU Selects the video and audio output signals in the standby EE EE on mode EE MU PB MU The playback video signal is output The audio output is muted EE EE The input video and audio signals are output EE MU The input video signal is output The audio output is muted REC PB PB Selects the video and audio output signals during EE EE recording PB PB The playback video and audio signals are output EE EE The input video and audio signals are output SHUTTLE PB MU Selects the video and audio output signals during shuttle EE EE playback PB PB PB MU The playback video signal is output The audio output is muted EE EE The input video and audio signals are output PB PB The playback video and audio signals are output JOG PB PB Selects the video and audio output signals during jog PB MU playback PB PB The playback video and audio signals are output PB MU The playback video signal is output The audio output is muted VAR PB PB Selects the video and audio output signals during variable PB MU playback PB PB T
6. 00000000 TITLE CUT No EDIT t100 No AAA gt BBCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRSTUUUXYZ abcdefghjiklmnorarstuvuxyz 012345678911 lt gt t k 12275 H28 _ HDID2CAM BACK SET CANCEL SAVE SPACE LETTER EXIT 1 Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the cut data to be changed To move the cursor using the numeric buttons Enter the line number using the numeric buttons Then press the CUENUM POINT button The cursor will move to the line specified by the numeric buttons 2 Press the CHANGE DATA button REC 2 081 TITLE CUT No EDIT t100 BCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRSTUVUXYZ abcdefshjiklmnoparstuvwxyz 012345678911 lt gt t k 12 55 H2R _ HDID2CAM SPACE BACK SET CANCEL SAVE SPACE LETTER EXIT 3 Press the lt or gt button to select a character REC TITLE CUT No EDIT No gt 1 ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPARSTUVUXYZ abcdefghjiklmnoparstuvwxyz 012345678911 lt gt t k 12 51 448 _ HDID2CAM SPACE BACK SET SAVE SPACE LETTER EXIT 2 081 t100 4 Press the SET LETTER button or the cursor center button The selected character is entered 4 4 CUE Menu 5 R
7. HKDV 900 503 Setup menu items of this unit setting items HD Master 708 MASTER LEVEL HD HD UC HD Y 709 Y LEVEL HD HD UC HD Pp 710 Pg LEVEL HD HD UC HD PR 711 Pg LEVEL HD HD UC HD Setup 712 SETUP LEVEL HD HD UC HD Sync Phase 713 SYNC PHASE HD HD UC HD Fine 714 FINE HD HD UC D1 Master 755 MASTER LEVEL D1 DC SD gt DIY 756 Y LEVEL D1 DC SD gt D1 B Y 757 B Y LEVEL D1 DC SD D1 R Y 758 R Y LEVEL D1 DC SD gt D2 VIDEO 740 VIDEO GAIN ALL HD UC SD DC D2 CHROMA 741 CHROMA GAIN ALL HD UC SD DC D2 HUE 742 CHROMA PHASE ALL HD UC SD DC D2 SETUP 762 SETUP LEVEL CST DC SD 743 BLACK LEVEL ALL HD UC SD DC SD Sync Phase 763 SYNC PHASE SD DC SD SD Fine 764 FINE SD DC SD CROSS COLOR 934 CROSS COLOR DC DC H CROP POSITION 932 H CROP POSITION DC DC 951 H CROP POSITION UC UC FC 952 LETTER BOX POSITION UC UC FC xlpueddy 194 DETAIL GAIN 935 DETAIL GAIN DC DC 954 DETAIL GAIN UC UC FC LIMITTER 936 LIMITTER DC DC 955 LIMITTER UC UC FC CRISP 937 CRISP THRESHOLD DC DC 956 CRISP THRESHOLD UC UC FC DEPEND 938 LEVEL DEPEND THRESHOLD DC DC 957 LEVEL DEPEND THRESHOLD UC UC FC FREQUENCY 939 H DETAIL FREQUENCY select DC DC 958 H DETAIL FREQUENCY UC U
8. ANALOG AUDIO EDIT REPLACE CMD PRESET ANA ANA cH gt cs E CH12 EXIT 2 Press the REPLACE MODE button Each press of the button changes the setting in the order normal parallel reverse stereo At the same time the image of the channels corresponding to the command changes to reflect the selected setting 3 Press the EXIT button This returns to the AUDIO menu screen You can also make this setting using the VTR SETUP menu item 311 EDIT PRESET REPLACE MODE SELECT See 4 6 9 External Device Analog Audio Edit Preset Command Replace Mode Selection ANALOG AUDIO EDIT REPLACE page 104 for information about settings for audio edit preset control of channels 9 to 12 4 6 9 External Device Analog Audio Edit Preset Command Replace Mode Selection ANALOG AUDIO EDIT REPLACE You can replace the channel settings for analog audio edit preset commands received from editors and other external devices This function allows such devices to control channels 9 to 12 on this unit T Press the ALT ANALOG REPLACE buttons The ANALOG AUDIO EDIT REPLACE menu appears together with a REPLACE image window 4 6 AUDIO Menu 2 Use the ANAREP CH9 ANAREP CH10 ANAREP CH11 ANAREP CH12 buttons to specify whether to control channels 9 to 12 with edit preset commands for analog channels 1 and 2 The image of the corr
9. Item number Item Setting Function 116 ALARM BEEP high Selects the volume of the alarm sound mid low off 117 SCREEN SAVER 3 min Selects the time after which the screen saver function 10 min operates for the color display 60 min off 118 SCREEN SAVER off Set the screen saver for the information display on off Do not use screen saver on Use screen saver The information display reverses at regular intervals 120 WARNING off Selects whether warning messages should be displayed in DISPLAY on the lower part of the time code display for the HOME menu the TC menu the VIDEO menu the AUDIO menu the PF1 menu and the PF2 menu off Do not display warning messages on Display warning messages ua e No warning messages are displayed for the CUE menu and the SETUP menu so check by viewing a menu other than the CUE menu and the SETUP menu e If LOST LOCK occurs during playback or recording a LOST LOCK warning message is always displayed 121 INFO DISPLAY rotation Sets the display mode for the information display MODE latch rotation The display automatically changes in sequence at momentary regular intervals latch Hold down the MULTI CONTROL knob and turn it to change the display which remains unchanged when you release the knob momentary Hold down the MULTI CONTROL knob and turn it to change the display after a set time interval the display reverts to the first page 122 MULTI CUE CLEAR on
10. 1 Insert a cassette For details on inserting a cassette see 3 3 2 Inserting and Ejecting Cassettes on page 36 2 Press the PLAY button Playback starts and the SERVO indicator lights up to indicate that the servo is locked 3 Press the STOP button to stop playback If playback continues to the end of the tape If the VTR SETUP menu item 407 AUTO REWIND is set to on then the tape automatically rewinds to the beginning and stops 5 4 2 Variable Speed Playback In Jog Shuttle Variable modes you can change the playback speed as follows Jog mode The playback speed corresponds to the rotational speed of the search dial ranging from 1 to 1 or 2 to 2 times normal playback speed for Digital Betacam playback 3 times normal speed 5 4 Playback The speed setting can be changed using the VTR SETUP menu item 107 JOG DIAL RESPONSE Shuttle mode The playback speed corresponds to the angle of rotation of the search dial The playback speed is different depending on the frame frequency of the unit The search dial clicks at the positions for still picture and 10 times normal speed playback Frame Playback Playback Playback frequency speed speed speed D HDCAM SR HDCAM BETACAM 23 98 24 Hz Ranging from Ranging from 50 to 50 60 to 60 25 Hz Ranging from Ranging from Ranging from 48 to 48 58 to 58 58 to 58 29 97 30 Hz
11. To move the cursor using the numeric buttons Enter the line number using the numeric buttons Then press the CUENUM POINT button The cursor will move to the line specified by the numeric buttons 2 Use the numeric buttons to enter the time data in the data entry window and then press the SET button For example to enter 00 01 30 00 press the numeric buttons as follows 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 There is no need to enter the first zero When you enter a number that is less than eight digits long the unspecified digits are automatically set to zero when the SET button is pressed 1 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the IN OUT section on which the current log data is to be entered or modified To move the cursor using the numeric buttons Enter the line number using the numeric buttons Then press the CUENUM POINT button The cursor will move to the line specified by the numeric buttons 2 Press the IN button to enter IN point data or OUT button to enter OUT point data while holding down the ENTRY button The current time code is entered as the IN OUT point data or it replaces the existing IN OUT point data If the cursor is not on the IN OUT section when pressing the IN or OUT button while pressing down the ENTRY button the current cue point is entered or it replaces the existing cue point When pressing the ENTRY button only the cue point is entered or replaced regardless
12. ECDEFGHI JKLMNOPARSTUUUXYZ abcdefghjiklmnoparstuvwxyz 012345678911 lt gt t k 12 51 v H28 _ HD1ID2CAM SPACE BACK SET CANCEL SAVE SPACE LETTER EXIT 3 Press the cursor or button to select a character REC 2 081 TITLE COMMENT EDIT t100 No gt 1 ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPORSTUUUXYZ abcdefghjiklmnoparstuvuxyz 012345678911 lt gt t k 12 51 H2R _ HDID2CAM SPACE BACK SET CANCEL SAVE SPACE LETTER EXIT 4 Press the SET LETTER button or the cursor center button The selected character is entered REC 2 081 TITLE COMMENT EDIT t100 No E gt 1 ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPARSTUVUXYZ abcdefghjiklmnoparstuvuxyz 012345678911 lt gt t k 12 51 H2R _ HDID2CAM SPACE BACK SET CANCEL SAVE SPACE LETTER EXIT 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter more characters Up to 80 characters can be entered If excessive comment data are entered the input of cue point data may become disabled To prevent this press the TAPE INFO button to check the available memory To enter a space Press the SPACE button If you enter a wrong character Press the BACK SPACE button to go back Then re enter the charac
13. int L Prst free DF OFF 2 Press the ALT button The second page of the TC menu appears in the display TAPE TIMER 24H PLAY LOCK POPSET MENU TCCONY MENU PDTC DIEP off 00 02 39 18 BAIN s te Teatss AGU saisSiasine IN lt i i i QUT PD CHARA off CHARA CHARA CHARA SUPER M POS U POS ON 1 22 To return to the first page Press the ALT button again setting Each time the button is pressed the setting changes Press the CHARA SUPER button to change the 4 1 3 Registering Items to the VTR SETUP Menu You can register 120 menu items including those displayed by pressing the ALT button in the HOME TC VIDEO AUDIO PF1 and PF2 menus By registering frequently used menu items the settings can be carried out together Registering items 2 68 1 4 5 1 Press the SET UP button The SET UP menu appears in the display 2 Press the F4 PF ASSIGN button The PF ASSIGN menu appears in the display 3 Press the PAGE button to select the menu where you wish to register an item The selected menu appears and the items currently registered to the menu appear in the middle of the display If the function button assignments are other than the default the PAGE DEF button is valid To return all function
14. Cc O O O O O O Q F1 TIMER SEL button in the TC menu TC or CTL 6 1 Basic Automatic Editing unipg 9 seideyo 125 unpa 9 seideu9 126 6 1 3 Selecting the Edit Mode Select assemble or insert mode F3 ASSEMBLE button in the HOME menu aoaooooooooooa 9200000000009 00000000 088 gece Oo OO 0000 F4 INS TC to F6 INS AUDIO buttons in the HOME menu Press one of the following buttons to select the respective edit mode e Assemble mode ASSEMBLE button in the HOME menu e Insert mode the appropriate INSERT button in the HOME menu INS TC INS VIDEO INS AUDIO For details on jog or shuttle playback see 5 4 2 Variable Speed Playback on page 118 3 Press the IN or OUT button while holding down the ENTRY button The time data for the IN or OUT point appears in the menu display 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 to set the remaining edit points Setting edit points with the numeric buttons CLR button 0 0000 0000 6 1 4 Setting Edit Points This section describes how to set edit points IN and OUT points In insert mode a technique called split editing allows you to set edit points separately for video and audio Positioning and setting edit points oooo
15. 2 Press the ALT AUDIO EDIT buttons to select the transition type Each press of the buttons selects a transition type in the order CUT gt CROSS gt FADE IN OUT At the same time the display in the edit image window changes to reflect the selected type You can also make this setting using the VTR SETUP menu item 317 AUDIO EDIT MODE 4 6 6 Fade Processing Time Selection for Digital Audio Editing FADE TIME To select the fade processing time for digital audio at edit points use the following procedure The fade processing time cannot be changed when the audio transition type has been set to CUT with the ALT AUDIO EDIT buttons T Press the ALT AUDIO EDIT buttons and select CROSS or FADE IN OUT The FADE TIME menu appears AUDIO EDIT FADE TIME AUDIO EDIT CROSS FADE FADE TIME 50ms PB INPUT IN OUT bi 2 Press the ALT FADE TIME button to select the fade time Each press of the button changes the setting in the range 5 ms to 115 ms At the same time the display in the edit image window changes to reflect the selected time You can also make this setting using the VTR SETUP menu item 811 DIGITAL AUDIO FADE TIME 4 6 7 External Device Audio Edit Preset Command Replace Mode Selection EDIT PRESET REPLACE CHANNEL SELECT You can replace channel settings for audio edit preset commands received from e
16. HOME4 Warning message Warning mark Item number Display Meaning 01 NO EXTERNAL REFERENCE There is no reference signal on the selected REF INPUT connector The VTR is using an internal reference signal 02 LOST LOCK Capstan servo lock was lost during playback recording or editing 03 NO EXTERNAL REFERENCE ON When the VTR SETUP menu item A05 PD EXT SD REF LOCK FC MODE is set to lock1 or lock2 no external SD reference signal is input 04 HD amp SD REF ASYNCHRONOUS When the VTR SETUP menu item A05 PD EXT SD REF LOCK MODE in is set to lock1 or lock2 HD reference signal and external SD reference signal are not synchronized 05 PLL UNLOCK ON FC The PLL of the HKSR 5001 is not locked on the reference signal 08 NO SDI INPUT An SDI input signal cannot be detected 10 VITC NOT READ VITC cannot be correctly read from the tape 11 AUDIO PLL UNLOCKED Audio lock generator PLL not locked to the video reference signal 14 NO PB RF SIGNAL Playback heads cannot correctly read digital data from the tape 15 INCONSISTENT EMPHASIS Emphasis information on the tape is inconsistent with the system emphasis status 16 INCONSISTENT FORMAT OF META The meta data being input and the meta data recorded on the tape DATA have different formats 17 PB FREQUENCY IS UNSUITABLE The cassette is ejected automatically in line with the se
17. after saving changes to the memory label Button Indication Function F1 CUE SCAN Specifies the direction of the cursor movement when the PREROLL button is pressed F4 CHANGE DATA Modifies the specified data F5 DEL POINT Deletes the time data of the cue point F7 PROTECT Write protects the cue point data F8 TAPE INFO Displays the information window F9 CUENUM POINT Moves the cursor to the line specified by the numeric buttons F10 WRITE EXIT Closes the Tele File menu ALT F1 FORMAT T File Formats the memory label ALT F2 UNDO ALL Undoes all changes ALT F3 ATTRIB EDIT Changes the ID ADMIN or TITLE data in the information window ALT F4 COPY to CUE Copies the time data of a cue point to another cue point indicated in the CUE menu Tele File menu display 3 Tape Format Displays the recording format OUT Displays the recording end point data IN Displays the recording start point data TITLE Displays the cassette title ALT F7 WRITE PRTEC Prohibits Tele File menu operations ALT F10 WRITE EXIT Closes the Tele File menu after saving changes to the memory label Formatting a memory label T Press the ALT FORMAT T File buttons 2 Press the FORMAT T File button while holding down the SFT button A message appears in the control panel display requesting
18. 4 3 TC Menu Selecting the time data display Press the TIMER SEL button repeatedly to select the desired time data display CTL Counts the CTL signals on the playback tape or the CTL signals being recorded on the tape and displays the tape running time in hours minutes seconds and frames TC Displays the value read by the time code reader or the value generated by the time code generator To switch between VITC and LTC press the TCR SEL button UBIT Displays user bits data inserted in time code being played back or the user bits data inserted in time code being recorded To switch between VITC and LTC press the TCR SEL button Selecting the time code and the user bits to be recorded Use the F6 F7 and F9 buttons in the TC menu to specify the time code and the user bits to be recorded The specifications for the various button settings are shown in the following table TCG MODE REGENE SOURCE F9 DF NDF prst DF NDF auto Time code and user bits recorded TC UB enables TUG UBG values to be recorded Any time code can be specified for the time code generator and the user bits generator The running mode for the recorded time code data conforms to that specified by the F9 button regene int L TC UB enables TUG UBG values to be recorded The time code generator and the user bits generator lock to the time data recorded longitudinally on the tape
19. Pace i NEXT i PAGE 3 4 Page number indication _ 3 Data entry window Tele m Cue point indication eas 8 STILL HDCAM SR CUE PAGE CUENUM M CUE l P ROLL SET SET CLEAR REMAIN 01H06M Osec on CUE Button Indication Function Settings Fi PREV PAGE Shows the previous page F2 NEXT PAGE Shows the next page F4 Tele File Opens the Tele File menu F5 CUE P ROLL Specifies the preroll time to a cue point 0 to 30s F8 PAGE SET Specifies the page number F9 CUENUM SET Specifies the cue number F10 M CUE CLEAR Erases cue point data when a cassette is inserted on off ALT F1 T File MEMORY Stored the Tele File data to a Memory Stick or loads the CARD data to the Tele File label ALT F8 PAGE MODE Selects PAGE mode ALT F9 EXTEND MODE Selects EXTEND mode 4 4 CUE Menu 71 sBunjes nue p Je deyo suas nu y p 13 dey9 72 4 4 1 Selecting a Multi Cue Mode The SRW 5000 5500 has the following two multi cue modes PAGE mode Press the ALT PAGE MODE buttons In PAGE mode cue point data can be accessed by page number thus speeding up cue point registration and cuing operations Display Cue points are displayed in groups of 10 number 0 to 9 10 to 19 etc Each display is a page Selecting a page There are the three following ways to select a page Press the PREV PAGE button The previous page is shown e Press the NEXT PAGE button The next page is shown e Enter the desi
20. TIMER PLAY LOCK SEL 00 00 00 00 TIMER RESET AIN Serme aia AT ea aaa TIMER IN OUT SET 01 30 00 00 une set TIMER HOLD O STILL HDCAM SR TC REGENE TCG RUN DF NDF TC2 l SEL SOURCE MODE MODE SEL REMAIN 01HO6M VITC Prst rec DF TC lt 4 4 Press the TIMER SET button The input value is set as the time code e Time codes from an external time code generator cannot be set e Time codes cannot be set when the internal time code generator is locked to external time codes or to time codes read by the time code reader Setting the CTL timer T Press the TIMER SEL button to select CTL 2 Enter data in the data entry window using the number buttons 3 Press the SET button to set the data 4 Press the TIMER SET button 4 3 TC Menu When 12H is selected in the VTR SETUP menu item 605 TAPE TIMER DISPLAY and a value of 10H or more is entered the first digit will be dropped Resetting time data Press the TIMER RESET button The internal time code generator is reset according to the setting of the TIMER SEL button Resetting TC or UBIT data The internal time code generator is reset and the time data display becomes OOHOOMOOSOOF TC or 00 00 00 00 UBIT Edit points are not affected e Time data read by the time code reader cannot be reset e Time data cannot be reset when the int
21. stop still Function Selects the operation mode that the VTR changes to after completing a cue up operation stop Enters stop mode still Enters still picture mode search mode When setting the standard constant on the editor and control the unit set to stop 403 CUEUP BY TC capstan only reel capstan This setting is only active when item 602 is set to TC or UBIT capstan only The tape runs with the pinch ON state during cue up The maximum tape speed is ten times normal tape speed reel capstan The tape runs with the pinch OFF state during cue up When the tape nears the cue up point and tape speed drops to slow the pinch turns ON 404 CUEUP BY CTL capstan only reel capstan This setting is only active when item 602 is set to CTL capstan only The tape runs with the pinch ON state during cue up The maximum tape speed is ten times normal tape speed reel capstan The tape runs with the pinch OFF state during cue up When the tape nears the cue up point and tape speed drops to slow the pinch turns ON When this unit is controlled by an editor BVE 2000 BVE 9100 etc and the setting is reel capstan cue up operations are done at high speed Select capstan only when editing precision has priority 405 CUE MENU DEFAULT MODE select page mode extend mode Selects the default mode when the CUE menu is
22. 008 LOCAL FUNCTION ENABLE all disable stop amp eject all enable local key map When this unit is used in remote control mode this selects which buttons on the control panel operate all disable All switches and buttons are disabled stop amp eject Only the STOP and EJECT buttons operate all enable All switches and buttons except the RECORDER and PLAYER buttons are enabled local key map Only the buttons enabled in item 009 are operational Menu List Item number 009 Item Setting Function LOCAL KEY MAP Sets the LOCAL KEY MAP Sub items STOP disable disable The STOP button is disabled in remote control enable mode enable The STOP button operates in remote control mode PLAY disable disable The PLAY button is disabled in remote control enable mode enable The PLAY button operates in remote control mode REC EDIT disable disable The REC EDIT button is disabled in remote enable control mode enable The REC EDIT button operates in remote control mode STANDBY disable disable The STANDBY button is disabled in remote control enable mode enable The STANDBY button operates in remote control mode EJECT disable disable The EJECT button is disabled in remote control enable mode enable The EJECT button operates in remote control mode JOG disable disabl
23. 1 2 SD SDI OUT connectors HD SDI INPUT A B connectors B FC OUT B connectors HD SDI OUTPUT connectors 3 FORMAT CONV OUT OPTION connectors Sued Jo suooUN pue suoes07 z saideyo DIGITAL I O AES EBU OUTPUT connectors DIGITAL I O AES EBU INPUT connectors HD SDI SDI video audio INPUT A B connectors BNC These accept SDI video audio signals The INPUT MONITOR connectors are for use with an input monitor and does not follow the standards for output FC OUT B FORMAT CONV OUTPUT B OPTION connectors BNC These are only effective when the optional HKSR 5001 format converter board is installed When the output format is selected as 4 4 4 LINK B is output and when the output format is selected as 4 2 2 it is not output HD SDI SDI video audio OUTPUT connectors BNC These output three sets of SDI video audio signals When the ALT CHARA SUPER buttons are set to ON in the TC menu time data or other text data is superimposed on the signal output from the MONITOR A connector FORMAT CONV OUT OPTION connectors BNC These output two sets of format converted video audio signals When the ALT PD CHARA buttons are set to ON in the TC menu the output has time data or other text superimposed on the signal This is only valid when the optional HKSR 5001 format converter board is installed When the output format is selected as 4 4 4 LINK A is output SD SDI 1
24. Adjusting the sync phase HD Use this setting to precisely match the output phase of the VTR to the reference signal or when using a switcher or other device connected to another VTR to create special effects such as fading wrapping and dissolving To adjust the output signal sync phase with respect to the reference input make this adjustment with the SYNC PHASE button prst 0 0 Numerical value 128 to 127 Adjustable range 1 4 to 1 4H This setting can also be carried out in the VTR SETUP menu item 713 SYNC PHASE HD Fine adjustment of the sync phase HD Make this adjustment with the FINE button prst 0 0 Numerical value 0 to 1024 Adjustable range 0 to 323 nsec This setting can also be carried out in the VTR SETUP menu item 714 FINE HD Adjusting the master output level D1 Make this adjustment with the ALT MASTER LEVEL buttons prst 100 4000H Numerical value 0 0 OH to 141 3 Adjustable range to 3 dB This setting can also be carried out in the VTR SETUP menu item 755 MASTER LEVEL D1 Adjusting the Y output level D1 Make this adjustment with the ALT Y LEVEL buttons prst 100 4000H Numerical value 0 0 OH to 141 3 5A70H Adjustable range to 3 dB This setting can also be carried out in the VTR SETUP menu item 756 Y LEVEL D1 Adjusting the R Y output level D1 Make this adjustment with the ALT R Y LEVEL b
25. Button Indication Function Settings E1 AUDIO IN Accesses the AUDIO INPUT menu SDI AES EBU E3 DIGOUT EXCHNG Digital audio output signal source track selection TR1 to TR12 HD SDI SD SDI AES EBU However F5 SDOUT EXCHNG can be used to set SD SDI source tracks independently F4 ANAOUT EXCHNG Analog audio output signal source track selection TR1 to TR12 E5 SDOUT EXCHNG Digital audio output signal source track selection SD dis ena TR1 to TR12 SDI ALT Fi AUDIO EDIT Audio transition type selection for digital audio editing cross fi fo cut ALT F2 FADE TIME Fade time selection 5 ms to 115 ms ALT F3 REPLACE MODE CH1 to CH8 assignment settings in response to an external digital audio preset command ALT F4 ANALOG REPLACE CH9 to CH12 assignment settings in response to an external analog audio preset command ALT F5 PITCH GROUP Sets the relation between audio channels when performing pitch correction during program play or play at a different frequency 23 98 frame 24 frame 23 98 24 frame gt 25 frame 29 97 frame gt 30 frame Display when audio output channel settings do not match track number settings PB EE STANDBY OFF e As shown below EXCHNG is displayed if even one of the HD SDI AES EBU ANALOG SD SDI output RECINH 00 0000 00 channels does not match the corresponding track meet eo i number BLE off
26. Function buttons Activates the functions in each menu ALT alternative button Press to change the items displayed on the current menu Press again to return to the original items DIAG diagnostic button Hold down the SFT button see page 21 in the editing control section and press this switch to switch to the DIAG menu DISPLAY button This displays the down converted output signal in the whole color display e Depending on the system settings it may not be possible to output some signals e This function is for a quick check of the output signal and cannot be used as a monitor FULL FINE button This selects the audio level meter display range FULL The audio level meter display is from 60 dB to 0 dB or 40 dB to 20 dB Select which of these ranges peak level 0 dB or 20 dB is displayed in the VTR SETUP menu item 814 LEVEL METER SCALE FINE The audio level meter display range is expanded and displayed with a scale in steps of 0 25 dB The reference marker LED at the center of the level meter display range lights When the audio level exceeds the maximum display range the top line flashes When under the minimum display range the bottom line flashes PB playback LEVEL button Press this button to enter the playback audio level adjustment mode In this mode you can use the MONITOR R button to select the adjustment target channels from channels 1 to 12 While watching the audio le
27. off 00 29 21505 EXCHNG display STILL HDCAM SR INS INS INS VIDEO AUDIO CUE off off l REMAIN H M HOME 4q The F3 button in the AUDIO menu is highlighted in orange if even one of the HD SDI AES EBU audio output channels does not match the corresponding track 4 6 AUDIO Menu sBunjes nue p Je deyo 99 suas nu y p 13 dey9 100 number on the tape In this case if SDOUT EXCHNG is set to dis the F5 button is also highlighted in orange The F4 button in the AUDIO menu is highlighted in orange if even one of the ANALOG audio output channels does not match the corresponding track number on the tape The F5 button in the AUDIO menu is highlighted in orange if even one of the SD SDI audio output channels does not match the corresponding track number on the tape 4 6 1 Selecting the Audio Input Signal AUDIO IN To select the audio input signal for CH1 to CH12 use the following procedure CH1 to CH12 can be selected for HDCAM SR and CH1 to CH4 can be selected for HDCAM T Press the FT AUDIO IN button The AUDIO INPUT menu appears together with an audio input selection window A IN CH1 AES EB A IN AUDIO INPUT SELECT CH2 AES EB CHT CH2 CH3 CH4 CHS CHS A IN A E SDI SDI SDI SDI CH
28. 0 1 off speed playback of video audio and time code possible A Off speed playback of video and audio possible Time code playback and time code conversion possible differs depending on menu settings A HDCAM SR Off speed playback of video and audio possible Time code conversion possible differs depending on menu settings For details see menu item 630 on page169 HDCAM Off speed playback of video possible Audio is muted and time code conversion possible differs depending on menu settings For details see menu item 630 on page 169 Menu List a Output as PsF to HD SDI OUTPUT connectors b Output as Interlaced to HD SDI OUTPUT connectors c 720 59 94P or 720 50P is enabled only for HDCAM SR Tapes with different sampling methods cannot be played back 4 4 4 4 2 2 Recording and playback tape formats and conversion output Cassette type HDCAM or HDCAM SR HDCAM SR Digital Betacam gt HDCAM SR Recording playback mode HD SDI output SD output FC output System frequency System frequency System frequency a Optional HKSR 5001 required b Optional HKSR 5002 required c Optional HKSR 5003 required However the HKSR 5003 is not required for units with serial numbers 15001 or higher excluding SRW 5000 serial 1080 4 2 2 23 98PsF 525 59 94i 2 1080 4 2
29. For details on Memory Stick use see 4 1 5 Memory Stick Operations on page 44 For details on adding titles to the contents of the VTR memory bank see 4 1 6 Adding Titles to the Data on page 49 The contents of SETUP BANK cannot be changed Storing the current VTR menu settings to a VTR memory bank 2 3 CLR button oO o 98se0090000000 o 999090999909090909 Q 46 1 5 Press the SET UP button The SET UP menu appears in the display Press the VTR BANK button The VTR BANK menu appears in the display UTR BANK CURRENT SETUP SETUP BANK 1 Fan UNDO 2 Preset 3 Preset 4 Preset 5 Preset 6 Preset 7 Preset 8 Preset iF Preset EDIT DIREC COPY EXIT TITLE TION CURRENT SETUP TITLE EDIT Preset _ Pre BCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRSTUVUXYZ abcdefghjiklmnorarstuvwxyz 012345678911 O lt gt t k 12253 028 _ HDID2CAM 1F Preset SPACE BACK SET CANCEL SAVE SPACE LETTER EXIT Press the DIRECTION button to select the lt direction Press the cursor button to move the cursor P to CURRENT SETUP C then press the EDIT TITLE button to add a title to the current menu settings of the VTR For details see 4 1 6 Adding Titles to the Data on page 49 Press
30. PAGE DEF F6 302 711 PR LUL HD ar K18 712 SETUP HD F8 K25 713 SYNC HD KEY F9 K44 714 FINE HD DEF BLANK PASTE CANCEL SAVE EXIT Press the PASTE button to register the item The new item is registered to the function button Repeat steps 3 to 6 to register more items To cancel the registration of all new items Press the CANCEL button Press the SAVE EXIT button to save the newly registered items The registration is completed and the SET UP menu appears in the display again 4 1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings 4 1 4 VTR Memory Bank Function Eight VTR memory banks are provided for storing up to eight sets of menu settings The contents of all eight VTR memory banks can be stored on a Memory Stick Current menu settings in the VTR CURRENT SETUP These settings are stored outside the VTR memory banks even when the power is off Storing recalling V VTR memory banks SETUP BANK1 to 8 and IH SETUP BANK J contains the factory set menu settings By calling up Storing recalling SETUP BANK i you can restore all menu items to their factory settings V Memory Stick SETUP BANK 0 to 8 The stick stores setting data in same way as the VTR memory banks These contents can be later called up in the VTR Storing recalling
31. Preventing accidental erasure after saving settings Press ALT PROTECT buttons and a symbol will appear to the right of the memory card bank number 9 Press the EXIT button The SET UP menu appears again Storing cue point lists to a Memory Stick You can store up to 8 pages of cue point lists to a Memory Stick along with titles CUE POINT SET 1 CURRENT CUE SET gt Blank EF Blank Blank Blank Blank Blank Blank Blank OvVNONSWN EDIT SELECT DIREC COPY EXIT TITLE ALL TION gt 2 6 7 oD o ooooodoooooo o 99000 C000000 OC Q B O B O O 3 849 101 5 To return to the MEMORY CARD menu Press the SHOW SETUP button 4 Press the DIRECTION button to select the lt direction The left cursor bar flashes 5 Use the cursor lt button to move the cursor P to CUE POINT SET side then press the cursor jj or button to move the cursor bar to the number of the memory bank in the Memory Stick where you want to store the cue point list CUE_POINT_SET_1 CURRENT CUE SET Destination flashing fF Blank BTan Blank Blank Blank Blank Blank Blank ONDA W EDIT SELECT DIREC COPY EXIT TITLE ALL TION lt 4 1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings 6 Press the COP
32. CO ee SKO o a a o O OOOO A a OF 6d6606dlo M COS es Ss Ss JO 75Q termination switch ON HDW F500 Player a The figure shows the SRW 5500 For playback Reference signal REF INPUT 1 SRW 5000 5500 O ooo COO 0066 00e o 22s 00 gt oC pS feet 75Q termination switch ON HD SDI OUTPUT HD serial input monitor a The figure shows the SRW 5500 HLA eur dn umes Jeideuo The following signals can be used as a reference signal e HD trilevel SYNC signal of an appropriate field frequency for external synchronization e Black burst signal of 525 59 94 Hz e Black burst signal of 625 50 Hz Input the signal of the appropriate field frequency for your system Sync signals in 720P mode Synchronize to an external sync signal when you want to record or play back 720P signals on this unit Gncluding editing e When the 720 59 94p system is selected You can select the following reference signals from menu item 006 EXTERNAL REFERENCE select extrn HD 1080 59 94i tri level SYNC signal extrn SD 525 black burst signal When the 720 50p system is selected You can select the following reference signals from menu item 006 EXTERNAL REFERENCE select extrn HD 1080 50i tri level SYNC signal extrn SD 625 black
33. 4 1 10 Saving and Recalling DEFAULT Settings on a Bank For each VTR SETUP menu item you can change the factory DEFAULT value to a desired value For details see To change the DEFAULT values in a menu item on page 109 These changed DEFAULT values can be saved in a VTR BANK of the VTR 1 Press the SET UP button The SETUP menu screen appears 2 Press the ALT button The ALT SETUP menu screen appears 3 Press the DEFAULT VTR BANK button The DEFAULT VTR BANK screen appears UTR BANK UTR BANK DEFAULT BANK 1 CURRENT DEFAULT UNDO Preset Cc ia Untitled fF Preset EDIT TITLE DIREC TION COPY EXIT The procedure for saving from CURRENT DEFAULT to DEFAULT BANK saving from DEFAULT BANK or FACTORY PRESET factory setting to CURRENT DEFAULT changing the title or setting protection is the same as operation on a VTR bank For details see 4 1 4 VTR Memory Bank Function on page 42 e The storage region for DEFAULT BANK is one set only e The title name shown in the current area is always that for the CURRENT SETUP data When DEFAULT BANK data with the title changed is written to CURRENT DEFAULT the title of the current area does not change Also when CURRENT DEFAULT settings are saved in DEFAULT BANK the title of DEFAULT BANK is copied from the title of CURRENT SETUP 4 1 11 Saving and Recalling DEFAULT Settings in
34. 4 3 TC Menu The TC menu allows you to set time code related items To activate the TC menu through a single menu The HOME TC VIDEO AUDIO Press the TC button PF1 and PF2 menus show information that includes the VTR operation mode time code of the current position and the time code type etc To change the TC menu page Press the ALT button INTRP interpolation This appears when time code cannot be read correctly and correction has been performed F1 Field number F1 F2 Data entry window VITC Time code type LTC VITC PLAY LOCK LTC INTRP TIMER SEL UBIT TIMER TCR Time data type _________ RESET CTL TCR UBR TCG UBG DUR TIMER SET SET 00 00 00 07 C TIMER HOLD STILL HDCAM SR RUN DF NDF TC2 l MODE SEL REMAIN 01HO6M free DF OFF TC TCR REGENE TCG SEL SOURCE MODE LTC int L ragan AIN Time data for an AUDIO IN point AOUT Time data for an AUDIO OUT point IN Time data for an IN point OUT Time data for an OUT point For details on operation modes see 4 2 HOME Menu on page 53 Button Indication Function Settings F1 TIMER SEL Selects time data type CTL TC UBIT F2 TIMER RESET Resets the time counter F3 TIMER SET
35. 48K VLOCK Input signals do not pass through the rate converter In this case input signals must be locked to video signals at 48 kHz Noise will occur if this condition is not met Menu List xipueddy 183 Items Relating to Digital Processing Nos 902 to Item number 902 Item FREEZE MODE Setting field field1 field2 frame1 2 frame2 1 Function Specifies the freeze still picture mode and freeze timing during manual freezing by REMOTE 1 IN 9P or REMOTE 2 PARALELL I O 50P connector or on the control panel or automatic freezing field Freezes the odd or even field depending on the timing in freeze mode field1 Freezes the first odd field field2 Freezes the second even field frame1 2 Freezes the first and the subsequent second field frame2 1 Freezes the second field and the subsequent first field In the case of freezing in playback modes other than normal playback the picture is frozen in frame mode only when dynamic tracking is performing a frame operation The picture is frozen in field mode when dynamic tracking is not operating The frozen picture does not change even if you change this setting during freeze mode The change to this setting becomes effective the next time the VTR outputs a still picture When the stop freeze function is enabled regardless of the setting of this item the picture is frozen in frame mode only when dynamic tracking
36. Blank Blank OVNONSWN EDIT SELECT DIREC COPY EXIT TITLE ALL TION gt 2 6 7 o000 e000 OQ mm O O B O O mm 3 48 1 5 To return to the MEMORY CARD menu Press the SHOW SETUP button again Press the DIRECTION button to select the gt direction The right cursor bar flashes Use the cursor button to move the cursor P to the CUE POINT SET side then press the cursor T or button to move the cursor bar to the number of the memory bank in the Memory Stick FORMAT CURRENT CUE SET Saved data CARD an FF Blank 1 Press the SET UP button The SET UP menu appears in the display 2 Press the MEMORY CARD button The MEMORY CARD menu appears in the display 4 1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings UNDO Blank Blank Blank SHOW Blank SETUP Blank Blank SHOW CUESET ONDA W EDIT SELECT DIREC COPY EXIT TITLE ALL TION gt 6 Press the F9 COPY button A message asking you to confirm the operation appears in the display 7 Press the COPY button while holding down the SFT button The VTR recalls the cue point list in the Memory Stick After the recalling process is completed the title of the cue point list appears under the CURRENT CUE SET indication 8 Press the EXIT butto
37. CONU CONU Category index window Button Indication Function F1 PREV PAGE Moves to the beginning of the previous category F2 NEXT PAGE Moves to the beginning of the next category E5 CATEGORY Display by category F6 NAME Display in alphabetical order E7 SCROLL Scrolling display of all menus F8 CHANGE DATA Changes the setting F9 CANCEL Cancels the setting operation F10 SAVE EXIT Sets the value and exits the VTR SETUP menu 4 7 SET UP Menu sBunjes nue p Je deyo 107 suas nu y p saideuD 108 Scrolling items in the VTR SETUP menu Press the t and l buttons to scroll the items in the VTR SETUP menu To search the menu by category Items in the VTR SETUP menu are divided into categories according to type of settings they perform To change the category Do one of the following e Press the button to make the categories window active and select the category with the f and buttons e Press the button to make the item window active and press the PREV PAGE or NEXT PAGE button Press the gt button to make the item window active then use the cursor t and l button or the MULTI CONTROL knob to align the cursor with the item to be changed To speed up cursor movement Hold down the SFT button and press the cursor ii and button Press the CHANGE DATA button or t
38. Positioning and setting edit points Split editing allows you to set edit points separately for video and audio Set audio edit points with the AUDIO IN OUT buttons and video edit points with the IN OUT buttons Split editing however can only be done when the recorder VTR is in insert mode 6 1 Basic Automatic Editing unipg 9 seideyo 127 Bunipy 9 seideu9 128 oooooooooooo 2900000000000 00000000 Data entry window PB EE PLAY LOCK PB 0104 58 00 AIN 00 01 10 00 AOUT 00 02 10 00 IN 00 01 10 00 OUT 00 02 10 00 ASSEM BLE off w 01 04 58 00 TC H M S F off STILL HDCAM SR INS INS INS INS INS INS I REMAIN 01HO6M ALT TC q VIDEO A CH1 A CH4 CUE off off off off off off T Press the appropriate INSERT button F4 INS TC INS VIDEO INS AUDIO 2 Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to select the VTR for which edit points are to be set The button lights up 3 To locate the edit points rotate the search dial in jog or shuttle mode For details on jog shuttle playback modes see 5 4 2 Variable Speed Playback on page 118 4 Press one of the IN OUT AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT button while holding down the ENTRY button 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to set the remaining edit points Setting an edit point with the numeric buttons 1
39. is a frozen picture in shuttle mode A block pattern may appear in a non DT picture depending on the circumstances Items Relating to the Pulldown Control Nos A01 to Item number Item Setting Function A01 PD TIME CODE off Sets whether or not to display the pulldown time code on DISPLAY on the time code display area 3 off Does not display the pulldown time code E on Displays the pulldown time code x A02 PD PRESET 24F FRAME MODE Selects the time code to be preset The A frame of the FRAME MODE 30F FRAME MODE pulldown sequence can be preset 24F FRAME MODE The 24 frames time code is preset 30F FRAME MODE The 30 frames time code is preset A03 FC off Specifies whether or not to superimpose time data and SUPERIMPOSED on operating status information on the signal output from the CHARACTER FORMAT CONV OUT connector off No information is superimposed on Information is superimposed A04 PD DF NDF drop frame Selects the running mode for the pulldown time code to be SELECT non drop frame preset auto drop frame Drop frame mode non drop frame Non drop frame mode auto The unit switches the running mode DF NDF automatically according to the frame frequency of the unit When the frame frequency is 23 98 Hz the unit switches to the drop frame mode and switches to the non drop frame mode when it is 24 Hz 1 88 Menu List Item number A05
40. lt gt 0 4 i T H28 _ HD1D2CAM A FF Preset D SPACE BACK SET CANCEL SAVE 2 SPACE LETTER EXIT n D Q D 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter more characters To enter a space Press the SPACE button If you enter a wrong character Press the BACK SPACE button to go back then reenter a character To cancel the procedure to start over again Press CANCEL button to start over again To change a character Press the cursor t button to enter the title box then press the cursor or button to go to the text insertion position Press the SAVE EXIT button The entered title is set and the menu displayed before you pressed the EDIT TITLE button appears again 4 1 7 Details on VTR Memory Bank and Memory Stick Functions Most settings of most items can be stored to a VTR memory bank or a Memory Stick 4 1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings 49 suas nu y p saideuD 50 Data that can be stored to recalled from a VTR memory bank or a Memory Stick e VTR SETUP data e PF assignment data e BANK titles DEFAULT values for VTR SETUP can be saved and recalled However DEFAULT values do not include PF assignment data and BANK titles For details of saving and recalling DEFAULT values see 4 1 10 Saving and Recalling DEFAULT Settings on a Bank on page 51 4 1 8 Memory Stick Data Compatibility Data copied onto a Memo
41. 1035 gt 1080 CONV Convert the effective scanning line number from 1035 to 1080 preserving the aspect ratio of the image 1035 gt 1080 PANEL Convert the effective scanning line number from 1035 to 1080 The 1035 lines of the image are inserted into the 1035 lines of 1080 lines then it is horizontally compressed 184 Menu List Item number Item Setting Function 912 SLOW PROCESS _ jon Selects whether or not to activate the function to improve MODE off the vertical resolution during slow motion playback on Activate the function to improve the vertical resolution during slow motion playback off Do not activate the function to improve the vertical resolution during slow motion playback This setting has no effect when the VTR is operated in PsF mode 913 SOFT BLANKING off This process applies a graduation to the first two and last on two samples of each horizontal scan line of the video signal thus making the join in the horizontal blanking interval smoother on The first two samples in the video data region are increased gradually and the last two samples are decreased gradually off The values of the entire video data region are displayed unaltered 921 ASPECT FLAG OFF off Adds 16 9 Squeeze identification signal specified by ARIB on TR B17 to down converted SD output on Add 16 9 Squeeze identification signa
42. 5 Press the ENTRY button to set the entered data The data are registered in the cue point data indication PREV Blank 1 E0SI PAGE pace J 0 00 01 10 00 1 1 00 02 10 00 NEXT 2 2 00 03 10 00 RABE 3 3 00 04 10 00 4 4 00 05 10 00 5 5 00 06 10 00 72 77 6 6 00 07 10 00 _ 7 7 00 08 10 00 Tete 8 A e 00 09 10 00 y M 8 S 00 10 10 00 stitt HDCAM SR CUE PAGE CUENUM M CUE l P ROLL SET SET CLEAR REMAIN 01HO06M A CUE PREV Blank 1 E0S100 13 00 001 PAGE PAGE o0 10 00 10 00 00 1 11 00 11 00 00 NEXT 2 12 00 12 00 00 PAGE 3 13 00 13 00 00 4 14 00 14 00 00 5 gt i5 00 15 00 00 6 16 00 16 00 00 7 17 00 17 00 00 joe 8 18 00 18 00 00 eO M 7 19 00 19 00 00 TILL HDCAN SR CUE PAGE CUENUM M CUE l P ROLL SET SET CLEAR REMAIN 01H06M A CUE lt To select the cue number directly by the numeric buttons Enter the cue number in the data entry window with the numeric buttons then press the CUENUM SET button Enter the cue point data in the data entry window with the numeric buttons then press the SET button For example to enter 00 01 30 00 press 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 The leading 0 is not required When the entered value is less than eight digits the leading digit s is are set to 0 when you press the SET butt
43. 811 DIGITAL AUDIO 5ms Specifies the fade processing time during cross fading or FADE TIME 10 ms fading in out of digital audio signals 15 ms 20 ms wa 25 ms Processing for cross fading fading in and fading out starts 50 ms after an IN or OUT point This item specifies rewriting 85 ms during recording following the OUT point Rewriting of one 115 ms field occurs even when the minimum setting 5 ms is selected When cut edit is selected in item 317 to prevent this from happening a discontinuity in the audio signal occurs There is however no effect on the recording of the video signal a The cross fade time is 24 ms b The actual fade time is 49 ms c The actual fade time is 114 ms 813 AUDIO MONITOR add Specifies the type of audio mixing to be conducted on the OUTPUT MIXING rms digital audio signal output to the MONITOR OUTPUT L R average connector add Simple addition rms Multiplied average average Simple average When the CUE channel signal is output to the monitor signals are mixed by simple addition Menu List xlpueddy 175 xipueddy 176 Item number Item Setting Function 814 LEVEL METER peak 0 dB Specifies the mode in which the digital audio level is SCALE reference 0 dB displayed peak 0 dB Displays minus audio levels with the maximum level set at 0 dB reference 0 dB Displays plus and minus audi
44. EE EE PB PB Jog PB PB PB MUTING Variable PB PB PB MUTING INPUT CHECK NpUT button a Output signals during playback are PB PB only Output signals cannot be selected with the VTR SETUP menu item 017 PB EE SELECT MENU b When the INPUT CHECK button is held down the INPUT signals audio and video are output Output signals cannot be selected with the VTR SETUP menu item 017 PB EE SELECT MENU When the INPUT signals are output only monitor output is changed Line output signals are not changed c Pressing the F1 PB EE button changes the output signals during shuttle mode in the following ways VTR SETUP menu item 017 Output signals while the PB EE SELECT MENU PB EE button is held settings down PB MUTING EE EE PB PB EE EE EE EE PB MUTING When PB PB is selected in shuttle mode during HDCAM playback audio output is muted for playback speeds other than 1 to 2 times normal speed 4 2 HOME Menu 4 2 2 Record Inhibit Mode REC INH Record inhibit mode is selected by pressing the REC INH button Every time the button is pressed the setting toggles between off and on The record inhibit area is selected using the VTR SETUP menu item 003 REC INHIBIT AREA select all All recording is prohibited The REC INHIBIT indicator lights crash REC The normal record mode is disabled Use this setting when you want to record only during assemble
45. L1 2 L2 2 L3 2 L1023 1023 L1024 1023 Output G 2 2 2 1023 1023 Output B 2 2 2 1023 1023 MPEG 4 Visual Patent Portfolio License THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG 4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR i ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE MPEG 4 VISUAL STANDARD MPEG 4 VIDEO AND OR ii DECODING MPEG 4 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO PROVIDE MPEG 4 VIDEO NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA LLC SEE HTTP WWW MPEGLA COM MPEG LA is offering licenses for i manufacturing sales of any storage media storing MPEG 4 Visual video information ii distribution broadcasting of MPEG 4 Visual video information in any manner such as online video distribution service internet broadcasting TV broadcasting Other usage of this product may be required to obtain license from MPEGLA Please contact MPEG LA for any further information MPEG LA L L C 250 STEELE STREET SUITE 300 DENVER COLORADO 80206 http www mpegla com MPEG 4 Visual Patent Portfolio License xlpueddy 197 x pul N 198 Index A AC IN connector 30 Adjusting aud
46. Saving the Tele File data to a Memory Stick After pressing the CUE button press the ALT button 2 Press the T File MEMORY CARD button The T File CARD menu appears 4 4 CUE Menu To cancel saving the Tele File data Press the CLR button while the confirmation message appears Press the SAVE TFW button or SAVE CSV button while holding down the SFT button The VTR starts to save Tele File data to the Memory Stick After the saving of the data is completed the file name of the saved data and the directory where the file is stored are displayed When the Tele File data is saved as a tfw data SAVE TFW LOAD TFW COMPLETED SAVE File Name csu 214001662_1001115133223 tfu Directory ao MSSONY PRO TELEFILE DATA CSU NAME DATE LABEL LoaD EXIT ID ADD SAVE TFW LOAD TFW SAVE CSU ADD CSU NAME DATE LABEL LOAD EXIT ID ADD Directory where the file is stored MSSONY PRO TELEFILE DATA File name for the saved file LABEL_ID ID of the Tele File label _ DATE date and time when the file is saved YYMMDDHHMMSS tfw When the Tele File data is saved as a csv data 3 Press the LOAD TFW button The tfw files stored in the Memory Stick are displayed in a list SAVE TFW LOAD TFW COMPLETED S
47. via search key yoegqhe d Bulpiooay g Jaj deyo 120 e00000000000 900000000000 Jo 0000 0000 1 Use either method A or B A Rotate the search dial while holding down the PLAY button to adjust the playback speed The adjustment range is 15 in steps of 1 of the normal playback speed Press the or button while holding down the PLAY button to adjust the playback speed Every time the or button is pressed the speed changes by 1 frame B During playback at increased or decreased speed the SERVO indicator goes off since the servo is not locked capstan override 2 Release the PLAY button after you have finished adjusting the phase The VTR returns to normal speed playback and the SERVO indicator lights up 5 4 Playback 5 4 4 DMC Playback Overview of DMC playback DMC Dynamic Motion Control playback allows you to vary the playback speed in variable mode in the DT playback range from 1 to 2 times normal speed for certain sections of the tape then store the specified speed in memory for later playback For example during a live broadcast of a sporting event you can set the start and end points of important scenes while recording and immediately play back and broadcast those scenes using DMC playback Storing playback speeds in memory Follow the procedure below to store DMC playback speeds in me
48. 00 00 EXIT START START JUMP TC PST TC ENT TC SEL 3H STARTING TC Time code used as a reference when converting time code JUMPING TC The loopback point for converting time code with STARTING TC as the reference point and the conversion done in both forward and reverse directions The time code is discontinuous at this point The following table shows an example of how the 25 frame time code is discontinuous when the operating frequency is 25PsF the playback tape is 24 frames and STARTING TC is 01 00 00 00 and 24F JUMPING TC 22 00 00 00 JUMP TC SEL 3H 24 Frames TC 25 Frames TC JUMPING TC 22 00 00 00 20 09 36 00 01 00 01 01 01 00 01 00 Forward direction 01 00 01 00 01 00 00 24 t STARTING TC 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 4 00 59 59 23 00 59 59 24 Reverse direction 22 00 00 01 22 07 12 01 ae JUMPING TC 22 00 00 00 21 09 36 00 part 3 if necessary use the function buttons to change the settings For details on the settings made by these buttons see the following table Button Indication Function F3 TC CONV Specifies whether the time code is converted to time code or not F4 ORG TC DISP Specifies whether the time code is displayed or not on two lines in the HOME TC and PF menus along with the converted time code F6 START TC PST Press to preset the ST
49. 00000000 U Hoe 0000 0000 6 Tum the search dial to set the initial speed The selected speed is displayed in the time data display 6 2 Advanced Automatic Editing unpa 9 seideyo 135 6unip3 9 seideu9 136 7 Press the PREVIEW REVIEW and PREROLL buttons at the same time The tape prerolls and the player VTR begins playing at the initial speed 8 When the Ml indicator appears with a beep indicating that the IN point has been passed rotate the search dial to the desired playback speed s The varying playback speeds are stored in memory while the W indicator appears in the display 9 Press the STOP button If the W indicator goes off before you press the STOP button The VTR has reached its storage capacity and cannot store any more playback speed variations To exit DMC editing mode Press the ALT DMC buttons in HOME menu Performing DMC editing After setting the playback speeds in preview mode press the RECORDER button and REC EDIT button DMC editing is performed at the playback speed s stored in memory aoaooooooooooa 2000000000090 CG O O O O O Q OC PREVIEW REVIEW button To confirm the results of DMC editing Press the PREVIEW REVIEW button 6 2 2 Animation Editing Animation editing is a form of insert editing which makes it easier to record a succession of still fra
50. 196 Comment LUT 3 1024 Line No Output value Ll 0 L2 0 L3 1 L1023 1023 L1024 1023 L1025 0 L1026 0 L1027 1 L2047 1023 L2048 1023 L2049 0 L2050 0 L2051 0 L3071 1022 L3072 1023 LUT file type 3 R G and B have individual values individual curves and are aligned horizontally LUT10 in the header indicates the bit depth of the output is 10 bits The bit depth of the input is determined by the maximum number of lines This is an example of 10 bit input and 10 bit output LUT File Formats Applicable to This Board Comment LUT10 LineNo Input Output R Output G Output B value Ll 0 2 L2 1 2 L3 2 2 L1023 1022 1023 1023 1023 L1024 1023 1023 1023 1023 LUT file type 4 R G and B have individual values individual curves and are aligned horizontally The bit depth is not indicated in the header It is automatically determined by the number of lines and their values This is an example of 10 bit input and 10 bit output Comment Line No Input OutputR OutputG Output B value Ll 0 2 L2 1 2 L3 2 2 L1023 1022 1023 1023 1023 L1024 1023 1023 1023 1023 LUT file type 5 R G and B have individual values individual curves and are aligned horizontally The bit depth is not indicated in the header It is automatically determined by number of lines and their values There are no lines for input values This is an example of 10 bit input and 10 bit output Comment Line No Output R
51. 3 1 Connecting External Equipment sssseeeeeeeees 31 3 1 1 Making HD Digital Connections sesseeeeseeeseeeeesrserree 31 3 1 2 Making NTSC PAL Digital Connections 32 3 1 3 Cascade COnMeCt OM xis es c c 22h af ea csssaseveeiccl as ddoenezes shetecds 33 3 2 Reference Signals ccccssssseeeeeeesesssseeeeeeeeeeeesseees 34 3 2 1 Reference Signals for Output Video eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen 34 3 2 2 Reference Signal Connections ssssssessssessressesssesesse 35 3 3 Handling Cassettes cccccssseeeeeeeesesseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeees 36 3 3 1 Recommended Cassettes eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeresressesrreeresee 36 3 3 2 Inserting and Ejecting Cassettes cceesseceesseeesteeeenees 36 3 3 3 Preventing Accidental Erasure eecceesseceesteeeenteeeenee 37 3 4 Using a Memory Stick cccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 37 3 4 1 Notes on Memory Stick ceeecceesscesseeeesteeeeneeeeeaees 38 6 Table of Contets Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings 000 40 4 1 1 Menu Configuration ceeeeceesseceesneceeseceseceenaeeesaees 40 4 1 2 Changing Menu Settings eeeeseeseeeereeeseeceseeenees 40 4 1 3 Registering Items to the VTR SETUP Menu 000 4 4 1 4 VTR Memory Bank Function 0 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeees 42 4 1 5 Memory Stick Operations cceesceesteceeneeeeteeenaees 44 4 1 6 Adding Titles to
52. CHAR WARNING DISPLAY at dual line mode to on The first 16 characters of the warning message flashes on the second line For details about the warning messages see Warning Messages on page 144 When there are multiple warning messages each message flashes twice before it is replaced by the next message When there is no warning message the setting of the VTR SETUP menu item 626 DISPLAY INFORMATION select flashes on the second line instead To display remaining time on the tape Use the VTR SETUP menu item 628 REMAIN TIME DISPLAY to display remaining time on the tape off Do not display remaining time 10min Display remaining time when it is 10 minutes or less on Always display remaining time 4 3TC Menu 69 suas nu y p 13 dey9 70 When remaining time is 23 minutes TtlelR l2l3 5l 4 o l1l8l Rl2l3 When remaining time is five minutes T c R 2 3l s5l l l4 ol l lsl R 5 When remaining time to is 100 minutes or over T c RI 2 3 5 9 4 o 1 8 R Changing the superimpose position The superimpose position can be set to 16 different positions in the horizontal directions 0 to 15 and 24 different positions in the vertical directions 0 to 23 fo ooooooooooo0o0 Q 9000
53. Chapter 3 1 Connecting External Equipment 3 1 1 Making HD Digital Connections This example shows the connections when using an HDW F500 as player and an SRW 5000 5500 as recorder in 59 941 or 60i mode See Specifications in the Appendix page 140 for recommended XLR BNC and P S converters HDW F500 Player HD SDI OUTPUT 9 pin remote control cable DIGITAL I O INPUT HD SDI INPUT SRW 5000 5500 Recorder a The figure shows the SRW 5500 REMOTE 1 I O 9P HD SDI OUTPUT O Video monitor HD serial monitor 3 1 Connecting External Equipment 31 YLA eur dN umes g Jeideuo HLA 24 dn umes Je deyo 32 3 1 2 Making NTSC PAL Digital Connections This example shows how to connect two VTRs an SRW 5000 5500 as the player and a DVW 500 D 1 Component Digital VTR as the recorder SRW 5000 5500 Player Input REMOTE 1 IN 9P 9 pin remote control cable REMOTE 1 OUT BNC cable DIGITAL I O SERIAL V A IN
54. MODE 00 00 00 00 01 00 30 00 00 00 00 00 PD TC EXIT DF NOF REMAIN 01HOGM DF ALTHTC lt 4 6 Press the SET button to set the input data SET is displayed 00 0000 00 00 00 00 00 eye PD TC EXIT DF NDF REMAIN 01HOGM DF ALTHTC lt 4 T Press the PDTIME SET button 01 00 30 00 00 00 00 00 PD TC EXIT DF NOF DF S STILL HDCAM SR l REMAIN 01HO6M ALT TC q e Once the time code is preset it cannot be reverted e Operation information display cannot be displayed while the pulldown time code appears e The pulldown time code cannot be displayed while the machine to machine editing display appears 4 3 9 Presetting for Conversion from Frame Time Code TCCONV MENU Use the following procedure to set the time code conversion settings e09000000000 9000000000900 1 Press the TC button and then press the ALT button The ALT TC menu appears 2 Press the TCCONV MENU button The TC CONVERT menu appears 4 3 TC Menu sBunjes nue p se deyo 65 suas nu y p 13 dey9 66 STARTING TC 00 0000 00 JUMPING TC CONU 03 0000 00 on ORG TC disp on CURRENT TC 00 00
55. PAGE pace 0 10 00 10 00 00 i 11 00 11 00 00 NEXT 2 12 00 12 00 00 PAGE 3 13 00 13 00 00 4 14 00 14 00 00 5 BE 6 16 00 16 00 00 17 00 17 00 00 we 8 18 00 18 00 00 y s 19 00 19 00 00 Stitt HDCAN SR CUE PAGE CUENUM M CUE l P ROLL SET SET CLEAR REMAIN 01H06M A CUE Press the ENTRY button Data for the specified cue number are erased and the data column becomes blank Erased cue point PREV Blank 1 Eostoo 13 00 001 PAGE PAGE o0 10 00 10 00 00 1 11 00 11 00 00 NEXT 2 12 00 12 00 00 PAGE 3 13 00 13 00 00 4 4 AN4 nn N s Ds 6 5 00 Te UU UU 7 17 00 17 00 00 ae 8 18 00 18 00 00 ee M 3 19 00 19 00 00 STILL HOCAN SR CUE PAGE CUENUM M CUE l P ROLL SET SET CLEAR REMAIN 01HO6M A CUE lt To erase all cue point data Press the CLR button while holding down the SFT button A message asking you to confirm the operation appears in the display In EXTEND mode press the CLR button while holding down the SFT button again to erase all data for cue number 0 to 99 In PAGE mode press the CLR button while holding down the SFT button again to erase data for the cue points on the current page 4 4 5 Prerolling to a Cue Point Select the preroll time to a cue point with pressing the CUE P ROLL button You can set a preroll time of 0 to 30 seconds Prerolling to a cue point oooooooo0oo0o0o0 200000000000 Oo000
56. PF1 PF2 Personal Function menus Use these menus to register up to 40 of the most frequently used items from the other menus up to 10 items each can be registered to PF1 ALT PF1 PF2 and ALT PF2 SET UP menu This menu enables the following settings The VTR BANK menu allows up to eight pages of menu settings to be saved Use the MEMORY CARD menu to store current settings of the VTR and up to eight pages of the contents of the VTR memory bank to a Memory Stick Use the scrollable PF ASSIGN menu to display the items that can be registered and to select and register the most frequently used menu items Use the scrollable VTR SETUP menu to display the items necessary for making initial settings and to directly change settings without registering them with the function buttons for each menu Use the PANEL SETUP menu to set control panel operations such as the keyboard sound output MAINTENANCE menu Use this menu to access the maintenance functions For details refer to the Maintenance Manual Volume 1 A full complement of storage recall functions These functions allow you to use titles to store and recall menu settings in either the VTR s internal memory banks or Memory Sticks 1 1 Features 1 3 M IAJBAC JE deUD 14 VTR memory banks These memory banks allow you to store up to eight pages of VTR settings in addition to the current VTR settings Factory settings are also stored here allowing
57. Selects whether to erase cue point data in multi cue mode by inject off when a cassette is inserted on Erase cue point data off Do not erase cue point data 124 Tele File MENU off Specifies whether or not the Tele File menu appears auto popup on automatically when a cassette with a memory label is inserted off The Tele File menu does not appear on The Tele File menu appears 125 Tele File THREAD not clear Specifies whether or not the thread counter is reset when a COUNTER clear when format memory label is formatted mode not clear The thread counter is not reset when format The thread counter is reset 126 Tele File ENTRY IN OUT Point Specifies whether or not to display the log data IN and POINT CUE Point OUT points in the Tele File menu IN OUT Point The log data IN and OUT points is displayed CUE Point The log data IN and OUT points is not displayed 127 Tele File IN OUT on Specifies whether or not to input the log data IN and OUT Input Continue off points continuously in the Tele File menu on The log data IN and OUT points can be input continuously off The log data IN and OUT points cannot be input continuously 128 Tele File Real Date without When recording Tele File data select whether to record the Real Time Mode with real date time without Do not record real date time with Record real date time Menu List xlpueddy 157 xlpueddy 158
58. There are two ways to record time codes on the VTR One way is to record the output of the VTR s internal time code generator The other is to directly record time codes that are input from an external time code generator The output from the internal time code generator can either be set to a specified initial value or synchronized with an external time code generator The internal time code generator time code settings are made with the REGENE SOURCE F7 TCG MODE buttons Menu selections and settings are shown in the following table Menu TCG Internal TCG Preset F6 REGENE SOURCE F7 TCG MODE prst Setting Time codes can be freely set using the internal time code generator Internal TCG Regenerate int LTC regene Lock to the time data recorded on the time code tracks int VITC regene Lock to the time data recorded as video AUX data on the tape ext LTC regene Lock to the time data on the TIME CODE IN connector SDI V regene Lock to the VITC time data in the video signal from the HD SDI INPUT A B connector SDI L regene Lock to the LTC time data in the video signal from the HD SDI INPUT A B connector auto int LTC regene is set in assemble or insert mode and prst is set in other modes Regenerated signals are selected using the VTR SETUP menu item 608 TCG UBG REGENE MODE se
59. Upconverted HD SDI output during Digital Betacam format playback FC During Digital Betacam playback up convert output from the optional HKSR 5001 format converter LUT File Formats Applicable to This Board Examples of the five lookup table LUT file formats applicable to this board are shown below Line numbers Lx in the tables below do not appear in the actual LUT files LUT file type 1 R G and B have the same value the same curve LUT 1 1024 in the header indicates one output data block common to R G and B corresponding with the 10 bit 1024 input data The bit depth of the output is determined by the maximum output value This is an example of 10 bit input and 10 bit output Comment LUT 1 1024 Line No Output value Ll 0 L2 0 L3 1 L1023 1023 L1024 1023 LUT file type 2 R G and B have individual values individual curves and are aligned vertically in the order of R G B LUT 3 1024 in the header indicates three separate output data blocks for R G and B corresponding with the 10 bit 1024 input data The bit depth of the output is determined by the maximum output value The output values on lines L1 to L1024 are R values the values on lines L1025 to L2048 are G values and the values on lines L2049 to L3072 are B values This is an example of 10 bit input and 10 bit output LUT File Formats Applicable to This Board xlpueddy 195 xlpueddy
60. When the operating frequency is set to 23 98PsF specifies Item PD EXT SD REF LOCK MODE Setting off lock1 lock2 Function whether or not the pulldown output signal and down converted output signal are synchronized with the reference signal by the REF INPUT 2 connector off The pulldown output signal and down converted output signal are not synchronized with the reference signal by the REF INPUT 2 connector lock1 The pulldown output signal and down converted output signal are synchronized with the reference signal by the REF INPUT 2 connector lock2 The pulldown output signal and down converted output signal are synchronized with the reference signal by the REF INPUT 2 connector When the PB E E mode is selected the amount of delay on the A frame of the pulldown output signal for the A frame of the main video signal is fixed to 2 frames 59 94i e A warning message appears when the HD reference signal and REF INPUT 2 reference signal are not input or not synchronized e lock1 and lock2 are effective only when the operation mode of this unit is set to 23 98 24PsF e When editing in 23 98 24PsF mode with this unit as the recorder and with lock2 selected phase synchronization may not be achieved within 5 seconds Also edit In points may be out of alignment In these cases select off A06 PD SUPERIMPOSED TIME CODE ID off on When item 620 and
61. blink off The number of error messages is not displayed on The number of error messages is displayed blink The number of error messages is displayed When a new error is detected the number flashes Menu List x pu ddy 169 Items Relating to the Video Control Nos 706 to Item number Item Setting Function 706 FORCED auto Specifies whether or not Y add operation mode is VERTICAL forced YADD off automatically turned on during DT playback INTERPOLATION auto Y add operation mode is automatically turned on OFF forced YADD off Y add operation mode is off all the time 707 ROUNDING simple Selects whether to perform A ROUNDING processing ee Sout only adaptive simple Do not perform A ROUNDING processing 10 bit input signals are simply rounded to 8 bits adaptive Perform A ROUNDING processing 10 bit input signals are adaptively rounded to 8 bits 708 MASTER LEVEL 0 0 0H Adjusts the level of the HD video signal output from the HD HD SDI OUTPUT connectors Simultaneously adjusts the Y preset 100 Pp and Pr levels 4000H 100 4000H 141 3 5A70H 709 Y LEVEL HD 0 0 0H Adjusts the level of the HD video signal output from the HD preset 100 SDI OUTPUT connectors Adjusts the Y level of the video 4000H 1
62. editing or insert editing video CTL Video and CTL signal recording is inhibited audio CTL Audio and CTL signal recording is inhibited casst This is displayed when recording is inhibited because the record protect plug is set This setting cannot be selected REC INHIBIT indicator aooooooooooaoa 99999090909900903 O O mm O mm O GC 4 2 3 Selecting the Edit Mode and Edit Channel ASSEMBLE INS TC INS VIDEO INS AUDIO and INS CUE Select assemble or insert edit mode Selecting assemble edit mode Press the ASSEMBLE button in the HOME menu Selecting the insert edit mode Press one of the following INSERT buttons in the HOME menu INS TC INS VIDEO INS AUDIO INS CUE SRW 5500 only For more information about editing operations see Chapter 6 Editing on page 124 4 2 4 Preread Settings PRE READ This setting allows pre reading reading before writing in insert edit mode To select pre reading press the ALT PRE READ buttons Pressing the buttons cycles the settings through on off on Preread both video signal and audio signal off No pre reading video only Preread video signal only F1 button PREREAD indicator 8900000000000 200000000000 The pre read function can be used for pre read editing 4 2 5 Still Pictu
63. errors still remaining in the signal rectified Output interface Component video data is converted into serial data and multiplexed with audio data and time code then output in the HD SDI format 11 1 1 Features MBIAJOAC Je deUD M MAQ JE deUD 12 With an HD SD converter board installed the unit can output both D1 SDI and analog composite signals Besides audio data is output as digital data multiplexed with the HD SDI signal it is also output via an AES EBU digital interface Analog data converted from digital data is also provided HDCAM format The HDCAM format uses tape with the same 12 65 mm width as the Betacam series to enable recording of up to two hours of high quality HD video Video signal compression uses prefilter and coefficient recording technology Advanced recording and playback functions High quality digital recording This unit uses a component system to record video signals An AES EBU format with a wide dynamic range is used for 12 channel audio recording A unique and powerful error correction circuit and concealment circuit are used in digital signal processing Accurate and stable video signal output is made possible by setting and adjusting the internal digital video processor Record playback modes HDCAMSSR format SRW 5000 5500 or HDCAM format SRW 5500 As the record playback mode you can select from the following nine modes 1080x1920 59 941 60i1 50i 23 98PsF 24
64. frequency discrepancy of 0 1 when a tape without compatibility is played back the cassette is automatically ejected LEVEL3 When a tape other than in the mode selected as the system is played back the cassette is automatically ejected This includes PsF and interlace mode differences message 17 PB FREQUENCY IS UNSUITABLE appears 020 P PLAY Selects the mode for output of program play video and audio from the FC OUT connectors off Use the normal mode on Program play video and audio is output 021 SOFT REWIND off Functions identically to previous models on When an HDCAM SR L cassette is inserted in the unit and the PREROLL and SHUTTLE buttons are pressed simultaneously the tape is transported to its end in fast forward mode and then to its beginning in SOFT REWIND mode so that the tape is wound in smoother shape The cassette is then automatically ejected Items Relating to Operation Panels Nos 101 to Item number Item Setting Function 101 SELECTION FOR dial direct Determines how the unit is set to search mode SEARCH DIAL via search key dial direct The unit enters search mode when you rotate ENABLE the search dial in all modes except recording and edit modes via search key The unit enters search mode when you press the SHUTTLE JOG or VAR button 102 REFERENCE off Specifies where or not to display a warning when audio SYSTEM ALARM
65. to ADD ADD PRESS CLR to CANCEL CSU NAME DATE LABEL LOAD EXIT ID ADD 3 Press the F4 ADD CSV button 4 4 CUE Menu To cancel adding the csv file to the Tele File label Press the CLR button while the confirmation message appears Press the LOAD ADD button while holding down the SFT button The VTR starts to add csv file to the Tele File label When the procedure is completed COMPLETED appears in the display SAVE Add CSU File to Tele File TFW IDIR MSSONY PRO TELEF ILE DATA CSU LOAD COMPLETED 2 TFW SAVE CSU ADD CSU NAME DATE LABEL LOAD EXIT ID ADD 4 4 3 Registering Cue Points There are two ways to register cue points 1 by direct registration of the tape address when the ENTRY button is pressed and 2 by the entry of cue point data with the numeric buttons Registering cue points by pressing the ENTRY button O o o O o m Q c C O O m O O O T Press the ALT PAGE MODE buttons or the ALT F9 EXTEND MODE buttons 2 if you selected PAGE mode press the PREV PAGE button or NEXT PAGE button to select a desired page or use the numeric buttons to enter the page number in the data entry window then press the PAGE SET button 3 Press the
66. 2 59 94i 720 4 2 2 59 94P 1080 4 4 4 23 98PsF 24PsF 1080 4 2 2 60i 1080 4 4 4 24PsF 25PsF 625 50i 720 4 2 2 50P 1080 4 4 4 25PsF 29 97PsF 525 59 94i 720 4 2 2 59 94P 1080 4 4 4 29 97PsF 30PsF 1080 4 4 4 30PsF 50i 625 50i 720 4 2 2 50P 1080 4 4 4 50i 59 94i 525 59 94i 720 4 2 2 59 94P 1080 4 4 4 59 94i 60i 1080 4 4 4 60i 1035 4 2 2 59 94 525 59 94i 60i 720 4 2 2 50P 625 50i 1080 4 2 2 50i 59 94P 525 59 94i 1080 4 2 2 59 94i 1080 4 2 2 50i 625 50i 720 4 2 2 50P 720 4 2 2 50P 625 50i 1080 4 2 2 50i 1080 4 2 2 9 59 94i 525 59 94i 720 4 2 2 59 94P 720 4 2 2 59 94P 525 59 94i 1080 4 2 2 59 94i 1080 4 4 4 23 98PsF 1080 4 2 2 23 98PsF gt 525 59 94i 2 1080 4 2 2 59 94i 720 4 2 2 59 94P 24PsF 1080 4 2 2 24PsF 1080 4 2 2 60i 25PsF 625 50i 1080 4 2 2 25PsF 720 4 2 2 50P 29 97PsF 525 59 94i 2 1080 4 2 2 29 97PsF 720 4 2 2 59 94P 30PsF 1080 4 2 2 30PsF 50i 625 50i 2 1080 4 2 2 50i 720 4 2 2 50P 59 94 525 59 94i 2 1080 4 2 2 59 94i 720 4 2 2 59 94P 60i 1080 4 2 2 60i numbers 90000 to 99999 and SRW 5500 serial numbers 30000 to 39999 as they are standard equipped with support d When the system setting is 1080 only playback is possible e When the system setting is 720 only playback is possible Menu List 1 93 Relation between HKDV 900 503 setting items and setup menu items of this unit In the cells of the Setup menu items of this unit column the brackets indicate available outputs
67. 4 2 2 23 98PsF 24PsF 25PsF 29 97PsF 30PsF 50i 59 94i 3 60i 3 1920 x 1080 4 4 4 23 98PsF optional HKSR 5003 required 24PsF 25PsF 29 97PsF 30PsF 50i 59 94i 60i 1280 x 720 4 2 2 50P 59 94P HDCAM 1920 x 1080 4 2 2 29 98 SF playback only on SRW 5000 APSF z 25PsF S 29 97PsF x 30PsF 50i 59 94 60i Recording formats Cassette type Playback mode System frequency Digital Betacam 625 4 2 2 50i optional HKSR 5002 required 525 4 2 2 59 94i a When the number of valid input signal lines is 1035 the system detects this and automatically selects 1035 recording mode b The HKSR 5003 is not required for units with serial numbers 15001 or higher excluding SRW 5000 serial numbers 90000 to 99999 and SRW 5500 serial numbers 30000 to 39999 as they are standard equipped to support 1920 x 1080 4 4 4 recording and playback Menu List 1 91 xlpueddy 192 Recording tape format conversion outputs J ee 1080 720 Recording 23 98PsF 24PsF 25PsF 29 97PsF 30PsF 50i 59 94i 60i 50P 59 94P tape format 1080 23 98PsF O e A A A Aa 43 43 24PsF e O A A A Aa a2 a2 25PsF A A O A A 43 A 29 97PsF A A A O A oa e 30PsF A A A O A o3 50i A A 4P A O A A 59 94i A 4P a A O 60i A gt a a O A O 720 s5op O 59 94P O O Normal playback of video audio and time code possible
68. 94 4 5 3 Selecting the FC LUT Function FC LUT BANK 96 4 6 AUDIO MON sssicaccceciitaceseuieed ctintiacuenincnesineibaeednieadenianads 99 4 6 1 Selecting the Audio Input Signal AUDIO IN 100 4 6 2 Digital Audio Output Signal Source Track Selection DIGOUT EXCHING ennan enana 100 4 6 3 Analog Audio Output Signal Source Track Selection ANAOUT EXCHNG hrania enisl 101 4 6 4 Digital Audio Output Signal Source Track Selection SDOUTEXCHNG renren e a eters 101 4 6 5 Audio Transition Type Selection for Digital Audio Editing AUDIO EDIT py ntnasonanin a 102 4 6 6 Fade Processing Time Selection for Digital Audio Editing FADE FME e a E E R 102 4 6 7 External Device Audio Edit Preset Command Replace Mode Selection EDIT PRESET REPLACE CHANNEL SEEEC harra a e vases R A e a A aE 103 4 6 8 External Device Digital Audio Edit Preset Command Replace Mode Selection AUDIO EDIT PRESET REPLACE inienn a a 103 4 6 9 External Device Analog Audio Edit Preset Command Replace Mode Selection ANALOG AUDIO EDIT REPLACE cote rerin n R AA 104 4 6 10 PITCH GROUP Selection PITCH CORRECTION GROUP SELECT oec nuaa 104 4 7 SET UP MOM icsccnccdscecsssuccinscnentucdeieseriedavewerstavanaedusans 106 427 1 VER SETUP Mein sass ties nns iae on 107 4 7 2 PANEL SETUP Mei tc cetecs sistisatesstedsiagscaradisasianseeedeces 109 Chapter 5 Recording Playback 5 1 Preparing for Recording seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 111 5 1 1 S
69. Appliance Connector Plug with earthing contacts that conforms to the safety regulations of each country if applicable 2 Use the Power Cord 3 core mains lead Appliance Connector Plug conforming to the proper ratings Voltage Ampere If you have questions on the use of the above Power Cord Appliance Connector Plug please consult a qualified service personnel AVERTISSEMENT 1 Utilisez un cordon d alimentation cable secteur a 3 fils fiche femelle fiche m le avec des contacts de mise a la terre conformes a la r glementation de s curit locale applicable 2 Utilisez un cordon d alimentation cable secteur a 3 fils fiche femelle fiche male avec des caract ristiques nominales tension amp rage appropri es Pour toute question sur l utilisation du cordon d alimentation fiche femelle fiche m le ci dessus consultez un technicien du service apr s vente qualifi WARNUNG 1 Verwenden Sie ein gepriiftes Netzkabel 3 adriges Stromkabel einen gepr ften Gerateanschluss einen gepr ften Stecker mit Schutzkontakten entsprechend den Sicherheitsvorschriften die im betreffenden Land gelten 2 Verwenden Sie ein Netzkabel 3 adriges Stromkabel einen Ger teanschluss einen Stecker mit den geeigneten Anschlusswerten Volt Ampere Wenn Sie Fragen zur Verwendung von Netzkabel Ger teanschluss Stecker haben wenden Sie sich bitte an qualifiziertes Kundendienstpersonal CAUTION The apparatus shall not be exp
70. CPU board SS 95 and drum CPU board DR 508 was detected 97 NVRAM CHECK SUM ERROR An operation fault was detected in the servo system NV RAM board DR 508 FF SV UNDEFINE ERROR Undefined SV error was detected AO SY UNDEFINE ERROR Undefined SY error was detected A2 SY1 SY2 DPRAM ERROR A DPRAM board SS 95 operation fault between SYS1 and SYS2 was detected A5 SY FC DPRAM ERROR A DPRAM board FC 91 operation fault between SYS1 and FC was detected A8 SY NVRAM CHECK SUM ERROR A SYS NVRAM board SS 95 operation fault was detected B3 XXX PLDX INITIAL ERROR An initialization error in the PLD was detected The description of XXX at the beginning of the message and of X immediately after the PLD depends on the PLD where the error was detected Display example SYS PLD1 INITIAL ERROR B8 SY1 SY2 INTERFACE ERROR A SYS CPU communications fault was detected B9 SY SV INTERFACE ERROR An SV CPU communications fault was detected BA SY EQ INTERFACE ERROR An EQ CPU communications fault was detected BB SY FC INTERFACE ERROR An FC CPU communications fault was detected BC SY 50PIN INTERFACE ERROR A communications fault with the 50 pin CPU was detected BD SY CP MISMATCH ERROR A fault was detected in the pairing of the main unit and the lower control panel This appears when the lower control panel of another unit is connected to this unit for example Warning Messages When one of the problems described below is det
71. CUE SRW 5500 only Menu List xipueddy 179 xipueddy 180 Item number 833 Item AUDIO PB LEVEL Sub items A PB LEVEL CH1 A PB LEVEL CH2 A PB LEVEL CH3 A PB LEVEL CH4 A PB LEVEL CH5 A PB LEVEL CH6 A PB LEVEL CH7 A PB LEVEL CH8 A PB LEVEL CH9 A PB LEVEL CH10 A PB LEVEL CH11 A PB LEVEL CH12 A PB LEVEL CUE Setting FFFF HEX 4000 HEX 0 HEX Function Sets the audio playback level Menu List Item number 834 Item DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT EXCHANGE Sub items Setting DIGITAL OUT CH1 TR1 TR12 DIGITAL OUT CH2 TR1 TR2 TR12 DIGITAL OUT CH3 TR1 TR3 TR12 DIGITAL OUT CH4 TR1 TR4 TR12 DIGITAL OUT CH5 TR1 TRS TR12 DIGITAL OUT CH6 TR1 TR6 TR12 DIGITAL OUT CH7 TR1 TR7 TR12 DIGITAL OUT CH8 TR1 TR8 TR12 DIGITAL OUT CH9 TR1 TRY TR12 DIGITAL OUT CH10 TR1 TR10 TR12 DIGITAL OUT CH11 TR1 TR11 TR12 Function Specifies the audio multiplexed with HD SDI output and the signal tracks to be output to AES EBU format audio output channels 1 to 12 Note that SD SDI also follows these settings when SDOUT EXCHNG is set to dis disable Menu List xipueddy 181 xipueddy 18
72. DEFAULT BANK is copied from the title of CURRENT SETUP There is complete data compatibility between the SRW 5000 and SRW 5500 On how to check the items for which DEFAULT values have been changed from FACTORY PRESET values see To check the items for which DEFAULT values have been changed on page 109 4 1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings 4 2 HOME Menu The HOME menu sets the basic VTR operation conditions for recording playback and editing The HOME VIDEO AUDIO TC PF1 and PF2 menus show information that includes the VTR operation mode time code of the current position and time code type etc To activate the HOME menu Press the HOME button To change the HOME menu page Press the ALT button PB EE EE RECINH off ASSEN BLE off INS TC off PLAY LOCK 00 02 39 18 AIN SS cSstear DUT sSrSssisSis IN OUT CO STIcL rocan sri LLJ _ HOCAN SR INS VIDEO off INS INS AUDIO CUE REMAIN 01H06M Operation mode Servo lock status Tape format Tape running speed Name of the displayed menu Remaining tape amount For details on time codes see 4 3 TC Menu on page 59 Button Indication Function Settings F1 PB EE Selects of output signals PB EE F2 REC INH Disables recording on off F3 ASSEMBLE Select
73. Deutschland GmbH Hedelfinger Strasse 61 70327 Stuttgart Deutschland Bei jeglichen Angelegenheiten in Bezug auf Kundendienst oder Garantie wenden Sie sich bitte an die in den separaten Kundendienst oder Garantiedokumenten aufgefiihrten Anschriften Dieser Apparat darf nicht im Wohnbereich verwendet werden Fur Kunden in Europa Australien und Neuseeland WARNUNG Dies ist eine Einrichtung welche die Funk Entstorung nach Klasse A besitzt Diese Einrichtung kann im Wohnbereich Funkst rungen verursachen in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber verlangt werden angemessene Ma nahmen durchzuf hren und daf r aufzukommen WARNING Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss In order to use this product safely avoid prolonged listening at excessive sound pressure levels AVERTISSEMENT Une pression acoustique excessive en provenance des couteurs ou du casque peut provoquer une baisse de P acuit auditive Pour utiliser ce produit en toute s curit vitez coute prolong e des pressions sonores excessives WARNUNG Zu hoher Schalldruck von Ohrh rern und Kopfh rern kann Geh rsch den verursachen Um dieses Produkt sicher zu verwenden vermeiden Sie l ngeres H ren bei sehr hohen Schalldruckpegeln For kundene i Norge Dette utstyret kan kobles til et IT str mfordelingssystem Apparatet m tilkoples jordet stikkontakt Suomessa asuville asiakkaille Laite on liitett v s
74. HD SDI OUTPUT connector off No information is superimposed on Information is superimposed Menu List xipueddy 167 Item number 622 Item CHARACTER H POSITION Setting 0 15 Function Sets the horizontal position of text information superimposed on the signal output from the MONITOR connector of SD SDI OUT the SD OUT COMPOSITE connector and HD SDI OUTPUT connector A setting of 0 displays the information at the left edge of the screen and the position moves to the right as the setting is increased There are 16 possible settings from 0 to 15 623 CHARACTER V POSITION 22 23 Sets the vertical position of text information superimposed on the signal output from the MONITOR connector of SD SDI OUT the SD OUT COMPOSITE connector and HD SDI OUTPUT connector A setting of 0 displays the information at the bottom of the screen and the position moves up as the setting is increased There are 24 possible settings from 0 to 23 If two line display is selected in item 626 sometimes the second line will disappear in the middle of the screen 624 CHARACTER TYPE without BG outlined translucent with BG Sets the style of text information such as time codes output from the MONITOR connector of SD SDI OUT the SD OUT COMPOSITE connector and HD SDI OUTPUT connector without BG White characters with no background outlined White characters outli
75. I O AES EBU INPUT connector SDI Selects signal input to HD SDI INPUT A connector A IN ALL sub item Sets the items A IN CH1 to CH12 to the same value Menu List Item number Item Setting Function 831 NON AUDIO AES EBU Selects a non audio input signal The setting is in units of SELECT SDI stereo pairs When this is set to other than off the setting Sub items off of item 830 is invalid AES EBU Selects signal input to DIGITAL I O AES EBU CH1 2 INPUT connector as a data input SDI Selects signal input to HD SDI INPUT A connector as CH3 4 a data input CH5 6 off Treats input as audio Select the input signal with item CH7 8 830 CH9 10 CH11 12 HDCAM REC BURST DATA MODE Selects the format when non audio data is to be recorded MODE SRW 5500 CONTINUOS MODE on an HDCAM tape only BURST DATA MODE Select this to record data compressed in video frame units Dolby E etc CONTINUOS MODE Select this to record data compressed without reference to video frames Dolby Digital AC 3 etc 832 AUDIO REC LEVEL FFFF HEX Sets the recording level Sub items 4000 HEX A REC LEVEL CH1 A REC LEVEL CH2 0 HEX A REC LEVEL CH3 A REC LEVEL CH4 A REC LEVEL CH5 A REC LEVEL CH6 A REC LEVEL CH7 A REC LEVEL CH8 A REC LEVEL CH9 A REC LEVEL CH10 A REC LEVEL CH11 A REC LEVEL CH12 A REC LEVEL
76. L Lower control panel 19 M Maintenance 139 Manual editing 138 Memory label 12 13 78 Memory Stick Access indicator 25 adding titles 49 data compatibility 50 formatting 44 operations 44 recalling 47 slot 25 storing 45 storing cue point lists 46 Menu changing a CUE point into an edit point 78 configuration 40 control section 19 list 151 PANEL SETUP menu 109 PFI menu 40 PF2 menu 40 registering items to the VTR SETUP menu 41 selection buttons 19 Moisture condensation 139 MONITOR L buttons 19 MONITOR OUTPUT L R connectors 27 MONITOR R buttons 19 Monitoring video and audio signals being recorded 114 MULTI CONTROL knob 19 N NDF Non drop frame mode 165 Normal speed playback 118 Numeric buttons and buttons 21 O Overview automatic editing 124 DMC editing 135 DMC playback 120 P PAGE mode 163 PANEL SETUP menu 109 Pausing the current time 63 PB LEVEL button 20 PCM CIA card slot 25 PF1 menu 13 157 PF2 menu 13 157 PHONES jack 19 PHONES level control 19 Pitch correction function 12 PLAY button 22 Playback 118 capstan override playback 120 DMC playback 120 jog mode playback 118 non audio data 121 normal speed playback 118 shuttle mode playback 119 variable mode playback 119 variable speed playback 118 PLAYER RECORDER buttons 21 POWER switch 18 Preparing for playback 116 adjusting the audio playback level 116 improve the vertical resolution 185 selecting th
77. No Time Mrk Tk Cut Scn ENTRY POINT 00 01 02 03 NG 00 01 01 03 KP salsalan ss 00 03 04 03 OK 00 03 03 03 COMMNT 00 04 04 03 OK 00 04 03 03 o E2 3 EDIT 4 00 05 05 03 NG 00 05 04 03 5 6 00 06 06 03 OK 00 06 05 03 CHANGE DATA DEL MARK PRO TAPE CUENUM WRITE POINT TECT INFO POINT EXIT To cancel a write protection Press the PROTECT button A message appears in the control panel display requesting confirmation of cancellation operation Press the PROTECT button while holding down the SFT button Inserting a new line 1 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the line that will be under the new line to be inserted To move the cursor using the numeric buttons Enter the line number using the numeric buttons Then press the CUENUM POINT button The cursor will move to the line specified by the numeric buttons If the movement of the cursor P is not linked with the cursor buttons the cursor gt will not move when the cursor buttons are pressed To link the cursor gt with the cursor buttons Press the cursor center button Each press of the button alternately links and unlinks the cursor P 2 Press the ENTRY button while holding down the SFT button A new line is inserted above the line where the cursor P is located and the current time data is entered on the new line Moving a line Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to th
78. Press the ALT ATTRIB EDIT buttons Press the t or l button to select ID tape ID or ADMIN administrator then press the ENTRY button FORMAT REC DA T File TITLEIN ATTRIB EDIT SELECT LN T UNDO TITLE ALL o oo gt 1 00 ADMIN ATTAI 2 00 EDIT 3 00 Press ENTRY to edit 4 00 Press CLR to CANCEL COPY 5 00 toCUE pee ee T File WRITE MODE PRTEC 3 Press the or gt button to select a character 4 4 CUE Menu 91 sBunjes nue p se deyo suas nu y p saideuD 92 E AGCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRSTUVUXYZ abcdefghjiklmnoparstuvuxyz 012345678911 lt gt t k 12 51 H2R _ HDID2CAM SPACE BACK SET SAVE SPACE LETTER EXIT 4 Press the F7 SET LETTER button or the cursor center button The selected character is entered g AECDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRSTUVUXYZ abcdefghjiklmnoparstuvuxyz 012345678911 lt gt t k 12 51 H 8 _ HD1D2CAM SPACE BACK SET CANCEL SAVE SPACE LETTER EXIT 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter more characters To enter a space Press the SPACE button If you enter a wrong character Press the BACK SPACE button to go back Then re enter the character To start the procedure over again Press the CAN
79. Ranging from Ranging from Ranging from 40 to 40 50 to 50 50 to 50 Variable mode Playback speed is 1 times normal speed when the search dial is rotated fully counterclockwise and 2 times normal speed for Digital Betacam playback 1 to 3 times normal speed when rotated clockwise Jog mode playback Follow the procedure below to play back in jog mode Wo 0000 0000 geg 0000 O B Cy 1 Press the JOG button turning it on The VTR enters still picture mode 2 Rotate the search dial in the desired playback direction and to the desired angle The tape is played back slowly at a speed corresponding to the rotational speed of the search dial A direction indicator lt or lights up to indicate the direction of playback 3 Stop rotating the search dial to stop jog mode playback The indicator lights up For details on switching the search dial functions refer to the Maintenance Manual Volume 1 Shuttle mode playback Follow the procedure below to play back in shuttle mode e00000000000 200000000000 00000000 088 9292 Oo 00 0000 Jo 0000 0000 Press the SHUTTLE button turning it on The VTR enters still picture mode 2 Rotate the search dial in the desired playback direction and set the angle of rotation as required
80. Track Selection DIGOUT EXCHNG To make the source track selection for the digital audio output signal audio multiplexed with HD SDI and SD SDI 1 to 8 channels and AES EBU audio output are targeted on each of channels 1 to 12 use the following procedure Note that when SDOUT EXCHNG in the SDOUT menu is set to ena SD SDI source track selection follows the settings of the SDOUT menu T Press the DIGOUT EXCHNG button The DIGOUT menu appears together with a source track selection window for the digital audio output signals DIGOUT CHI TRI DIcoUT Uae CH2 TR2 CHI CH2 CH3 CH4 CHS CHS DIGOUT TR2 TR3 TR4 TRS TRE CH3 TR3 CH CH8 CH9 CATO EXT 1 E12 DIGOUT TR7 TR8 TRO TRIO TRII TRI2 CH4 TR4 DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT EXIT CHS CH6 CH8 TR5 TR6 TR TR8 2 Carry out the source track selection for the digital audio output signal on each channel TR1 to TR12 Select the audio signals recorded on tracks 1 to 12 3 Press the EXIT button This returns to the AUDIO menu screen To make output settings for individual channels with the F buttons By pressing any of the DIGOUT CH1 TR1 to DIGOUT CH8 TR8 buttons menu and the DIGOUT CH9 to DIGOUT CH12 buttons in the ALT DIG OUT screen obtained by pressing the ALT button you can select the source track for each channel To make in
81. VIDEO Menu sBunjes nue v Je deyo 97 suas nu y p 13 dey9 98 DETAIL LUT Bank 5 1 10to10SLogA lut FC LUT LOAD COMPLETED File Name BANKS_10SLogsAto10 lut Directory MSSONY PRO VTR SRWSOOO LUT FC LUT SAVE FC LUT RESET e Directory displayed MSSONY PRO VTR SRW5000 LUT e File name displayed BANKx_NAME lut BANKx BANK number for VTR LUT NAME VTR LUT name Restoring resetting all VTR LUT settings to factory default values 1 Press the FC LUT RESET button A message asking you to confirm the operation appears in the display Press the FC LUT RESET button while holding down the SFT button All VTR LUT settings return to their factory default values To cancel the reset operation Press the CLR button Selecting FC LUT files Press the FC LUT MODE button to select the FC LUT file A red mark appears to the left of the selected LUT file in the list 4 5 VIDEO Menu 4 6 AUDIO Menu In the AUDIO menu make audio signal adjustments The AUDIO menu screen shows the VTR operation mode Press the AUDIO button current position time code time code type and so on To access the AUDIO menu screen AUDIO TAPE LOCK IN 00 01 56 27 AIN st sie i lt AOUT s is is Us DIGOUT IN OUT EXCHNG ANAOUT EXCHNG SDOUT EXCHNG
82. adaptors BCJ XP TRA from CANARE Corporation or equivalent For optionally available AC power cords refer to the supplied Installation Manual Design and specifications are subject to change without notice Specifications Notes e Always make a test recording and verify that it was recorded successfully SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR ITS RECORDING MEDIA EXTERNAL STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS TO RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE Always verify that the unit is operating properly before use SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS OF PRESENT OR PROSPECTIVE PROFITS DUE TO FAILURE OF THIS UNIT EITHER DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD OR AFTER EXPIRATION OF THE WARRANTY OR FOR ANY OTHER REASON WHATSOEVER Error Messages Warning Messages Messages Condition Error Messages When the unit ceases to operate correctly due to malfunction or an internal system error the alarm will sound and an error message will be displayed on the display Only one message will be displayed even when multiple errors occur but the error log menu keeps a history of the errors For more information about error messages refer to the Maintenance Manual After the error occurs eliminate the cause of the error
83. and button or the MULTI CONTROL knob select the setting value When subitems are displayed use the cursor f and button or the MULTI CONTROL knob to select the subitem to be changed then press the CHANGE DATA button repeatedly To return to the DEFAULT values press the center cursor button or the MULTI CONTROL knob Press the SAVE EXIT button or the cursor lt button This saves the change and closes the window About the unit s behavior when the MULTI CONTROL knob is pressed You can set item 132 KNOB MODE in the VTR SETUP menu to move window to select moving between windows as the action when the knob is pressed 6 To continue with changing the settings repeat steps 1 to 5 T Press the SAVE EXIT button This saves all the changes and returns to the SET UP menu screen To check the items with changed settings In VTR SETUP menu item 131 CHANGED MENU HIGHLIGHT set ITEM SETTING to on Items for which the setting values are different from the DEFAULT values appear in the VTR SETUP screen in yellow To change the DEFAULT values in a menu item 1 Use the cursor button to make the item window active then with the cursor t and l buttons or the MULTI CONTROL knob move the cursor to the item to be changed 2 Press the CHANGE DATA button or the cursor button This opens a window for changing the setting For a sub item further press the CHANGE DATA butto
84. been pre read can be externally processed and simultaneously re recorded A variety of audio editing modes You can select cut in editing cross fade editing and fade in out editing for the audio signals Display of duration between edit points The duration between any two of IN OUT AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT points can be displayed by simultaneously pressing two buttons corresponding to those edit points 1 1 Features Digital time counter The time counter display shows CTL and time codes LTC VITC or user bits data for precise setting of edit points 1 LTC Longitudinal Time Code Time code recorded on a longitudinal track VITC Vertical Interval Time Code Time code recorded on a video track during the vertical blanking interval 1 2 Optional Accessories The following accessories can be used with this unit HKSR 5001 Format Converter Board This allows format conversion described below e 2 3 pulldown 23 98PsF to 59 941 24PsF to 601 e Conversion between 1080 and 720P e 4 2 2 between 4 4 4 Conversion of 4 4 4 to 4 2 2 is possible only when the HKSR 5003 is additionally installed HKSR 5002 Digital Betacam Processor Board This allows you to play back Digital Betacam tapes and output SD and HD signals When the system is operated in 4 4 4 mode up conversion of the output to HD signals are possible as follows depending on the system setting 1080 Up conversion to 1080 720 Up conversion to 720P When
85. breaks in the continuity in the time codes 6 1 Basic Automatic Editing Chapter Steps in automatic editing The sequence of steps that are taken to do automatic editing with two VTRs is as follows Select the edit mode see page 126 4 Set edit points for the recorder and player VTR see page 126 Preview the edit section see page 130 Perform the edit see page 133 4 Confirm and modify the edit points see pages 129 and 131 Confirm the results of the edit see page 134 Editing precautions Using an editing control unit When using an editing control unit to control the VTR set the edit delay on the control unit so that CUT IN and CUT OUT commands are sent to the VTR five frames ahead of the actual edit point 6 1 2 Setting Switches and Menus Before editing set the following switches and menus as shown below REMOTE buttons None of these buttons light up Recorder VTR POWER switch ON o a aooaooooooooooo o 9090000000009 Recording level indication Oooo recording levels 00000000 F1 TIMER SEL button in the TC menu TC or CTL REMOTE buttons 1 9P button lights up Player VTR POWER switch ON oooooooooooo 290000000000 Playback level indication playback levels
86. buttons to the default settings Press the PAGE DEF button 4 Press the cursor 1 or l button to move the cursor to the function button where the item is to be registered The selected function button is highlighted and the current setting is displayed 4 1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings 41 sBunjes nue p Je deyo suas nu y p sajdeuD 42 PAGE F1 UTR SETUP MENU J001 PRE READ F PAE 002 REC INH Current setting READ 003 REC INH ARE off 005 SERUO REF L 006 EXT REF SEL POBE 007 SYNC PLAY 008 LOCAL ENA Function button 009 LOCAL NAP where item is to KEY 017 PB EE STATE DEF be registered BLANK PASTE CANCEL SAVE EXIT To unregister the selected item Press the BLANK button When a function button with other than the default assignment is selected the KEY DEF button is valid To return the selected function button to its default setting press the KEY DEF button Press the cursor button to move the cursor P to the menu list PF ASSIGN menu then press the cursor t or l button to move the cursor to the menu item to be registered To scroll the menu faster Press the cursor t or l button while holding down the SFT button PAGE F7 ALT HOME UTR SETUP MENU DMC Fl 001 632 JUMP_TC_ sel FQ gt LEZ H Item to be F3 KI7 Ue MISTER THU registered Fa 708 Y LEVEL HD Fa 710 PB LUL HD
87. cassette was inserted a fault in the S side reel or T side reel operation was detected 06 OVER TENSION During recording or playback excess tension was detected 07 CAPSTAN ERROR A capstan motor operation fault was detected 08 DRUM ERROR A drum motor operation fault was detected 09 THREAD TIME OVER A fault was detected in a threading or unthreading operation OA FULL TOP ERROR When threading a failure of the tape beginning processing to terminate was detected Error Messages Warning Messages Condition Messages xipueddy 143 xlpueddy 144 Item number Display Meaning 10 HUMID DETECT Condensation was detected 11 TOP END BOTH DETECT The tape beginning and tape end were detected at the same time 12 TAPE TOP ERROR A tape beginning sensor fault was detected 13 TAPE END ERROR A tape end sensor fault was detected 14 FAN MOTOR ERROR A cooling fan motor operation fault was detected 20 CC TIME OVER A fault was detected in a cassette compartment raising or lowering operation 21 SHIFT TIME OVER A fault was detected movement of the reel table to adjust for cassette size 22 POSITION BOTH DETECT The reel table was detected in the L cassette position and S cassette position at the same time 23 THREAD BOTH DETECT The threading end and unthreading end were detected at the same time 93 DR IF ERROR A communications error between the SV
88. confirmation of the formatting operation 4 4 CUE Menu sBunjes nue p se deyo 79 suas nu y p 13 dey9 80 To cancel the formatting operation Press the CLR button 3 Press the FORMAT T File button while holding down the SFT button COMPLETED appears in the control panel display Prohibiting Tele File menu operations Press the ALT WRITE PRTEC buttons on All Tele File menu operations are prohibited off All Tele File menu operations are permitted Changing a title e00000000000 200000000000 00000000 T Press the ALT F3 ATTRIB EDIT buttons 2 Press the f or button to select TITLE and then press the ENTRY button FORMAT REC DA T File TITLEI ATTRIB EDIT SELECT No Ta B Time UNDO TITLE ALL gt ADMIN ATTRIB EDIT Press ENTRY to edit Press CLR to CANCEL COPY toCUE WRITE PRTEC off 3 Press the cursor or button to select a character REC TITLE EDIT TITLE t 95 No Time BCDEFGHIJKLMNOPARSTUUUXYZ abcdefghjiklmnorarstuvwxyz 012345678911 lt gt 0 i PH H 8 _ HD1D2CAM WN o SPACE BACK SET CANCEL SAVE SPACE LETTER EXIT 4 4 CUE Menu 4 Press the SET LETTER button or the cursor ce
89. fails to synchronize with the player VTR off Editing is not executed and the VTR enters STOP mode on The VTR automatically repeats the editing not more than twice 320 PLAY COMMAND DELAY START TIME 30 frame O frame 30 frame This adjusts the time in frames required between the issue of a playback command and this unit actually beginning the execution of the command This adjustment is useful for synchronization between VTRs with widely differing start up timing xipueddy 321 VIDEO PREVIEW MODE VVV VBV During a preview operation this selects the video signals that can be monitored on the monitor output and line output connectors VVV VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO In the editing interval the monitored signal is the player video signal or video input EE signal VBV VIDEO BLACK VIDEO In the editing interval the monitored signal is a black signal 322 AUDIO PREVIEW MODE SSS SMS During a preview operation this selects the audio signals that can be monitored on the monitor output and line output connectors SSS SOUND SOUND SOUND In the editing interval the monitored signal is the player audio signal or audio input EE signal SMS SOUND MUTING SOUND In the editing interval the audio signal is muted 1 62 Menu List Items Relating to Prerolling Nos 401 to Item number 401 Item FUNCTION MODE AFTER CUE UP Setting
90. for the channels selected for group OFF Menu List xlpueddy 177 xlpueddy 178 Item number 818 Item PITCH CORRECTION DETECT MODE select Sub items PITCH CORRECTION DETECT MODE select Group A PITCH CORRECTION DETECT MODE select Group B PITCH CORRECTION DETECT MODE select Group C PITCH CORRECTION DETECT MODE select Group D PITCH CORRECTION DETECT MODE select Group E PITCH CORRECTION DETECT MODE select Group F Setting Mode1 Mode2 Mode3 OFF Function When pitch correction is performed during program play and play at a different frequency 23 98 frame gt 24 frame 23 98 24 frame gt 25 frame 29 97 frame 4 gt 30 frame selects the pitch correction method for each group Mode1 Perform pitch correction using zero cross jump Mode2 Perform pitch correction using zero cross jump after low level detection Mode3 Perform pitch correction using cross fade OFF Do not perform pitch correction 830 AUDIO INPUT SELECT Sub items A IN ALL A IN CH1 A IN CH2 A IN CH3 A IN CH4 A IN CH5 A IN CH6 A IN CH7 A IN CH8 A IN CH9 A IN CH10 A IN CH11 A IN CH12 AES EBU SDI Selects the input signals for audio channels 1 to 12 This is only valid when item 831 is set to off AES EBU Selects signal input to DIGITAL
91. from a device connected to the REMOTE 2 PARALLEL I O 50P connector When the VTR is being controlled by the external equipment connected to the REMOTE 1 IN 9P or REMOTE 2 PARALLEL I O 50P connector all tape transport buttons and edit operation buttons are disabled except the STOP and EJECT buttons You may also specify the disabling or enabling of all buttons by setting the VTR SETUP menu item 008 LOCAL FUNCTION ENABLE CHANNEL CONDITION indicators These show the status of the playback signal Blue The playback signal status is satisfactory Yellow The playback signal is somewhat degraded but playback is possible However if this indicator remains lit continuously head cleaning is required Red The playback signal has deteriorated If this indicator remains lit continuously head cleaning or internal inspection is required PHONES level control Adjusts the output level to the PHONES jack For details see 5 1 2 Selecting Audio Signals on page 112 PHONES jack Connect stereo headphones with 8 Q impedance for audio monitoring during recording playback and editing Adjust the headphone output level with the PHONES level control 2 1 2 Lower Control Panel 1 Menu control section 6 DISPLAY button FULL FINE button Ci Ceo PRESET PB LEVEL button REC LEVEL button MONITOR R buttons tT OF OF of pal Hi CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7
92. int V TC UB enables TUG UBG values to be recorded The time code generator and the user bits generator lock to the time data recorded in the video signal AUX data area on the tape ext L TC UB enables TUG UBG values to be recorded The time code generator and the user bits generator lock to the time data input from the TIME CODE IN connector SDI V TC UB enables TUG UBG values to be recorded TUG UBG values are controlled by VITC time data in the video signal input to the HD SDI INPUT A B connector SDI L TC UB enables TUG UBG values to be recorded TUG UBG values are controlled by LTC time data in the video signal input to the HD SDI INPUT A B connector auto regene int L is set in assemble or insert mode and prst is set in other modes 1 The DF NDF setting on the F9 button is applied to the time code only when prst is specified by the F7 button the DF NDF setting is always applied for the CTL timer 2 Specify the signal to be regenerated with the VTR SETUP menu item 608 TCG UBG REGENE MODE Signals not specified by this menu item are automatically set to Preset mode regardless of the F7 button setting Setting time codes To set time codes select prst with the TCG MODE button in the TC menu and then follow the steps below e Set the RUN MODE button to rec before setting the time data for recording When you se
93. is in stop mode Shuttle mode The playback speed corresponds to the angle of rotation of the search dial The playback speed range depends on the frame frequency of the unit See item SHUTTLE button The dial clicks at the positions for O still picture and 10 times normal playback speed HDCAM Digital Betacam or 8 times normal playback speed HDCAM SR Jog mode The playback speed corresponds to the rotational speed of the dial 1 to 1 times normal speed 2 times normal speed HDCAM HDCAM SR or 3 times normal speed Digital Betacam depending on the setting of the VTR SETUP menu item 107 JOG DIAL RESPONSE The dial does not click Variable speed playback mode Noiseless playback is possible in the range from 1 to 2 times normal speed HDCAM HDCAM SR or 1 to 3 times normal speed Digital Betacam The speed settings can be changed using the menu The dial clicks at the positions for still picture and normal playback speed Capstan override mode Rotating the dial while holding down the PLAY button changes the playback speed by up to 15 2 1 3 System Set Up Panel Lift the lower control panel up to its horizontal position to access the system set up panel For details of opening and closing the control panel refer to the Maintenance Manual e SRW 5000 serial numbers 12523 or lower and 90000 to 99999 e SRW 5500 serial numbers 14577 or lower and 30000 to 39999 CONTROL PANEL co
94. is not point data and entered or updated updated updated IN point data are in the correct time sequence The already entered OUT Data is Data is point data and entered or updated deleted updated IN point are not in the correct time sequence OUT point data has not been Data is Data is not entered updated updated OUT point entry update State of the already entered IN point OUT point data The already entered IN point Data is not Data is data and entered or updated updated updated OUT point data are in the correct time sequence The already entered IN point Data is not Data is not data and entered or updated updated updated OUT point are not in the correct time sequence State of the already entered IN point OUT point data IN point data has not been Data is not Datais entered updated updated Updating File Name data To update File Name data press the cursor button several times To update data 1 With the cursor buttons align the cursor with the File Name data you want to update To move the cursor with the numeric buttons Enter a line number with the numeric buttons and press the CUENUM POINT button The cursor moves to the line number you entered 2 Press the CHANGE DATA button 3 With the cursor or gt button select the character to be entered 4 Press the SET LETTER button or cursor center button The selected character is entered 5 Re
95. is performing a frame operation or is frozen in field mode when dynamic tracking is performing a field operation or when it is not operating 903 xlpueddy FREEZE CONTROL FROM KEY PANEL momentary latch Determines the freeze operation control by button operations momentary The picture is frozen only while the button is held down latch The picture is frozen when the button is pressed and remains frozen when the button is released The frozen picture is cancelled when the button is pressed again Button operations Freezing in odd or even first or second field is specified by item 902 Distinction between the first or second field follows the distinction in the reference signal 905 STOP FREEZE CONTROL disable enable Enable or disables the stop freeze function 910 ACTIVE LINE 1035 CONVERT MODE 1080 gt 1035 CONV 1080 gt 1035 CROP Selects the conversion mode of the effective scanning line number 1080 gt 1035 CONV Convert the effective scanning line number from 1080 to 1035 preserving the aspect ratio of the image 1080 gt 1035 CROP Convert the effective scanning line number from 1080 to 1035 The four sides of the image are cropped then it is horizontally expanded 911 ACTIVE LINE 1080 CONVERT MODE 1080 gt 1035 CONV 1035 gt 1080 PANEL Selects the conversion mode of the effective scanning line number
96. lt 4 4 Press one of the IN OUT AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT button 1 Press one of the IN OUT AUDIO IN or AUDIO The modified time data for the edit point appears in the OUT button while holding down the RCL button time data display Time data for the edit point appears in the data entry window 2 Press the or button then use the numeric buttons to enter the value to be added or subtracted Data entry window PB EE PLAY LOCK PB O RECINH BLG a off H M 5 F kol AIN 00 01 10 00 AOUT 00 02 10 00 fo ASSEM IN 00 01 10 00 OUT 00 02 10 00 BLE D off g w 01 0458 00 TC H M S F J off STILL HDCAM SR INS INS I VIDEO AUDIO REMAIN 01HO6M off v ALTHTC lt 4 To cancel the entered value Press the CLR button 3 Press the SET button The result of the addition or subtraction is entered 132 6 1 Basic Automatic Editing 6 1 10 Performing Automatic Editing Overview Once you have set the necessary edit points the AUTO button lights up to show that the VTR is ready for automatic editing During automatic editing the tape in the recorder VTR and the player VTR move as shown in the diagram below Player VTR Playback mode Assemble editing Insert editing Playback mode recording Preroll point IN point OUT point Pos
97. manuals for this unit English Japanese French and German versions 1 3 1 Preparations The following program must be installed on your computer in order to read the operations manuals contained on the CD ROM e Adobe Reader Version 6 0 or higher If Adobe Reader is not installed you can download it from the following URL http www adobe com Adobe and Adobe Reader are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries 1 3 2 Reading the CD ROM Manual To read the operation manuals contained on the CD ROM do the following Insert the CD ROM in your CD ROM drive A cover page appears automatically in your browser If it does not appear automatically in the browser double click on the index htm file on the CD ROM 2 Select and click on the operations manuals that you want to read This opens the PDF file of the operation manuals The files may not be displayed properly depending on the version of Acrobat Reader In such a case install the latest version you can download from the URL mentioned in 3 1 Preparations above If you have lost or damaged the CD ROM you can purchase a new one to replace it Contact your Sony service representative 1 3 Using the CD ROM Manual Locations and Functions of Parts Chapter 2 1 Control Panel The control panel consists of the following sections e Lower control panel e Upper control panel e System set up p
98. not all characters can be shown within the title frame On the left or right of the title frame or p appears Press the SAVE EXIT button This return to the initial menu screen To change time data To write the current time data use the cursor buttons to align the entry cursor with the line in which you want to write To move the cursor with the numeric buttons Enter a line number with the numeric buttons and press the CUENUM POINT button The cursor moves to the line number you entered If the cursor buttons are not linked to movement of the entry cursor it is not possible to move the entry cursor gt with the cursor buttons To link the cursor buttons to movement of the entry cursor Press the cursor center button To unlink press the cursor center button once again Press the ENTRY button to write the current time data over the time data in the line in which the entry cursor gt is present If you press the ENTRY button when the entry cursor is not on the screen the time data of the line in which the entry cursor is currently present is written and displayed on the screen To enter the current time data as a new line 1 With the cursor buttons move the entry cursor to the line below the position in which you want to insert For how to move the cursor see To change time ata above data ab 2 Hold down the SFT button and press the ENTRY button The line is inserted immediately before
99. o000 OG 00000000 1 2 Press the ALT PAGE MODE buttons or the ALT F9 EXTEND MODE buttons If you selected PAGE mode press the PREV PAGE button or NEXT PAGE button to select a desired page or use the numeric buttons to enter the page number in the data entry window then press the PAGE SET button Press the cursor t or l button to move the cursor to the cue number 4 4 CUE Menu sBunjes nue p Je deyo 77 suas nu y p saideuD 78 To select the cue number directly by the numeric buttons Enter the cue number in the data entry window with the numeric buttons then press the CUENUM SET button 4 Press the PREROLL button 4 4 6 Changing a Cue Point Into an Edit Point Follow the procedures below to change a selected cue point into an edit point To change an edit point into an IN point Press the SET button while holding down the IN button To change an edit point into an OUT point Press the SET button while holding down the OUT button To change an edit point into an AUDIO IN point Press the SET button while holding down the AUDIO IN button To change an edit point into an AUDIO OUT point Press the SET button while holding down the AUDIO OUT button AUDIO IN button AUDIO OUT button aaooooaooaooooooa oooooooo0oo0oo0oo0o IN button SET button OUT button
100. or l button to move the cursor P to the cue number to be registered PREV Blank PAGE 00 ee STILL HDCAM SR wooavouson f fy 8 00 00 00 00 9 00 00 00 00 PAGE CUENUM M CUE SET CLEAR REMAIN 01HO6M A CUE To select the cue number directly by numeric buttons Enter the cue number in the data entry window with the numeric buttons then press the CUENUM SET button 4 Press the JOG or VAR button then rotate the search dial to find the position where you want to register the cue point 5 Press the ENTRY button at the selected position The current tape address of the position where the button is pressed is registered as a cue point Press the ENTRY button repeatedly to register the cue point repeatedly The cue number will automatically increment by one each time PREV Blank 1 EQS 1 PAGE pace J 0 00 01 10 00 1 1 00 02 10 00 NEXT 2 2 00 03 10 00 PAGE 3 3 00 04 10 00 4 4 00 05 10 00 5 5 00 06 10 00 77 77 6 6 00 07 10 00 7 00 08 10 00 ie 8 8 00 09 10 00 OQO v 3 9 00 10 10 00 crit HDCAM SR CUE PAGE CUENUM M CUE l P ROLL SET SET CLEAR REMAIN 01HO6M A CUE lt In PAGE mode the cue number advances only within the current page when the ENTRY button is pressed repeatedly For example after cue number 19 is registered and the ENTRY button is pressed the
101. rack mounting refer to the Installation Manual 1 1 2 Features of the Control Panel The control panel provides eight menu screens corresponding to different operation modes to allow fast and easy adjustment of necessary settings as well as the ability to store menu settings to a Memory Stick for later recall Menu driven operations for a variety of purposes Eight menus are displayed on the 130 x 95 mm 5 Ne inches x 3 374 inches color display and are set using the 10 function buttons You can register desired items to the menus other than the SET UP menu Pressing the PF ASSIGN button in the SET UP menu displays the menu items that can be registered HOME menu Use this menu to make the basic settings for recording playback and editing operations and to select channels to be edited during insert editing TC menu Use this menu to make time code settings VIDEO menu Use this menu to adjust the video signals The VIDEO menu screen shows the VTR operation mode current position time code time code type and so on AUDIO menu Use this menu to adjust the audio signals The AUDIO menu screen shows the VTR operation mode current position time code time code type and so on CUE menu Use this menu to set up to 100 cue points In page mode 10 cue points per page can be set on a total of 10 pages In the Tele File menu you can change the setting for the memory label system Tele File MBIAJOAC 19 dey9
102. recording and playback time using BCT 124SRL 155 minutes with the frame frequency of 24 Hz 149 minutes with the frame frequency of 25 Hz 124 minutes with the frame frequency of 29 97 Hz HDCAM playback time SRW 5000 using BCT 124HDL HDCAM recording and playback time SRW 5500 using BCT 124HDL 155 minutes with the frame frequency of 24 Hz 149 minutes with the frame frequency of 25 Hz 124 minutes with the frame frequency of 29 97 Hz Digital Betacam playback time using BCT D124L 124 minutes Fast forward rewind time Approx 4 minutes using BCT 124SRL Specifications Search speed Shuttle mode HDCAM GSR playback Still to approx 50 times normal playback speed with the frame frequency of 24 Hz Still to approx 48 times normal playback speed with the frame frequency of 25 Hz Still to approx 40 times normal playback speed with the frame frequency of 30 Hz HDCAM playback Still to approx 50 time normal playback speed with the frame frequency of 29 97 Hz Still to approx 58 time normal playback speed with the frame frequency of 25 Hz Digital Betacam playback Still to approx 50 times normal playback speed Variable mode HDCAM SGSR playback 1 to 2 times normal playback speed HDCAM playback 1 to 2 time normal playback speed Digital Betacam playback Still to approx 1 to 3 time normal playback speed HDCAM GSR playback Still to 2 times normal playback speed HD
103. screen Deleting stop codes To delete a stop code press the CODE ERASE button In stop code detection mode stop the VTR at the stop code you want to delete and press the REC EDIT button After prerolling 5 seconds before the stop code recording point the VTR begins the delete operation and as shown in the figure below user bits value 0 are recorded after which the unit automatically stops After deletion is completed the setting of the CODE ERASE button is automatically changed to OFF 4 2 HOME Menu sBunjes nue p Je deyo 57 suas nuayy p sajdeuD 58 Section to insert time code Tape i 3frames 20 frames STOP 3 frames CODE before deletion o o Q Q Q Q Q OQ o 1 Press the HOME button The HOME menu screen appears 2 Press the ALT STOP CODE buttons The stop code menu screen appears 3 Press the F8 CODE ERASE button to select on Pressing the button toggles between on and off 4 Press the REC EDIT button To abandon the operation at any point Press the STOP button To check the deletion Press the PREVIEW REVIEW button The VTR prerolls 5 seconds before the recording point and starts playback If the unit stops at the point at which the stop code was recorded repeat the deletion operation Checking the deletion with the PREVIEW REVIEW button is only valid in the stop code menu screen 4 2 HOME Menu
104. select the VTR on which to perform the edit point deletion The button lights up 2 Press one of the IN OUT AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT button while holding down the CLR button to delete the corresponding edit point The edit point is deleted and appears in the time data display Moving an edit point position by one frame at a time aoooooaooaoooooaoa ooo0o0o00000000 O O O am O mm O jan 1 Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to select the VTR on which to modify the edit point The button lights up 2 Press the or button while holding down one of the IN OUT AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT button Pressing the or button moves the edit point by one frame forward or backward respectively 3 After making the modification release the respective edit point button that you have been holding down at step 2 6 1 Basic Automatic Editing unipg 9 seideyo 131 Moving an edit point position with the numeric buttons SET is displayed PB EE PLAY LOCK 1 PB 01 04 58 00 AIN 00 01 10 00 AOUT 00 02 10 00 oO o oaoooooaoooooop o _9999009090909000 ASSEM IN 00 01 10 00 OUT 00 02 10 00 SET O1 00 30 00 BLE off w 01 04 58 00 OQO TC H M S F S off STILL HDCAM SR INS INS l VIDEO AUDIO REMAIN 01H06M off v A ALT TC
105. serial numbers 30000 to 39999 3 4 Using a Memory Stick 39 HLA eur dn umes Jeideuo suyas nu y p saideuD 40 Menu Settings 4 1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings The operating conditions of the VTR are set using the menu operation section on the lower control panel Menu items are divided among eight different menus HOME TC VIDEO AUDIO CUE PF1 PF2 SET UP You can register any frequently used items to the HOME TC VIDEO AUDIO PF1 and PF2 menu screens By registering the necessary items in advance setting operations are made quicker The contents of the eight VTR memory banks can in turn be stored on a Memory Stick for later recall 4 1 1 Menu Configuration This VTR has two kinds of menus VTR SETUP menu list This menu contains items that specify the initial operating conditions of the VTR You can change these settings directly without registering the items to the function buttons Press the VTR SETUP button in the SET UP menu to display this menu For details on setting operating conditions of the VTR see 4 7 1 VITR SETUP Menu on page 107 PF ASSIGN menu list This is a list of menu items which can be registered to the HOME TC VIDEO AUDIO PF1 and PF2 menu screens as well as the screen that is displayed by pressing the ALT button the ALT screen This includes all VTR SETUP menu item Press the PF ASSIGN button in the SET UP menu to display this men
106. tape transport control block search control block and REMOTE button are disabled 111 VARIABLE SPEED off C1 to 2 Sets the tape speed range during variable speed VAR LIMIT IN KEY on 0 to 1 playback on the control panel of this unit PANEL CONTROL off 1 to 2 The range of the tape speed is 1 to 2 times normal speed on 0 to 1 The range of the tape speed is 0 to 1 time normal speed 112 CTL LOCK IN VAR off CTL locks the tape transport during variable speed SHTL 1 0 5 0 5 1 0 2 0 playback or shuttle playback off CTL does not lock 1 0 5 0 5 1 0 2 0 CTL locks the tape transport at speeds of 1 0 5 0 5 1 0 and 2 0 times normal speed 113 DT MODE field 1 to 1 Sets the DT operation mode iS frame field 1 to 1 Enters the field playback mode Field DT E mode when the tape speed is 1 to 1 times normal speed Enters the frame playback mode Frame DT mode when the tape speed is 1 to 2 times normal speed frame Enters the frame playback mode Frame DT mode During Digital Betacam playback frame playback is enabled only for forward playback 114 POWER ON MENU HOME menu Selects the menu displayed when the unit is powered on select TC menu VIDEO menu AUDIO menu CUE menu PF1 menu PF2 menu ALT PF1 menu ALT PF2 menu 115 KEY BEEP high Selects the volume of the key click sound mid low off 1 56 Menu List
107. the cursor button to move the cursor P to SETUP BANK then press the cursor or button to move the flashing cursor bar to the number of the VTR memory bank to be used for saving the current menu settings The flashing cursor bar indicates the storage destination Press the COPY button A message appears in the display asking you to confirm the operation To cancel the storage operation Press the CLR button Press the COPY button while holding down the SFT button The current menu settings are stored to the VTR memory bank To add or change a title for VTR settings after storing them to the VTR memory bank Move the cursor P to the number of the VTR memory bank where the settings are stored then press the EDIT TITLE button For more information see 4 1 6 Adding Titles to the Data on page 49 Recovering previous settings after new settings have been saved Press the UNDO button to recover the previous settings Preventing accidental erasure after saving settings Move the cursor to the memory bank to be protected and press ALT PROTECT buttons A will appear next to the selected bank 8 Press the EXIT button The SET UP menu appears again Recalling menu settings from a VTR memory bank 37 1 4 1 Press the SET UP button The SET UP menu appears in the display 2 Press the Ft VTR BANK button The VTR BANK menu appears in the di
108. the cursor 4 or gt button Exiting the Tele File menu Press the WRITE EXIT button The entered or modified data is saved to the memory label and the VTR exits the Tele File menu While the data is being changed if the write protect setting has been made for the whole Tele File menu then data changed before the setting was made is rewritten To exit the Tele File menu without saving data to a memory label Press the EJECT button or press the ALT UNDO ALL buttons After a window that confirms cancelation is displayed hold down the SFT button and press the UNDO ALL button The memory label contents when the cassette was inserted are restored If you accidentally press the EJECT button before saving data to a memory label Insert the cassette again within 30 seconds after the ejection and press the F10 WRITE EXIT button The data that existed before the ejection of the cassette is saved to the memory label Three levels of information can be displayed in the Tele File menu and the levels can be scrolled to the left or right by pressing the lt or gt button CUE SCAN REC DATE 2003 02 25 1 EOS 01 01 24 151 ITLE DisPlay Sample l Rest 87 Nd JIN four Tape Format a 36 06 59i 1080 01 05 31 24 59i 1080 08 11 03 01 09 48 20 60i 720 00 00 01 01 00 36 06 23P 1080 00 36 06 231 1080 POINT CUE COMMNT EDIT 01 00 CHANGE Line pata number
109. the video signal a video signal input to input to the REF witht A DEDI the REF INPUT 1 INPUT 1 or2 eo e or 2 connector connector UT connector No external synchronization synchronization is internal 3 2 Reference Signals 3 2 2 Reference Signal Connections Make the reference signal connections as follows according to your recording or playback requirements Reference signal connections For recording signals from a switcher or signal generator Reference signal Switcher or signal generator REF INPUT 1 HD SDI INPUT Joodik 003 0066 co ooog OOO 66 c gt ee co 00 oe o gt D OD oOo F SRW 5000 55002 75Q termination switch ON a The figure shows the SRW 5500 For recording signals from a HD VTR Reference signal 75Q termination switch OFF REF INPUT 1 SRW 5000 5500 Recorder 000 eoe 6006 LOO EOOO RHE lt lt goo eo a Oo D D J REF INPUT 1 HD SDI INPUT A HD SDI INPUT HD SDI OUTPUT o
110. three times DETECT ADJUST VAR SHUTTLE Yes When read No operation 0 to less than 8 twice times normal speed REC EDIT JOG No No No operation CUE UP operation PREROLL SHUTTLE 8 times normal speed or more In VAR mode stop codes cannot be detected at 0 03 times normal speed Adjusting the stop position when a stop code is detected When a stop code is detected you can adjust the position at which the tape transport stops in the direction from the normal stop position toward the SOM point within the range of 0 to 150 frames in frame units 1 aoooooaooaooooaoa 900000000000 a 0000000 35 2 4 1 Press the HOME button The HOME menu screen appears 2 Press the ALT STOP CODE button The STOP CODE menu screen appears 3 Press the DETECT ADJUST button The setting display lights up 4 Change the setting with the cursor t or l button You may also use the MULTI CONTROL knob 5 Press the DETECT ADJUST button The data entry window disappears Recording stop codes To record stop codes press the CODE REC button In PLAY JOG or similar mode cue up to the SOM point and press the REC EDIT button With the point at which the REC EDIT button is pressed as the SOM point after a preroll the recording operation starts and as shown in the figure below user bits value 0 and stop code are recorded after
111. which the unit automatically stops After recording is completed the setting of the CODE REC button is automatically changed to OFF Section to insert time code e a UB 0 STOP CODE UB 0 20 frames Tape 3 frames eo00ho00000000 200200000000 Q o Q QO Q Q m o 2 4 1 Press the HOME button The HOME menu screen appears 2 Press the ALT STOP CODE buttons The STOP CODE menu screen appears 3 Press the CODE REC button to select on Pressing the button toggles between on and off 4 Press the REC EDIT button To abandon the operation at any point Press the STOP button To specify the recording start position Press the REC ADJUST button to specify how many seconds before the SOM point the recording of the stop code should start To check the recording Press the PREVIEW REVIEW button The tape prerolls to the SOM point and playback starts If the stop code is correctly recorded regardless of the settings of the DETECT BEEP button and DETECT STOP button a confirmation sound is emitted for 1 second and the unit stops in accordance with the setting of the DETECT ADJUST button If the unit does not stop even after passing the point at which the stop code is recorded repeat the recording operation Checking the recording with the PREVIEW REVIEW button is only valid in the stop code menu
112. 00000000 O p aa o oo oo o S oo o oo a oo o Ooo o Om g an m F7 F8 buttons ALT button To move in the horizontal direction press the ALT F7 CHARA H POS buttons and to move in the vertical direction press the ALT CHARA V POS buttons Each cursor button press increments the setting by 1 From the maximum value the next value is the minimum value Switching to a menu screen other than the TC menu screen also ends the setting 4 3 TC Menu 4 4 CUE Menu Cue points can be registered in a total of 10 pages numbered 0 to 9 to a total of 100 cue points numbered 0 to 99 Each page can hold a maximum of 10 cue points Cue point settings deletions and page settings are done through the CUE menu For details on storing cue point data see 4 1 5 Memory Stick Operations on page 44 To activate the CUE menu Cue point data is factory set to be erased when a cassette is inserted To select whether to erase cue point data when a cassette is inserted Press the F10 M CUE CLEAR button to select whether to erase cue point data when a cassette is inserted on Erase cue point data off Do not erase cue point data Press the CUE button Title indication EDS
113. 0044000F signal 141 3 5A70H 710 Pg LEVEL HD 0 0 0H Adjusts the level of the HD video signal output from the HD preset 100 SDI OUTPUT connectors Adjusts the Pp level of the video 4000H 100 4000H signal 141 3 5A70H 711 Pr LEVEL HD 0 0 OH Adjusts the level of the HD video signal output from the HD preset 100 SDI OUTPUT connectors Adjusts the Pp level of the video 4000H 700 4000 signal 141 3 5A70H gt 712 SETUP LEVEL HD 10 0 Adjusts the level of the HD video signal output from the HD 3 preset 0 SDI OUTPUT connectors Adjusts the setup level of the 2 0 0 video signal x 10 0 713 SYNC PHASE HD 128 Controls the H sync phase of the HD video signal output preset 0 from the HD SDI OUTPUT connectors according to the 0 menu 127 714 FINE HD 0 Controls the H sync phase of the HD video signal output preset 0 from the HD SDI OUTPUT connectors according to the 1024 menu 720 HD OUT BLANK through Turns on and off vertical interval blanking processing of the blank HD video signals output from the HD SDI OUTPUT connectors and the FORMAT CONV OUT OPTION connectors through Do not perform blanking processing on Perform blanking processing 740 VIDEO GAIN ALL 0 0 OH Adjusts the video gain of HD UC SD and DC output The HD UC SD DC video level increases with larger setting values of this item preset 100 4000H 190 40001 141 3 5A70H 1 70 Menu List
114. 2 Item number Item DIGITAL OUT CH12 Setting TR1 TR12 Function 835 ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT EXCHANGE Sub items ANALOG OUT CH1 TR1 TR12 ANALOG OUT CH2 TR1 TR2 TR12 ANALOG OUT CH3 TRI TR3 TR12 ANALOG OUT CH4 TRI TR4 TR12 Sets the signal track to be superimposed on the analog audio signal output channels 1 to 4 Menu List Item number Item Setting Function 836 SD AUDIO Makes independent track selections for the audio channels OUTPUT 1 to 8 to be multiplexed into SD SDI EXCHANGE Sub items SDOUT EXCG disable disable Follow the settings of DIGOUT EXCHNG menu enable CH1 to CH8 enable Enable the settings of this menu SD OUT CH1 TRI Specifies the signal tracks to assign to audio channels 1 to 8 for multiplexing with SD SDI output TR12 SD OUT CH2 TR1 TR2 TR12 SD OUT CH3 TR1 TR3 TR12 SD OUT CH4 TR1 TR4 TR12 SD OUT CH5 TR1 TR5 TR12 SD OUT CH6 TR1 TR6 TR12 SD OUT CH7 TR1 TR7 TR12 SD OUT CH8 TR1 TR8 TR12 840 AES EBU INPUT AUTO When recording in the HDCAM SR format specifies MODE 48K VLOCK whether to pass signals input to the DIGITAL I O AES EBU INPUT connector through the rate converter AUTO Input signals pass through the rate converter In this case there are no limitations on input signals
115. 2 2 Preset Preset 3 3 Preset Preset 4 4 Preset SHOW Preset 5 5 Preset Savur Preset 6 6 Preset Preset 7 7 Preset SHOW Preset 8 8 Preset CUESET EF Preset EDIT SELECT DIREC COPY EXIT TITLE ALL TION FORMAT CARD BANK 0 CURRENT SETUP CARD Preset 1 1 Preset UNDO Preset 2 2 Preset Preset 3 3 Preset Preset 4 4 Preset SHOW Preset 5 5 Preset SETUP Preset 6 6 Preset Preset 7 7 Preset SHOW Preset 8 8 Preset CUESET fF Preset EDIT SELECT DIREC COPY EXIT TITLE ALL TION 4 Press the Ft FORMAT CARD button A message asking you to confirm the operation appears in the display To cancel formatting Press the CLR button while the confirmation message appears in the display 5 Press the FORMAT CARD button while holding down the SFT button The VTR starts formatting the Memory Stick Storing the contents of the VTR memory banks to a Memory Stick 3 Press the DIRECTION button to select the lt direction The left cursor bar flashes Move the cursor to the VTR side using the cursor gt button and use the cursor t or l button to move the cursor bar to the memory bank where the data is to be saved CARD BANK 0 RREN FOOTBALL CARD BASEBALL 0 Saved data Preset 1 Prese Preset 2 2 Preset Preset 3 3 Preset Preset 4 4 Pres
116. 2 monitor OUT connectors BNC These output three sets of video audio signals When the ALT CHARA SUPER buttons are set to ON in the TC menu time data or other text data is superimposed on the output from the MONITOR OUTPUT L R connector DIGITAL I O AES EBU OUTPUT connectors BNC These output digital signals in AES EBU format for channels 1 to 12 DIGITAL I O AES EBU INPUT connectors BNC These accept digital signals in AES EBU format for channels 1 to 12 29 2 2 Connector Panel seg Jo suonouny pue suolyes07 z seideyD 30 Remote input output section RS232C connector REMOTE1 IN 9P connector REMOTE 2 PARALLEL 1 O 50P connector VIDEO CONTROL connector REMOTE1 I O 9P connector REMOTE 2 PARALLEL I 0 50P 00000000000000000 TOCTTCGD 00000000 00000000000000000 REMOTE 1 IN 9P REMOTE 1 1 0 9P ETHERNET USB USB connector ETHERNET connector RS232C connector RS 232C serial interface D sub 9 pin This is used for manufacturing and services REMOTE 1 IN 9P connector D sub 9 pin female Use this with the supplied 9 pin remote control cable to connect the unit to another SRW 5000 5500 unit or another HD VTR unit to carry out editing with a BVE series editor BVE 900 9 10 2000 9000 9 100 REMOTE 2 PARALLEL I O 50P connector D sub 50 pin female Inputs an external remote control signal For details refer to the Mai
117. 29 97 Hz or 30 Hz e When the TCG MODE button is set to regene the drop frame mode is inoperative since the time code generator is synchronized to the playback time code 4 3 6 Selecting the Content of the Second Time Code Display Area TC2 SEL Select the content of the second time code display area using the TC2 SEL button Setting Time data displayed OFF No display LTC LTC value read from the time code reader Auto When the playback speed is within the range 1 2 normal speed then VITC and if outside this range then the LTC is displayed VITC VITC value read from the time code reader CTL CTL signal count value UBR User bits read by the time code reader LTC UBV User bit value read from the time code reader VITC TCG Value generated by the time code generator UBG User bits value generated by the time code generator When the two unit editing display a warning or similar is shown the second time code display area does not appear 4 3 TC Menu For details about the warnings see Warning Messages on page 144 4 3 7 Selecting CTL Display Mode TAPE TIMER Press the ALT TAPE TIMER buttons to select a 12 hour or 24 hour clock for the CTL display 12H 12 hour clock 24H 24 hour clock 4 3 8 Presetting Pulldown Time Code PDPSET MENU when HKSR 50071 is installed To preset the pulldown time code when this VTR is operated i
118. 3 x SDI CH CHB CHS CHTO CAT 1 CATA A IN SDI SDI SDI SDI SDI SDI CH4 SDI A IN A IN A IN A IN A IN EXIT CHS CH6 CH7 CH8 ALL SDI SDI SDI spr 2 Select the audio input signal for each channel SDI audio signal input from the HD SDI INPUT A B connector AES EBU audio signal input from the DIGITAL I O AES EBU INPUT connector 3 Press the EXIT button This returns to the AUDIO menu screen To make settings for individual channels with the F buttons By pressing any of the A IN CH1 to A IN CH8 buttons in the AUDIO INPUT menu and the A IN CH9 to A IN CH12 buttons in the ALT AUDIO screen obtained by pressing the ALT button you can select the type of input signal for each channel 4 6 AUDIO Menu To make input signal selections for individual channels with the numeric buttons 1 Press the cursor or gt button to align the cursor with the channel for which you want to make the selection 2 Press the cursor T or l button to select the signal To return to the default settings Press the cursor center button The cursor item returns to the default To select the same input signal simultaneously on all twelve channels Press the A IN ALL button to change the input signal simultaneously on all twelve channels You can also make this setting using the VTR SETUP menu item 830 AUDIO INPUT SELECT 4 6 2 Digital Audio Output Signal Source
119. 4 4 7 Tele File Menu The Tele File menu screen is different in HDCAM SR and HDCAM formats In HDCAM SR format The cassette has a memory label attached as standard and this screen allows operations to read out enter or change the cassette ID identification recording format recording information management information and so on In the HDCAM SR format each recording automatically adds recording information However if the recording time is less than 2 seconds or if when recording ends the measurement on the spool was not complete then no recording information is added In 4 4 CUE Menu the case of an HDCAM SR cassette a cassette without a memory label is ejected In HDCAM format When an MLB 1M 100 memory label optional is attached to the cassette this screen allows operations to read out enter or change the cue point information log IN OUT point information management information and so on Using this information cassette tape management and tape editing efficiency can be improved HDCAM SR format Tele File menu To open the Tele File menu There are two methods of accessing the Tele File menu screen as follows e Press the Tele File button while in the CUE menu e Select on for the VTR SETUP menu item 124 Tele File MENU auto popup Then with the HOME TC VIDEO AUDIO CUE or SETUP menu open insert a cassette into the VTR To change the information displayed in the Tele File menu Press
120. 630 is set to on this setting specifies whether display on the 24 frame time code is displayed or not on the control panel of the VTR before conversion off The 24 frame time code is not displayed before conversion on The 24 frame time code is displayed before conversion The type of time code displayed is specified by item 603 632 JUMPING TC 3H Sets the loopback point JUMPING TC for converting time select _oH code with respect to the reference time code STARTING 41H TC for conversion 1H B JUMPING TC is set 3 hours before STARTING oe a a JUMPING TC is set 2 hours before STARTING OH 1H The JUMPING TC is set 1 hour before STARTING TC 1H The JUMPING TC is set 1 hour after STARTING TC 2H The JUMPING TC is set 2 hours after STARTING TC 3H The JUMPING TC is set 3 hours after STARTING TC OH The JUMPING TC is set 1 frame before STARTING TC 633 CHARA ORG TC off Selects whether to display the time code of the playback DISPLAY at dual on tape original time code in addition to the converted time line mode code when time code has been converted and menu item 626 is set to anything other than time data only off The original time code is not displayed on The original time code is displayed The original time code appears in the second line when you set this item set to on 634 LAST ERROR LOG off Sets whether or not the number of error messages appears NUMBER DISPLAY on in a superimposed character display
121. 9 OTHERS CHECk F9 SYSTEM button in MAINTENANCE menu e This setting is only active when the frame frequency of the unit is 29 97 Hz or 30 Hz e When the F7 TCG MODE key is set to regene in TC menu the time code generator is synchronized to the playback time code and therefore this setting is disabled 602 TIMER MODE CTL Selects the mode for displaying time data select TC CTL During playback the CTL signal recorded on the tape UBIT or during recording the CTL signal being recorded on the tape is counted and the tape running time is displayed in hours minutes seconds and frames TC The time code value read by the time code reader or the time code value generated by the time code generator is displayed Use item 603 to toggle between VITC and LTC UBIT The user bits inserted in the playback time code or the user bits inserted in the time code being recorded are displayed Use item 603 to toggle between VITC and LTC 603 TCR MODE select LTC Selects the time code read by the time code reader during auto playback VITC LTC LTC is read auto If the playback speed is in the range 1 2 normal speed VITC is read and if outside this range LTC is read VITC VITC is read 604 TC2 MODE SEL UBG Selects the time data appearing in the second line TCG UBG Displays UBG UBV TCG Displays TCG UBR UBV Displays UBV CTL UBR Displays UBR VITC CTL Displays CTL auto VITC Displays VITC LTC auto Displays VITC wh
122. A03 is set to on specifies whether or not the ID 24F 30F is displayed to the right of superimposed time code off No ID is displayed on ID 24F or 30F is displayed The setting of this item is effective only when the operation mode of this unit is set to 23 98PsF or 24PsF A07 PD CHARACTER 24F TIME CODE MODE off on When item 620 and A03 is set to on specifies whether or not the 2 3 pulldown 24 frame time data is inserted to the first line instead of 30 frame time data off 30 frame time data is displayed on 24 frame time data is displayed The setting of this item is effective only when the operation mode of this unit is set to 23 98PsF or 24PsF A08 FC REFERENCE select extrn HD extrn SD Selects the signal to be the reference for the FORMAT CONV OUT input to the REF INPUT 2 connector extrn HD Use the HD tri level reference signal input to the REF INPUT 2 connector as the FORMAT CONV OUT reference signal extrn SD Use the SD reference signal input to the REF INPUT 2 connector as the FORMAT CONV OUT reference signal Menu List xlpueddy 189 xlpueddy 190 Item number A10 Item 9 Pin TC sense select Setting LINE FC Function Specifies whether or not the time code information of FC output signal is returned when time code sense command is input through the 9 pin connecto
123. ARTING TC using the numeric buttons 4 3 TC Menu Button Indication Function F7 START TC ENT Press to enter the current time code as the STARTING TC F8 JUMP TC SEL Selects the JUMPING TC as an interval from STARTING TC Selectable values 3H 2H 1H 1H 2H 3H OH F10 EXIT Select to exit the TC CONVERT menu To preset the 24F STARTING TC using the numeric buttons oooooooooooo 9290000000000 Press the TC button and then press the ALT button The ALT TC menu appears Press the TCCONV MENU button The TC CONVERT menu appears Enter the time code in the data entry window with the numeric buttons Data entry window STARTING TC 00 00 00 00 JUMPING TC 03 00 00 00 CURRENT TC 00 00 00 00 START START JUMP TC PST TC ENT TC SEL REMAIN 01HO6M 3H ALTHTC lt 4 TCCONU MENU on ORG TC DISP on 01 00 00 00 S STILL HDCAM SR EXIT Press the SET button to set the time code STARTING TC 00 00 00 00 JUMPING TC TCCONU 03 00 00 00 00x00 00 00 STILL HDCAM SR START START JUMP EXIT l TC PST TC ENT TC SEL REMAIN 01H06M 3H ALT TC lt 4 SET 01 00 00 00 4 3 10 Displaying the Pulldown Time Code PD
124. AVE File Name csu 214001662_100115133330 csv Directory MSSONY PRO TELEFILE DATA CSU ADD CSU NAME DATE LABEL LOAD EXIT ID ADD SAVE Load TFW File to Tele File TFW IDIR MSSONY PRO TELEF ILE DATA File Name 6 20001959_090812182919 tfw LOAD Date 2009 08 12 17 29 20 ID 6E20001959 TFW No File Name Total 60 O 1 6E20001959_090812182919 tfw a SAVE 2 6E20001959_090812184513 tfw a ESU 3 BA14000034_090818141513 tfw 4 214001662_090817200332 tfw R ADD 5 C214001662 090817200609 tfw csv 6 C214001662_090818095459 tfw NAME DATE LABEL LOAD EXIT Z 1D ADD on D l a an Directory where the file is stored MSSONY PRO TELEFILE DATA CSV File name for the saved file LABEL_ID ID of the Tele File label _ DATE date and time when the file is saved YYMMDDHHMMSS csv Replacing the contents of Tele File label with the tfw data in the Memory Stick After pressing the CUE button press the ALT button 2 Press the T File MEMORY CARD button The T File CARD menu appears To display the data and label IDs of the tfw files Press the cursor gt button To display names of the tfw files Press the cursor button To sort the list Press one of the following buttons NAME button The list is sorted by the file name DATE button The list is sorted by the date LAB
125. BLACK LEVEL ALL Adjusting the setup level COMPOSITE Make this adjustment with the ALT SETUP LEVEL buttons prst 7 5 IRE Numerical value 0 to 10 0 Adjustable range 0 to 10 0 IRE This setting can also be carried out in the VTR SETUP menu item 762 SETUP LEVEL CST 4 5 VIDEO Menu 4 5 3 Selecting the FC LUT Function FC LUT BANK The FC LUT lookup table function converts FC output according to LUT files This function can be used for example to check tapes that were recorded using S log gamma on a standard ITU BT709 gamma monitor LUT files To use LUT files save LUT files stored on a Memory Stick MSSONY PRO VTR SRW5000 LUT to the banks of this unit HKSR 5001 You can save up to eight LUT files on this unit under BANK 1 to BANK 8 After a file is saved to a bank it is retained even if the unit is turned off When a bank is selected the content of the LUT file is applied during FC 4 4 4 4 2 2 conversion The extension for LUT files used on this unit is lut If the extension on a LUT file is not lut change the extension to lut For details on supported LUT file formats see LUT File Formats Applicable to This Board on page 195 in the Appendix Select the FC LUT function as follows T Press the ALT FC LUT BANK buttons The FC LUT menu appears together with the LUT files stored on the VTR LUT BANK 1 d 1 10SLogA to 10 lut 3 BANK1_Slog_
126. C FC H V RATIO 940 H V RATIO DC DC 959 H V RATIO UC UC FC 2 GAMMA 942 GAMMA LEVEL DC DC 960 GAMMA LEVEL UC UC FC CROP 930 DOWNCONVERTER MODE DC DC 950 CONVERTER MODE UC UC FC LETTER BOX 930 DOWNCONVERTER MODE DC DC 950 CONVERTER MODE UC UC FC SQUEEZE 930 DOWNCONVERTER MODE DC DC 950 CONVERTER MODE UC UC FC a Select whether to set DC or UC with sub item IMAGE ENHANCER of menu item 204 VIDEO REMOTE CONTROL SELECT When both are selected menu item 204 is U amp D both of the corresponding menu settings are made but this unit s answer values and unity values a re the DC values b With the exception of composite output c Use sub item D2 SETUP of menu item 204 VIDEO REMOTE CONTROL SELECT to determine whether to control menu item 762 SETUP LEVEL CST or 743 BLACK LEVEL ALL d When operating on the UC side the setting of menu item 950 CONVERTER MODE UC automatically determines whether menu Menu List item 951 H CROP POSITION UC or menu item 952 LETTER BOX POSITION UC is used e Supported by Sys1 Sys2 CP Ver 2 70 or higher f Supported by Sys1 Sys2 CP Ver 3 00 or higher HD HD SDI output during HDCAM SR HDCAM playback DC Down converted SD SD SDI COMPOSITE output during HDCAM SR HDCAM format playback SD SD D1 SD SDI COMPOSITE output during Digital Betacam format playback UC
127. CAM playback Still to 3 times normal playback speed Digital Betacam playback Still to 3 times normal playback speed Dynamic Tracking range HDCAM SR playback 1 to 2 times normal playback speed HDCAM playback 1 to 2 times normal playback speed Digital Betacam playback 1 to 3 times normal playback speed Load unload time 7 seconds or less Recommended tapes HDCAMSSR cassette S L BCT 6SR 33SR 40SR BCT 64SRL 94SRL 124SRL HDCAM cassette S L BCT 6HD 12HD 22HD 40HD BCT 34HDL 64HDL 94HDL 124HDL Digital Betacam cassettes S L for playback only Jog mode Digital video system Digital video signal format Sampling frequency Y 74 25 MHz Pp Pp 37 125 MHz RGB 74 25 MHz Quantization 10 bits sample Compression MPEG 4 Studio Profile Channel coding S NRZ Error correction Reed Solomon code Analog composite output Bandwidth Y 0 to 5 75 MHz 0 5 dB 3 0 dB S N ratio 56 dB or more Y C delay 15 ns or less K factor 2T Pulse 1 or less Output SCH phase Conforming to RS 170A CCIR R 624 3 Digital audio system Digital audio signal format HDCAM SR CH 1 to CH 12 HDCAM CH1 to CH4 Sampling frequency 48 kHz synchronized with video Quantization 24 bits sample Wow and flutter Below measurable level Selectable settings 20 18 16 15 and 12 dB T1 50 us T2 15 us automatically selected in playback mode Headroom De emphasis Analog output D A quantization 24 bits sample Frequ
128. CEL button to start again To change a character Press the cursor t button to move the cursor to the ID or ADMIN box Then press the cursor lt or button to move the insertion position If entered text is longer than the ID or ADMIN box lt l or I gt appears to the left or right of the box Press the SAVE EXIT button The screen that was on before the ID or ADMIN data was changed is displayed again 4 4 CUE Menu 4 5 VIDEO Menu In the VIDEO menu adjust the video signal The VIDEO menu screen shows the VTR operation mode current position time code time code type and so on About HD image quality adjustments When playing back tapes recorded in Y Pp Pp 4 2 2 format HD image quality adjustments are enabled for the HD SDI OUTPUT 1 2 and MONITOR connectors HD image quality adjustments are not possible when playing back tapes recorded in GBR 4 4 4 format Also To access the VIDEO menu screen Press the VIDEO button HD image quality adjustments are not possible when the optional HKSR 5001 Format Converter Board is installed and Y Pp Pp 4 2 2 format signals are output from the FORMAT CONV OUT OPTION and 2 connectors TAPE LOCK SRE 00 00 00 00 GIN asina a n AGUM ma IN QUT MASTER HD Y PB PR SETUP SYNC FINE HD HD HD HD HD HD
129. CH8 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12 VIDI TC J MULTI CONTROL knob MONITOR L buttons MULTI CONTROL ALT button DIAG button AMMA Menu selection buttons Color display Function buttons MONITOR R buttons Select the audio signal output from the MONITOR OUTPUT R connector This assigns the desired channel to the MONITOR OUTPUT R connector If you assign more than one channel to the same monitor output connector a mixed audio signal is output You can also make this setting using the VTR SETUP menu item 808 AUDIO MONITOR R select In the audio playback level adjustment mode this is used to select the channel to be adjusted MONITOR L buttons Select the audio signal output from the MONITOR OUTPUT L connector This assigns the desired channel to the MONITOR OUTPUT L connector If you assign more than one channel to the same monitor output connector a mixed audio signal is output You can also make this setting using the VTR SETUP menu item 807 AUDIO MONITOR L select In the audio playback level adjustment mode this is used to select the channel to be adjusted MULTI CONTROL knob Used to set the audio recording playback level and make settings in the SET UP menu see page 106 Menu selection buttons These select the menu screen displayed on the display HOME button Press this to go to the HOME menu screen The home menu provides settings for t
130. DEL MARK PRO TAPE POINT TECT INFO CUENUM WRITE POINT EXIT Tele File menu display 1 CUE REC DATE 2003 02 25 1 E0S 01 01 24 15 SCAN TITLE Display Sample 1 Rest 87 No Tape Format Duration ENTRY POINT 1 59i 1080 422 EINER cue 2 59i 1080 422 00 01 25 08 COMMNT 3 60P 720 422 00 02 36 45 EDIT 4 23P 1080 422 01 00 36 06 02 08 08 5 23e 1080 422 01 00 36 06 02 08 08 CHANGE DATA DEL MARK PRO TAPE CUENUM WRITE POINT TECT INFO POINT EXIT Tele File menu display 2 CUE REC DATE 2003 02 25 1 E0S 01 01 24 15 SCAN ITITLE Display Sample 1 Rest 87 No Data Time ENTRY PONT EES Hocanse_ooo CUE Q Ssaseess ananman HDCAMSR_001 COMMNT 3 ssassn annia HDCAMSR_002 EDIT 4 02 08 08 13 21 09 test 5 02 08 08 13 24 27 HDCAMSR_011 CHANGE DATA DEL MARK PRO TAPE CUENUM WRITE POINT TEET INFO POINT EXIT O REC DATE Displays the date the memory label contents were last modified Date Time Displays the recording date and time Duration Displays the recording duration File Name Displays the names of files When the Tele File menu display 2 is displayed you can press the SFT button to switch the TAPE FORMAT display between 59i 1080 422 and 59i 4 2 2 SQ
131. DIAG button isplay Maximum listing is 99 items see page 19 then press the F2 ERR LOG button TOP TOTAL 99 PAGE END EB 00 00 00 00 W 1B FULL NO A5 A6 INPUT msg 96 00 00 00 00 W 1C NO A7 A8 INPUT 97 00 00 00 00 W 1D ALL NO A9 A10 INPUT CLEAR 95 00 00 00 00 W 1E NO A11 A12 INPUT a ERROR FETON TIME EXIT on on on Tc Button Display Function Setting a E1 PAGE TOP Move to the top page 2 F2 PAGE END Move to the page containing the last message i F3 FULL MSG Display in full the message selected with the cursor F4 ALL CLEAR Clear messages LOG DATA F5 WARNING Display warning messages on off F6 ERROR Display error messages on off F7 CONDITION Display condition messages on off F9 TIME Toggle between time code and real time display TC REAL F10 EXIT Return to display of maintenance information ALT F8 CANCEL EDIT Display the CANCEL EDIT screen ALT F9 REAL TIME Display the REAL TIME screen For more information about error log menu settings refer 2 Select the message to be cleared using the t and l to the Maintenance Manual buttons F2 Clearing warning messages 3 Press the E2 MARK button An asterisk will appear in front of the message T Press the ALT CANCEL EDIT buttons The message will not be displayed or saved Error Messages Warning Messages Condition Messages 1 47 xlpueddy 148 To cancel clearing Select the warning message you want to cancel clearing and press the
132. E R ies 143 Warning MeSSages ijs ciscd sssacasdssadesanadeasanncsanectedssedeedesezannacpnades 144 Condition Messacesni s e ainen e E aE 147 Error Ore S220 L251 Wane nee centre aenea a ea aa a i 147 e E EETA 149 Menu LIS ccisscienceticcedentcactcanmentantedeacduennweudecistsieeberusdaendsetenban 151 Items Relating to VTR Operations Nos 001 to ee 151 Items Relating to Operation Panels Nos 101 to nn 155 Items Relating to Remote Interface Nos 201 to 158 Items Relating to Editing Nos 301 to eee eeeeeeteeeeteees 159 Items Relating to Prerolling Nos 401 to eee eeeeeeeteee 163 Items Relating to Recording Protection Nos 501 to 164 Items Relating to the Time Code Nos 601 to Jeees 165 Items Relating to the Video Control Nos 706 to 5 170 Items Relating to the Audio Control Nos 807 to 174 Items Relating to Digital Processing Nos 902 to v0 184 Items Relating to the Pulldown Control Nos AOI to 188 Other Items Nos TOT tosa a 190 LUT File Formats Applicable to This Board 195 MPEG 4 Visual Patent Portfolio License 2 00 197 DON vive E E E T E 198 Overview 1 1 Features 1 1 1 Features of the SRW 5000 SRW 5500 The SRW 5000 SRW 5500 is a high definition digital videocassette recorder using the HDCAM SR format It is a small and light unit incorporating LSIs for signal processing and is c
133. EL ID button The list is sorted by the label ID Press the cursor or l button or rotate the MULTI CONTROL knob to select the data to be written to the Tele File label Press the LOAD ADD button A message asking you to confirm the operation appears in the display 4 4CUEMenu 73 suas nu y p sajdeuD 74 SAVE Load TFW File to Tele File TEW IDIR MSSONY PRO TELEFILE DATA File Name C214001662_090817200332 tfw LOAD TFW A CONFIRMATION OF LOADING SAVE CSU PRESS SFT1 F9 to LOAD ADD PRESS CLR to CANCEL csv NAME DATE LABEL LOAD EXIT ID ADD The csv files stored in the Memory Stick are displayed in a list To cancel saving the Tele File data Press the CLR button while the confirmation message appears Press the LOAD ADD button while holding down the SFT button The contents of the Tele File label is replaced with the tfw file When the procedure is completed COMPLETED appears in the display SAVE Add CSU File to Tele File TFW IDIR MSSONY PRO TELEF ILE DATA CSU File Name C214001662_090821110537 csv LOAD Date 2009 08 21 10 05 38 ID C214001662 TFW No File Name Total 21 EAA SAVE 2 215001662_090829105533 csu CSU 3 C215001662_090827105939 csu 4 215001662_091001113900 csu ADD 5 C215001662_091001113908 csv csv 6 C215001662_091001113912 csv NAME DATE LABEL
134. EO AUDIO REMAIN 01H06M off v A ALTHTC lt 4 4 Press the IN or OUT button The time data for the IN or OUT point appears in the menu display About automatic edit point setting Editing requires a total of four edit points IN and OUT points for both the recorder and player VTRs However as soon as you set three edit points the VTR automatically sets the fourth point In the figure below the points enclosed in a box have been set manually while the OUT point for the player VTR has been set automatically IN point OUT point Recorder VTR VW v Player VTR A A f IN point OUT point Whether set manually or automatically all edit points can be changed or deleted at any time Automatic setting of OUT points When the fourth edit point OUT point is set the edit point data is activated and the invalid point is automatically deleted Automatically set edit point IN point Recorder VTR Y Player VTR gt IN point OUT point Fourth edit point Automatic setting of IN points When an IN point is corrected the OUT point is set automatically using the duration of the VTR whose edit points were not changed IN point OUT point Recorder VTR Y v Player VTR i z A A A IN point 7 st OUT point Corrected Automatically edit point set edit point Split editing
135. ESET values have the item number or item name for a subitem in the VTR SETUP screen shown in yellow 4 7 2 PANEL SETUP Menu The PANEL SETUP menu is used to set the operation conditions of the upper and lower control panels To activate the PANEL SETUP menu Press the SET UP button then press the PANEL SETUP button KEYINH off PLAY LOCK BEEP BEEP off high KEY ALARM SCREEN SCREEN EXIT SAVER SAVER S 10min 4 7 SET UP Menu sBunjes nue p Je deyo 109 suas nu y p sajdeuD 110 Button Indication Function Settings F1 KEYINH Disables all button operations on off F6 KEY BEEP Sets the keyboard sound high mid low off F7 ALARM BEEP Sets the alarm high mid low off F8 SCREEN Sets the color display screen saver 3min 10min 60min off SAVER F9 SCREEN Sets the information display screen saver on off SAVER S F10 EXIT Returns to the PANEL SETUP menu Disabling button operations on the upper lower control panel Set the KEYINH button to on Setting the confirmatory beep after button operations Press the KEY BEEP button repeatedly high loud confirmatory beep mid confirmatory beep low quiet confirmatory beep off no confirmatory beep Setting the alarm sound when an error occurs Press the ALARM BEEP button repeatedly high loud alarm sound mid alarm sound low quiet alarm s
136. EXIT button This returns to the AUDIO menu screen You can also make this setting using the VTR SETUP menu item 817 PITCH CORRECTION GROUP select 4 6 AUDIO Menu sBunjes nue p se deyo 105 suas nu y p saideuD 106 4 7 SET UP Menu In the SET UP menu you can store and recall menu settings to and from the VTR memory banks and Memory Stick register items to the PF menu and set items in the VTR SETUP menu and PANEL SETUP menu For details on storing and recalling data to or from the VTR memory banks or Memory Stick and registering items to the PF menus see 4 1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings on page 40 To activate the SET UP menu Press the SET UP button To change the SET UP menu page Press the ALT button Y indicates that more than one menu page exists UTR BANK v MEMORY CARD v PF ASSIGN v F1 UTR BANK Copy data between current setup and 8 banks F21MEMORY CARD Cory data between UTR and memory card F41PF1 amp 2 ASSIGN Assign PF1 PF2 menu function keys FSIPANEL SETUP Panel setting F6 UVTR SETUP UTR current setup PANEL UTR SETUP SETUP v v Button Indication Function Settings F1 VTR BANK See 4 1 4 VTR Memory Bank Function on page 42 F2 MEMORY CARD See 4 1 5 Memory Sti
137. F For down converter output selects whether to suppress DC ON signals with levels that are lower than the pedestal level OFF Do not suppress signals lower than the pedestal level ON Suppress signals lower than the pedestal level 946 D C COLOR MODE mode 1 Sets the hue of the down converter output mode 2 mode 1 Sets the hue of the conventional SRW series videocassette recorder modez2 Sets the hue of the conventional HDW 2000 series HDW F500 videocassette recorder 950 CONVERTER EDGE CROP Selects the mode for up conversion MODE UC LETTER BOX EDGE CROP Select edge crop mode SQUEEZE LETTER BOX Select letterbox mode SQUEEZE Select squeeze mode 951 H CROP POSITION 120 When EDGE CROP is selected in menu item 950 adjusts UC the H crop the frame in the horizontal direction inserted in preset 0 0 edge crop mode in up conversion output 120 1 86 Menu List Item number Item Setting Function 952 LETTER BOX 120 When LETTER BOX is selected in menu item 950 adjusts POSITION UC the position in the vertical direction of the letterbox in up preset 0 0 conversion output 120 953 UP CONVERTER FIELD Selects the original image used for conversion from SD to PROCESS FRAME HD ADAPTIVE FIELD Selects field images ADAPTIVE 2 FRAME Selects frame images ADAPTIVE 3 ADAPTIVE
138. FLtol0SLosA lut RESET 9 12FLto12SLosA lut NAME DATE LoAD EXIT To cancel the save operation Press the CLR button Press the COPY button while holding down the SFT button The LUT data stored on the Memory Stick is saved Saving LUT data to the Memory Stick T Press the cursor 1 or l button or rotate the MULTI CONTROL knob to select the LUT data to be saved to the Memory Stick Press the FC LUT SAVE button A message asking you to confirm the operation appears in the display e Directory displayed MSSONY PRO VTR SRW5000 LUT e File name displayed lut To display the LUT curve for LUT data stored on the Memory Stick Press the DETAIL button You can return to the previous screen by pressing the DETAIL button again To sort the list NAME button The list is sorted by file name DATE button The list is sorted by date Press the LOAD button A message asking you to confirm the operation appears in the display DETAIL LUT Bank 3 1 10to1OSLogA lut FC LUT LOAD A CONFIRMATION OF SAVING FC LUT SAVE PRESS SFT F3 to SAVE PRESS CLR to CANCEL Fe LUT RESET FC LUT EXIT MODE Bank 3 To cancel the save operation Press the CLR button Press the FC LUT SAVE button while holding down the SFT button The LUT data is saved to the Memory Stick 4 5
139. G to set the display to ena s ena Enable the settings of this menu dis Disable the settings of this menu and use the settings for CH1 to CH8 of DIGOUT EXCHNG 3 Select the digital audio output signal for each channel TR1 to TR2 Output the audio signals recorded on tracks 1 to 12 4 Press the EXIT button This returns to the AUDIO menu Making output settings for individual channels with the F buttons By pressing any of the SDOUT CH1 TR1 to SDOUT CH8 TR8 buttons you can select the source track for each channel Making input signal selections for individual channels with the numeric buttons 1 Press the cursor or gt button to align the cursor with the channel for which you want to make the selection 2 Press the cursor t or l button to select the source channel to be output To return to the default settings Press the cursor center button The cursor item returns to the default You can also make this setting using the VTR SETUP menu item 836 SD AUDIO OUTPUT EXCHANGE 4 6 5 Audio Transition Type Selection for Digital Audio Editing AUDIO EDIT To select the digital audio transition type at edit points use the following procedure 4 6 AUDIO Menu in the AUDIO menu press the ALT button The AUDIO EDIT menu opens and an edit image window appears AUDIO EDIT FADE TIME AUDIO EDIT CROSS FADE FADE TIME 50ms PB INPUT IN OUT T
140. GROUP select CH6 PITCH Grp A Grp B Grp C CORRECTION Grp D Grp E Grp F OFF GROUP select CH7 PITCH Grp A Grp B Grp C CORRECTION Grp D Grp E Grp F OFF GROUP select CH8 PITCH Grp A Grp B Grp C CORRECTION Grp D Grp F OFF GROUP select CH9 PITCH Grp A Grp B Grp C CORRECTION Grp D Grp F OFF GROUP select CH10 PITCH Grp A Grp B Grp C CORRECTION Grp D Grp E Grp F OFF GROUP select CH11 PITCH Grp A Grp B Grp C CORRECTION Grp D Grp E Grp F OFF GROUP select CH12 Function When pitch correction is performed during program play and play at a different frequency 23 98 frame gt 24 frame 23 98 24 frame 25 frame 29 97 frame gt 30 frame selects the group relationship between audio channels Grp A Performs pitch correction according to the mutual relationships between the channels selected for group A Grp B Performs pitch correction according to the mutual relationships between the channels selected for group B Grp C Performs pitch correction according to the mutual relationships between the channels selected for group C Grp D Performs pitch correction according to the mutual relationships between the channels selected for group D Grp E Performs pitch correction according to the mutual relationships between the channels selected for group E Grp F Performs pitch correction according to the mutual relationships between the channels selected for group F OFF Does not perform pitch correction
141. HD is selected input a tri level SYNC signal for external synchronization When SD is selected input a video signal with chroma burst VBS or a monochrome video signal VS A loop through connection is possible Set the 75Q termination switch to OFF if you are using a loop through connection and set it to ON if you are not using a loop through connection SD OUT SYNC connector BNC This outputs an NTSC or PAL signal for external synchronization The output phase is the same as that of the composite signal output from the SD OUT COMPOSITE MONITOR connector Because the output phase changes with the operation mode of the VTR use this for synchronization with the video monitor 27 2 2 Connector Panel Sed Jo suogouny pue suoljes07 z seideyD 28 SD OUT COMPOSITE MONITOR connector BNC Outputs an analog composite signal for a video monitor When the ALT CHARA SUPER setting in the TC menu is on character signals such as time codes are superimposed on the output HD REF OUT connectors BNC Output an HD tri level sync signal during tape playback TIME CODE OUT connector XLR 3 31 male Outputs the following time codes according to the VTR operation mode In playback mode Playback time code In recording mode Time code generated by the internal time code generator or time code input to the TIME CODE IN connector To select the output signal use the VTR SETUP menu item 613 TC OUTPUT
142. I DATA SDI input signal data is invalid 34 NO CASSETTE COMPARTMENT The cassette compartment does not operate because the VTR is in MODE no cassette compartment mode 3B NO LTC REPRODUCED LTC signal not detected on the tape 52 NO SUPPORTED PB FORMAT The recording format cannot be played back by this unit 53 SYSTEM MISMATCH The tape cannot be played with the current system settings 55 VIDEO PLL UNLOCKED Video lock generator PLL not locked to the video reference signal 59 INPUT AUDIO DATA MISMATCH The input audio frequency is wrong 32 000K 5A INPUT AUDIO DATA MISMATCH The input audio frequency is wrong 47 056K 61 Tele File MEMORY IS FULL The remaining capacity of the Tele File is low and therefore the next recording will overwrite old data 62 NO AREA FOR Tele File DATA There is no space at all in the Tele File ADDITION 63 INVALID FORMAT Tele File Parts of the Tele File format are wrong 64 Tele File DATA WRITE FAIL A write to Tele File error occurred 65 NO Tele File LABEL The Tele File could not be recognized and therefore the cassette is ejected HDCAM SR only 66 Tele File DATA WRITE IS INHIBITED Recording or editing was started with the Tele File in overall write gt inhibit mode E 67 Tele File DATA READ FAIL A Tele File read error occurred Q x 171 INVALID FORMAT CONVERSION The settings do not allow format conversion 72 REC EDIT DISABLE CASSETTE The inserted cassette cannot be recorded or edited because of FORMAT sy
143. Items 611 and 612 allow VITC to be inserted in two lines 1 66 Menu List Item number Item Setting Function 612 VITC POSITION 2 12 281 line When 29 97PsF 59 94i mode is selected on the VTR this select NTSC setting specifies the lines in which the VITC signal is 16 279 line inserted It can be inserted in any lines from 12 281 to 20 283 20 283 line Items 611 and 612 allow VITC to be inserted in two lines 613 TC OUTPUT off tape Specifies the signal output to the TIME CODE OUT SIGNAL IN regene connector when the internal time code generator is in a REGENE MODE through mode for regenerating the playback time code i e during auto edit mode or when item 607 is set to int LTC and item 606 is set to regene off tape The playback time code signal is output to the TIME CODE OUT connector without regeneration regene The playback time code signal is output to the TIME CODE OUT connector after regeneration only when the VTR is in playback mode through The time code signal input to the TIME CODE IN connector is output as it is 614 PHASE off Specifies whether the phase correction control of the LTC CORRECTION on signal generated by the time code generator is applied or not off The phase correction control is not applied on The phase correction control is applied 616 VITC POSITION 1 9 322 line When 25PsF 50i mode
144. LL button while holding down the SFT button To cancel the undo operation press the CLR button To copy time data of a cue point to another cue point specified in the CUE menu T Press the ALT COPY to CUE buttons A copy confirmation window appears To cancel the copy operation Press the CLR button 2 Press the COPY to CUE button while holding down the SFT button The time data of the cue point is copied to the cue point indicated in the CUE menu Changing Mrk data Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the line with the mark attribute to be changed and then press the MARK button Or move the cursor directly to the mark attribute to be changed and then press the CHANGE DATA button In both cases each press of the button changes the attribute as follows OK NG KP KEEP blank no attribute Changing the recording starting point setting Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the recording starting point section Then press the CHANGE DATA button Each press of the button turns the setting on the indication appears or off the indication disappears Entering and modifying IN OUT point data You can use either the ENTRY button or the numeric buttons to enter and modify IN OUT point data 4 4 CUE Menu sBunjes nue p Je deyo 85 suas nu y p saideuD 86 To enter or modify IN OUT point data using the ENTRY button
145. Loap EXIT 1D ADD SAVE jLoad TFW File to Tele File TFW IDIR MSSONY PRO TELEFILE DATA File Name C214001662_090817200332 tfw LOAD TFW COMPLETED SAVE CSU ADD CSU NAME DATE LABEL LOAD EXIT ID ADD Adding the csv data in the Memory Stick to the Tele File label After pressing the CUE button press the ALT button 2 Press the T File MEMORY CARD button The T File CARD menu appears To display the data and label ID of the csv files Press the cursor gt button To display names of the csv files Press the cursor button To sort the list Press one of the following buttons NAME button The list is sorted by the file name DATE button The list is sorted by the date LABEL ID button The list is sorted by the label ID Press the cursor t or l button or rotate the MULTI CONTROL knob to select the data to be added to the Tele File label Press the LOAD ADD button A message asking you to confirm the operation appears in the display SAVE TFW LOAD TFW SAVE CSU ADD CSU NAME DATE LABEL LOAD EXIT ID ADD SAVE Jadd CSU File to Tele File TFU IDIR MSSONY PRO TELEF ILE DATA CSU File Name C214001662_090821110537 csu LOAD l2 TFW A CONFIRMATION OF ADDING SAVE CSU PRESS SFTI IF9
146. MARK button Adjusting the clock Press the ALT REAL TIME buttons in the error log menu and use the setting below To get current time codes Hold down the SFT button and press the GET TC button To set the data and time Hold down the SFT button and press the SET button Use the and buttons to move the bar to the location to be adjusted Use the numeric buttons to change the value To adjust minutes and second to zero Hold down the SFT button and press ZERO button To select daylight saving time and normal time Hold down the SFT button and press SEASON button STANDARD normal time SUMMER daylight saving time one hour ahead of normal time Changing between normal and daylight saving times changes the current time by one hour Even if the change crosses midnight the current date is not changed Error Messages Warning Messages Condition Messages Glossary AES EBU format A standard format for the transfer of digital audio signals In this format two audio signals can be input output through one XLR type connector Assemble editing An edit mode for adding new scenes to the end of previously recorded scenes New video signals are recorded for each control signal but continuity with the control signal preceding the edit point is maintained electrically Because assemble editing in the middle of a scene will cause a break in the video image at the end of the insertion this is not a
147. O REWIND is set to on then the tape automatically rewinds to the beginning and stops 5 2 Recording yoeghe dq Bulpiooey G sa deyo 115 yoeghe d Bulpiooay g Jaj deyo 116 5 3 Preparing for Playback 5 3 1 Setting Switches and Menus Before starting playback set the switches and menus as shown in the diagram below For details see the pages indicated in the parentheses REMOTE buttons None of these buttons light up MONITOR SELECT buttons Audio channels to be monitored page 112 POWER switch ON PB level controls Playback level Menu settings TIMER SEL button in the TC menu Select the time data to be displayed 5 3 2 Adjusting the Audio Playback Level 1 Press the PB LEVEL button at the upper left of the control panel to enter the PB LEVEL adjustment mode A vertical blue line appears at the right of the audio level meter for each channel indicating the PB LEVEL adjustment mode 2 Press the button for the channel for which you want to carry out the adjustment common with MONITOR R to make the channel active An orange border appears around the audio level meter indicating that it is active 3 Make the adjustment using the MULTI CONTROL knob or cursor buttons 5 3 Preparing for Playback To escape from the PB LEVEL adjustment mode Press the PB LEVEL button at the upper left of the contro
148. O menu screen To make output settings for individual channels with the F buttons By pressing any of the ANAOUT CHI TR1 to ANAOUT CH4 TR4 buttons you can select the source track for each channel To make input signal selections for individual channels with the numeric buttons T Press the cursor or gt button to align the cursor with the channel for which you want to make the selection 2 Press the cursor f or l button to select the source track to be output To return to the default settings Press the cursor center button The cursor item returns to the default You can also make this setting using VTR SETUP menu item 835 ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT EXCHANGE 4 6 4 Digital Audio Output Signal Source Track Selection SDOUT EXCHNG To make the source track selection for the digital audio output signal audio multiplexed with SD SDD use the following procedure T Press the SDOUT EXCHNG button The SDOUT menu appears together with a source track selection menu for the digital audio output signals 4 6 AUDIO Menu sBunjes nue p Je deyo 101 suas nu y p sajdeuD 102 SD AUDIO OUTPUT EXCHANGE TR2 CHI CH2 CHS CH4 TR2 TR3 TR4 TR3 CHS CH6 CH7 LCH8 SD OUT TRS TR6 TR TRE SD OUT SD OUT SD OUT SD OUT SD OUT EXIT CHS CHE CH CH8 EXCHNG TRS TRE TR TRE dis 2 Press SD OUT EXCHN
149. OS 01 01 24 15 lf Rast 100 POINT CUE O 00 14 10 10 gt S a COMMNT EDIT CHANGE DATA 600 6 DEL MARK PRO TAPE CUENUM WRITE POINT TECT INFO POINT EXIT CUE REC DATE 2003 02 251 EOS 01 01 24 15 SCAN ITITLEL 1 Rast100 No Time Mrk Tk Cut Scn ENTRY POINT 0 00 14 10 10 uo 0 CUE Jls Ai ae a COMMNT EDIT CHANGE DATA DEL MARK PRO TAPE CUENUM WRITE POINT TECT INFO POINT EXIT CUE REC DATE 2003 02 251 E0S 01 01 24 15 SCAN TITLEL 1 Rast100 No bio O ENTRY POINT Moo 14 16 05 00 14 17 02 INOUT COMMNT EDIT gt 1 CHANGE DATA DEL MARK PRO POINT TECT TAPE CUENUM WRITE INFO POINT EXIT CUE REC DATE 2003 02 251 SCAN TITLEL No Time EOS 01 01 24 15 1 Rast100 Mrk Comment ENTRY N COMMNT EDIT CHANGE DATA DEL MARK PRO TAPE CUENUM WRITE POINT TEET INFO POINT EXIT REC DATE recording data date Shows the last date of recording TITLE Shows the title of the cassette content sBunjes nue p se deyo Time Shows the time data of a cue point Mrk mark Shows an indication of a cue point attribute OK NG KP blank Recording start point When a cue point is the recording start
150. OUT points for both the recorder and player VTRs However as soon as you set five edit points the VTR automatically sets the remaining three points For example if you set three edit points for video or audio and two for audio or video the remaining three points are automatically set regardless of whether these points are for the recorder or player In the following example the points enclosed in a box have been set manually and the AUDIO OUT point for the recorder VTR and the AUDIO IN and OUT points for the player VTR have been set automatically Note that whether set manually or automatically all edit points can be changed or deleted at any time AUDIO AUDIO IN point IN point OUT point OUT point Recorder VTR Y v v v Player VTR A A A A AUDIO IN point AUDIO OUT point IN point OUT point Automatic setting of AUDIO OUT points When the sixth edit point AUDIO OUT point is set the edit point data is activated and the invalid AUDIO OUT points are automatically deleted Sixth edit point set AUDIO OUT point AUDY AUDIO oot IN point IN point Soin OUT point Recorder VTRV v v v Player VTR A A A A AUDIO Jin point i CG OUT point IN point Cyn t lt SA AUDIO OUT point Edit point set automatically Automatic setting of edit points by correcting IN points When IN points are correc
151. PUT Output Video monitor NTSC PAL monitor a The figure shows the SRW 5500 DVW 500 Recorder For color frame editing using the SRW 5000 5500 as the player and an NTSC PAL digital device as the recorder set the VTR SETUP menu item 005 SERVO AV REFERENCE select to external and set the menu item 006 EXTERNAL REFERENCE select to extern SD 3 1 Connecting External Equipment 3 1 3 Cascade Connection This example shows how to connect multiple SRW 5000 Note 5500 VTRs together for simultaneous recording On the recording VTRs set the VTR SETUP menu item 613 TC OUTPUT SIGNAL IN REGENE MODE to through HDW F500 Player HD SDI OUTPUT TIME CODE IN TIME CODE OUT BNC cable HD SDI INPUT Digital video distributor HKPF 103M SRW 5000 5500 Recorder TIME CODE IN TIME CODE OUT HD SDI OUTPUT Video monitor HD serial monitor Ooooo
152. Press the SERVO REF button to select the signal to be used as the reference signal for VTR operations ext The servo reference signal is forced to be EXT input The signal from the HD SDI INPUT A B connector is used as the reference signal for VTR operations auto During recording or edit preset the signal from the HD SDI INPUT A B connector is used as a reference signal In all other cases the servo operates using the signal setting of the VTR SETUP menu item 006 EXTERNAL REFERENCE select If the signal selected in the menu item 006 EXTERNAL REFERENCE select is not present the servo operates using an internal reference decrease the value by 0 1 You can also change the setting with the MULTI CONTROL knob button Y HD Pressing this button makes it active and the cursor t and buttons increase or decrease the value by 0 1 You can also change the setting with the MULTI CONTROL knob button PB HD Pressing this button makes it active and the cursor t and l buttons increase or decrease the value by 0 1 You can also change the setting with the MULTI CONTROL knob button PR HD Pressing this button makes it active and the cursor t and l buttons increase or decrease the value by 0 1 You can also change the setting with the MULTI CONTROL knob button SETUP HD Pressing this button makes it active and the cursor T and l buttons increase or decrease the value by 0 5 You can also change the setting with the M
153. Press the desired INSERT button F4 INS TC INS VIDEO INS AUDIO 2 Press the RECORDER button or PLAYER button to select the VTR on which you will set the edit point The button you pressed lights 3 With the numeric buttons enter data into the data entry window For example to enter 01 HOOM30SOOF press 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 You need not input leading zeros If the entered value consists of less than eight digits the leading digit s is are set to zero s when you press the SET button 6 1 Basic Automatic Editing To delete entered data Press the CLR button 4 Press the SET button to confirm the input data SET is displayed PB EE PLAY LOCK PB er 01 04 58 00 AIN 00 01 10 00 AOUT 00 02 10 00 IN 00 01 10 00 QUT 00 02 10 00 ASSEM BLE Ero 00 30 00 off w 01 04 58 00 OQO TC H M S F S off STILL HDCAM SR Ins ins INS INS INS INS l VIDEO A CH1 A CH2 A CH3 A CH4 CUE REMAIN 01H06M off off off off off off ALTHTC lt 4 5 Press any of the IN OUT AUDIO IN and AUDIO OUT buttons When the edit point is set it appears on the editing data display About automatic split edit point setting Split editing requires a total of eight edit points four edit points for video editing IN and OUT points for both the recorder and player VTRs and four edit points for audio editing AUDIO IN and
154. PsF 25PsF 29 97PsF 30PsF 720x1280 59 94P 50P HDCAM SR format only Playback compatibility You can select the following compatibility playback functions e HDCAM SRW 5000 1080x1920 59 941 60i 50i 23 98PsF 24PsF 25PsF 29 97PsF 30PsF e Digital Betacam 525 59 94i 625 50i However Digital Betacam playback requires the HKSR 5002 option Internal format conversion function By installing an optional HKSR 5001 when the operation mode of this unit is 23 98PsF or 24PsF a 59 94i or 60i mode HD SDI output audio VITC multiplex is made available Additionally conversion in either direction between 1080x1920 and 720x1280 and conversion from 4 2 2 signal to 4 4 4 signal is possible and with the additional installation of an HKSR 5003 conversion from a 4 4 4 signal to a 4 2 2 signal 1 1 Features Noiseless playback with DT heads When using the HDCAM SR or HDCAM format the dedicated playback DT heads allow you to perform noiseless playback in the range from 1 to 2 times normal speed including still picture playback When using the Digital Betacam format the playback range is from 1 to 3 However Digital Betacam playback requires the HKSR 5002 option Video and audio confidence heads Video and audio channels 1 through 12 or 4 channels for the HDCAM format SRW 5500 only signals can be recorded and simultaneously played back to check the recording Internal time code generator and reader The internal time co
155. R The VITC value read by the time code reader during playback TCG TCG The value generated by the time code generator during recording CTL CTL The number of CTL signals on the tape during recording playing UBR LTC UBR The user bits value read by the time code reader LTC during playback UBR VITC UBR The user bits value read by the time code reader VITC during playback UBG UBG The user bits value generated by the time code generator during recording DUR DUR Appears whenever a duration between any two edit points IN OUT AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT points is displayed 1 LTC and VITC LTC cannot be read when the tape speed is very slow or is changed suddenly VITC on the other hand can be read more accurately than LTC when the VTR is stopped or the tape speed is very low VITC however cannot be read when the tape speed is very fast 2 CTL signals CTL control signals are pulse signals that are recorded horizontally in each frame 3 User bits These represent supplementary information as part of the recorded time code and consist of eight hexadecimal digits 0 9 and A F Time data for IN OUT AIN and AOUT points are also displayed TIMER PLAY LOCK SEL TC RESET 00 00 00 00 TIMER SET Time data for edit points TIMER HOLD TCR PEGENE SEL SOURCE VITC TCG RUN DF NDF TC2 MODE MODE SEL ragan free OF
156. RTER 486 line Sets the number of active lines in the down converter ACTIVE LINE 485 line output NTSC 484 line 486 line 486 lines Line 283 is active 485 line 485 lines Line 283 is blank 484 line 484 lines Line 21 and line 283 are blank 778 BLANK LINE NTSC blank For Digital Betacam NTSC playback this selects whether Sub items through or not to apply blanking to the vertical blanking interval of the SD video signal all line This selection can be made for each line separately and 12 275 line the Y C signals and odd even fields are blanked simultaneously 13 276 line blank Blank line 14 277 line through Do not blank line 15 278 line all line sub item When this item is selected the other 16 279 line items all take the same values 17 280 line 18 281 line 19 282 line 20 283 line 21 284 line Menu List Item number Item Setting Function 779 BLANK LINE PAL blank For Digital Betacam PAL playback this selects whether or z through not to apply blanking to the vertical blanking interval of the Sub items SD video signal all line This selection can be made for each line separately and 9 322 line the Y C signals and odd even fields are blanked simultaneously 10 323 line blank Blank line 11 324 line through Do not blank line 12 325 line all line sub item When this item is selected the other 13 326 line it
157. RW 5000 5500 and HKSR 5001 serial numbers SRW 5000 5500 Serial number 12001 or higher HKSR 5001 Serial number 11001 or higher 1 Excluding SRW 5000 serial numbers 90000 to 99999 and SRW 5500 serial numbers 30000 to 39999 Tape format HDCAM SR System frequency 4 2 2 1080 59 94i or 720 59 94P No audio is output when playing tapes recorded at other system frequencies Note about editing Always use time code to check and set edit points when editing while performing program play on the player Precise editing operations cannot be guaranteed if you use CTL signals To execute program play Proceed as follows to execute program play aaoooooaooooooa ooooo0oo0oo0o00000 Q Q Go 2 oO o Oo Qa oO Oo a o oO QO Cc m 5 4 Playback Set the same system setting for the VTR main unit and for FC output HD SDI signals will be output from both the HD SDI OUTPUT connectors and the FC OUT connectors 2 Set VTR SETUP menu item 020 P PLAY to on 3 Press the HOME button The HOME menu appears 4 Turn the MULTI CONTROL knob to set the program play speed 5 Press the PLAY button and VAR button at the same time Program play starts at the specified speed During program play HD SDI signals are output from the FC OUT connectors only They are not output from the HD SDI OUTPUT connectors About audio pitch c
158. S Shows the recording system information signal standard and tape format PB Shows the information recorded on the tape signal standard and tape format while being played back FC Shows the converted signal standard when an HKSR 5001 board is installed TC Shows the LTC VITC and DF NDF settings or the time code sent to the external monitor Page 2 System status ACTIVE LINE Shows the status of 1080 1035 conversion active line 1080 1080 1080 1035 CROP 1080 1035 CONV 1035 1035 1035 1080 PANEL 1035 1080 CONV Shows the current conversion status Cannot be converted OFF No conversion done DOWN CONV OUTPUT Shows the output status of the down converter ACTIVE Output MUTING No output EOS Appears at the location of the time code for the valid end of the previous recording Page 3 Phase OUTPUT HD SDI OUTPUT ADV Shows the phase of the main line HD SDI output OFF In phase with reference 90H 90H HD advanced with respect to reference DOWN CONV OUTPUT ADV Shows the phase of the down converter output OFF In phase with reference 2H 2H SD advanced with respect to reference Page 4 Phase AUDIO AUDIO PB OUTPUT ADV Shows the phase of the audio output signal OFF Output in phase with the video output signal 1Frame Output one frame advanced with respect to the video output signal AUDIO INPUT DELAY Shows the recording phase of the audio input signal OFF Rec
159. SIGNAL IN REGENE MODE Setting Description off tape In playback mode playback time code signal is output In recording mode TCG time code signal is output regene Only when the servo is locked in playback mode playback time code signal is regenerated and output In all other cases output is the same as for the off tape setting through The time code signal from the TIME CODE IN connector is output as it is Used for cascade connections For more information about cascade connections see 3 1 3 Cascade Connection on page 33 TIME CODE IN connector XLR 3 32 female Accepts external time code for recording to tape Connect to the time code output connector of the external equipment CUE OUT cue output connector XLR 3 31 male Outputs cue track audio during HDCAM or Digital Betacam playback There is no cue track on an HDCAM GSR tape and therefore no output CUE IN cue input connector XLR 3 31 female SRW 5500 only Enabled only during HDCAM format recording 2 2 Connector Panel 2 DIGITAL 1 0 input output section DIGITAI DIGITAL I O AES EBU INPUT OUTPUT vo HD SDI INPUT FC OUTB AUDIO AUDIO l MONITOR CH3 4 CH3 4 B INPUT B OPTION MONITOR HD SDI OUTPUT 7 2 MONITOR B OPTION B OPTION B OPTION FORMAT CONV OUT OPTION 1 MONITOR 2 SD SDI OUT MONITOR
160. SONY HD DIGITAL VIDEOCASSETTE RECORDER SRW 5000 SRW 5500 FORMAT CONVERTER BOARD HKSR 5001 DIGITAL BETACAM PROCESSOR BOARD HKSR 5002 RGB PROCESSOR BOARD HKSR 5003 The supplied CD ROM includes operation manuals for the SRW 5000 SRW 5500 HD Digital Videocassette Recorders English Japanese French and German versions For more details see 1 3 Using the CD ROM Manual on page 16 APITA SR n wA AS 47 Tele File KA Mia OPERATION MANUAL Ist Edition Revised 12 1 00 2 Important Safety Instructions Read these instructions Keep these instructions Heed all warnings Follow all instructions Do not use this apparatus near water Clean only with dry cloth Do not block any ventilation openings Install in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other apparatus including amplifiers that produce heat Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the point wh
161. Sets the time data F4 TIMER HOLD Holds the time counter F5 TCR SEL Sets the time code reader VITC auto LTC F6 REGENE SOURCE Selects the internal or external time code generator int Lint V for TCG regeneration ext L SDI VSDI L F7 TCG MODE Sets the time code generator regene prst auto F8 RUN MODE Selects the running mode of the time code free rec F9 DF NDF Selects drop frame mode DF NDF auto F10 TC2 SEL Selects the content of the second line of the time OFF LTC auto VITC CTL UBR code display UBV TCG UBG ALT Fi TAPE TIMER Selects the CTL display mode 12H 24H ALT F2 PDPSET MENU Pulldown time code preset ALT F3 TC CONV MENU Frame conversion time code preset ALT F4 PDTC DISP Pulldown time code display on off ALT F5 FC CHARA Superimposition of text data on FC output on off ALT F6 CHARA SUPER Specifies superimposition of character information to on off the HD SDI output and HD SD converter output ALT E7 CHARA H POS Changes the superimposition position horizontal O to 15 ALT F8 CHARA V POS Changes the superimposition position vertical 0 to 15 4 3 TC Menu sBunjes nue p Je deyo 59 suas nu y p 13 dey9 60 4 3 1 Setting the Time Data TIMER SEL RESET SET HOLD The display shows the following types of time data Indication Superimposed Time data type display TCRLTC TCR The LTC value read by the time code reader during playback TCRVITC TC
162. TC DISP when HKSR 5001 is installed To display the pulldown time code follow the steps below ooooo0oo0oo0oo0oo0000 200000000000 Q o Q a Q Q Q o Press the TC button then press the ALT button The ALT TC menu appears 2 Press the PDTC DISP button to select highlight on Each time you press the button on and off alternate on Displays the pulldown time code off Does not display the pulldown time code TAPE PLAY LOCK TIMER 12H a MENU 00 00 00 00 AIN 00 01 10 00 AOUT 00 02 10 00 TC IN 00 01 20 00 OUT 00 02 20 00 CONU off E as 0000 00 00 off 4 3 11 Superimposition of Character Information PD CHARA CHARA SUPER H POS V POS To superimpose the characters representing time code data and operation mode information on the output signals use the ALT PD CHARA and ALT F6 CHARA SUPER buttons Button Connector to which the characters are superimposed Setting ALT F4 on two connectors FORMAT CONV OUT connector on ALT F6 on MONITOR connector of HD SDI OUTPUT e SD OUT COMPOSITE MONITOR connector MONITOR connector of SD SDI OUT Contents of superimposed data Types of time data Time data Drop frame mark of the time code reader Drop frame mark of t
163. TR this VTR The PLAYER RECORDER buttons have no effect when using this VTR alone AUTO button When this button is pressed it lights up and auto edit mode is activated Cursor buttons Use to move the cursor shown in reverse video on the display Also use to change menu settings ENTRY button Press to enter an edit or cue point While holding down this button press either the AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT button or the IN or OUT button 2 1 Control Panel 21 seq Jo suooUN pue suoneooq z saideyo seg Jo suonouny pue suolyjes07 z seideyD 22 IN OUT buttons To set a IN or OUT point during editing press either of these buttons while holding down the ENTRY button AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT buttons To set an AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT point during insert editing press either of these buttons while holding down the ENTRY button Tape transport control section STANDBY button PREROLL button PREVIEW REVIEW button ii STANDBY PREROLL REVIEW REC EDIT STOP PLAY REC EDIT button PLAY button STOP button STANDBY button Press this button in other than standby mode to make it light up and place the VTR in standby mode The head drum rotates in standby mode thereby shortening the time required for the tape to start Press this button while in standby mode to turn the button off and exit from standby mode The head drum stops rotating and the tape tension is released If the VTR r
164. ULTI CONTROL knob F9 button SYNC HD Pressing this button makes it suas nu y p 13 dey9 94 4 5 2 Adjusting the Output Video Signal MASTER to FINE Adjusting the output video signal Set the output video signal menu items as follows e00000000000 200000000000 OC O O O O O am o 1 Press the function selection button F4 for example The setting display lights up 2 With the f and buttons or MULTI CONTROL knob change the numeric value Setting to the preset values Press the cursor center button or MULTI CONTROL knob The prst preset indication appears 3 At the desired setting value press the function selection button F4 for example The numeric values change as follows button MASTER HD Pressing this button makes it active and the cursor t and l buttons increase or increase or decrease the value by 1 You can also 4 5 VIDEO Menu active and the cursor t and l buttons increase or decrease the value by 1 You can also change the setting with the MULTI CONTROL knob button FINE HD Pressing this button makes it active and the cursor t and l buttons increase or decrease the value by 1 You can also change the setting with the MULTI CONTROL knob ALT F1 button MASTER Pressing these buttons make them active and the cursor T and l buttons increase or decrease the value by 0 1 You can also change the sett
165. XT HD Lights when extern HD is selected by the VTR SETUP menu item 006 EXTERNAL REFERENCE select INPUT VIDEO Lights when INPUT is selected by the VTR SETUP menu item 005 SERVO AV REFERENCE select PREREAD indicator Lights up during preread mode For more information about PREREAD see 6 2 2 Animation Editing on page 136 SERVO indicator Lights up when the drum servo and capstan servo are locked REC INHIBIT indicator Only when this indicator is not lit you can make settings for assemble insert editing mode and carry out recording and playback operations The status of this indicator depends on the setting of the REC INH button in the HOME menu and the state of the record protect plug on the cassette 5 Search control section SHUTTLE button JOG button VAR button Search dial the HOME menu all cassette Recording disabled Setting of the State of the record REC INHIBIT REC INH button in protect plug on the indicator Lit flashing Recording allowed Lit crash REC video Recording disabled jt flashing CTL audio CTL Recording allowed Unlit off Recording disabled _ Litflashing Recording allowed Unlit a Toggling between lit flashing settings is possible using the VTR SETUP menu item 104 REC INHIBIT LAMP FLASHING 2 1 Control Panel SHUTTLE button Press to enter shu
166. Y button A message asking you to confirm the operation appears in the display 7 Press the COPY button while holding down the SFT button The VTR stores the cue point list to the Memory Stick 8 Press the EDIT TITLE button to add a title to the cue point list For details see 4 1 6 Adding Titles to the Data on page 49 Preventing accidental erasure after saving settings Move the cursor to the cue point set number you wish to save and press ALT PROTECT buttons A symbol will appear to the right of the cue point set number 9 Press the EXIT button The SET UP menu appears again Recalling the contents of a Memory Stick The contents stored in a Memory Stick can be recalled to the current VTR memory bank 2 7 8 oooqdoooooo 9000000000 oo Qoo 0000000 53 1 4 6 1 Press the SET UP button The SET UP menu appears in the display 2 Press the MEMORY CARD button The MEMORY CARD menu appears in the display FORMAT CARD BANK 0 CURRENT SETUP CARD Preset 1 1 Preset UNDO Preset 2 2 Preset Preset 3 3 Preset Preset 4 4 Preset SHOW Preset 5 5 Preset Preset 6 6 Preset Preset 7 7 Preset SHOW Preset 8 8 Preset COESET fF Preset EDIT SELECT DIREC COPY EXIT TITLE ALL TION gt 3 Press the DIRECTION button to select the gt dir
167. a Memory Stick For each VTR SETUP menu item you can change the factory DEFAULT value to a desired value For details see To change the DEFAULT values in a menu item on page 109 The set DEFAULT values can be saved in a Memory Stick Insert a Memory Stick 4 1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings 51 sBunjes nue p Je deyo suas nu y p sajdeuD 52 2 Press the SET UP button The SET UP menu screen appears Press the ALT button The ALT SETUP menu screen appears Press the DEFAULT MEMORY CARD button The DEFAULT MEMORY CARD screen appears MEMORY CARD UTR BANK CARD DEFAULT DEFAULT BANK 1 UNDO Untitled C Preset g 1 Untitled fF Preset EDIT DIREC COPY EXIT TITLE TION The procedure for saving from CARD DEFAULT to DEFAULT BANK or CURRENT DEFAULT saving from DEFAULT BANK CURRENT DEFAULT or FACTORY PRESET to CARD DEFAULT changing the title or setting protection is the same as operation on a VTR bank For details see 4 1 5 Memory Stick Operations on page 44 The storage region for CARD DEFAULT is one set only The title shown in the current area is always that for the CURRENT SETUP data When CARD DEFAULT data with the title changed is written to CURRENT DEFAULT the title of the current area does not change Also when CURRENT DEFAULT settings are saved in DEFAULT BANK the title of
168. a entry window appears 2 Change the setting with the cursor t or l button You may also use the MULTI CONTROL knob 3 Press the ALT PREROLL buttons The data entry window disappears 4 2 7 Selecting DMC Playback DMC In DMC Dynamic Motion Control playback mode the VTR plays back a tape segment at a specified variable speed of 1 to 2 times normal playback speed memorizes the speed then plays the segment back at a later time at the memorized speed DMC playback is useful during on the spot telecasts of sporting events for immediate playback and broadcast of highlight scenes for which starting and ending points have been set during recording For detail on the procedure for DMC playback see 5 4 4 DMC Playback on page 120 During tape editing using two SRW 5000 5500 VTRs you can use DMC playback to control the playback speed of the player VTR for editing at variable speeds DMC editing 4 2 HOME Menu sBunjes nue p Je deyo 55 suas nu y p saideuD 56 For detail on the procedure for DMC editing see 6 2 1 DMC Editing on page 135 4 2 8 Setting the Stop Code STOP CODE You can select the stop code detection mode recording confirmation deletion and adjust the stop position when a stop code is detected To call up the STOP CODE menu screen Press the ALT STOP CODE buttons in the HOME menu F2 DETECT F3 DETECT VTR operation when stop BEEP butto
169. ads from wear or damage An Standby on mode A mode in which the head drum rotates with the tape wrapped around it and thus the VTR is ready for immediate recording or playback The VTR enters standby off mode after remaining in standby on mode for a specified length of time to prevent wear or damage to the tape and video heads Time code A digital signal recorded on the video tape that supplies information such as hour minute second and frame number for each frame to facilitate the setting of edit points or searching for specific scenes on the tape There are two types of time codes SMPTE for the NTSC color system and EBU for the PAL SECAM color system and two time code recording formats LTC longitudinal time codes which are CTL signals and audio signals simultaneously recorded longitudinally on the tape and VITC vertical interval time codes which are recorded on the video signal track Tracking The synchronizing of the head drum rotation phase and tape transport phase during playback and recording Tracking is adjusted to eliminate picture instability when playing back material recorded on another VTR User bits A recordable 32 bit section in each time code on a video tape for recording such information as the recording year month and day and the tape or program ID number Vertical interval time code See VITC VITC Abbreviation for Vertical Interval Time Code This is a time code recorded on a
170. and turn the unit back on If the error message appears again when the unit is turned on contact your Sony representative For more information about eliminating errors refer to the Maintenance Manual Volume 1 Protection mode To protect the tape and the mechanical parts of the VTR the servo control system automatically stops tape transport and the drum motor and enters protection mode when an error occurs Cassettes may not be inserted or ejected during protection mode When a cassette is stuck in the unit because of protection mode make sure to disconnect the power before removing the cassette manually For information about removing cassettes manually refer to the Maintenance Manual Volume 1 PB EE ERROR 88 RECING SYS1 SyYs2 off INTERFACE ERROR ASSEM in e _ _ Error message INS ve Total 1 message INS INS INS VIDEO AUDIO CUE off v off Item number Display Meaning 01 REEL SLACK THREAD ERROR Tape slack was detected during threading or unthreading 02 REEL SLACK SHTL ERROR Tape slack or a broken tape was detected during search fast forward or rewind 03 REEL SLACK VAR ERROR Tape slack a broken tape or an S side reel or T side reel lock was detected during recording or playback 04 REEL SPEED ERROR Tape transport speed error was detected during forward winding or rewinding 05 REEL FG ERROR When a
171. anel Lower control panel Upper control panel 4 Display section see page 22 Sued Jo suoOUN pue suoneooq z saideyo SONY 0090 ooooo0oo0oo0oo0oo0oo0oo0o ooo0 0o 0o 0o 0o oo 0 o 9 Q9Q 000o Search control section see page 24 Oc 000D UUOULUUUD Tape transport control section see page 22 1 Menu control section see page 19 2 Editing control section see page 21 e SRW 5000 serial numbers 12523 or e SRW 5000 serial numbers e Serial numbers 15001 or higher lower and 90000 to 99999 12524 to 15000 1 Excluding SRW 5000 serial numbers e SRW 5500 serial numbers 14577 or e SRW 5500 serial numbers 90000 to 99999 and SRW 5500 lower and 30000 to 39999 14578 to 15000 serial numbers 30000 to 39999 E o CA System set up panel Access by opening the lower control panel see page 25 For details of how to open the control panel for example for system setup refer to the Maintenance Manual 2 1 Control Panel 1 7 seg Jo suonouny pue suolyjes07 z seideyD 18 2 1 1 Upper Control Panel POWER switch ERROR indicator WARNING indicator EJECT button Format indicators SRW 5000 HD DIGITAL VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER HDCAM Eig REMOTE buttons B CHANNEL CONDITION indicators amp PHONES level contro
172. bbreviation for Longitudinal Time Code This is the time code recorded onto a longitudinal track of the tape During the playback of still pictures LTC cannot be read since the tape is not moving During slow playback the LTC output is so small that it may not be read correctly depending on the playback speed See also VITC xlpueddy Non drop frame mode In this mode drop frame mode processing is not performed Since there is no frame cutting a discrepancy of about 86 seconds occurs each day in the case of a field frequency of 59 94 Hz which causes problems when editing programs in units of seconds using the number of frames as a reference See also Drop frame mode 1 50 Glossary Preroll The rewinding of a video tape in the player or recorder VTR by a certain length before an edit point allowing the tape to attain a stable speed at the edit point and synchronization with the other video tape during editing Reference video signal A video signal containing a sync signal or sync and burst signal used as a reference for synchronizing video equipment Servolocking The locking of the phase and speed of a VTR s head drum rotation and tape transport to a reference signal during recording and playback Standby off mode A mode in which head drum rotation is stopped and tape tension is released and thus the VTR is not ready for immediate recording and playback This mode alleviates the tape and video he
173. burst signal When you have directly connected the input and output connectors of two SRW 5000 5500 units you can also perform dubbing with the VTR SETUP menu item 005 being set to input 3 2 Reference Signals 35 HLA 24 dn umes Je deyo 36 3 3 Handling Cassettes 3 3 1 Recommended Cassettes For recording and playback Use 17 inch HDCAM SR cassettes The maximum recording time is as shown in the following table System 29 97 30 Hz 25 Hz 23 98 24 Hz 40 minutes 48 minutes 50 minutes S size cassette L size cassette 124 minutes 149 minutes 155 minutes For playback only Use gt inch HDCAM or Digital Betacam cassettes The maximum playback time is as shown in the following table System frequency HDCAM cassette 29 97 30 Hz 25 Hz 23 98 24 Hz 40 minutes 48 minutes 50 minutes S size cassette L size cassette 124 minutes 149 minutes 155 minutes HDCAM cassettes are for playback only on the SRW 5000 They can be played back and recorded on the SRW 5500 System frequency Digital 29 97 Hz 25 Hz Betacam cassette 40 minutes 40 minutes S size cassette L size cassette 124 minutes 124 minutes Playing back a digital Betacam cassette requires the Digital Betacam Option HKSR 5002 Storage of cassettes Store your cassettes at room temperature and normal humidity 3 3 Handl
174. buttons to move the cursor to the IN OUT section and press the IN button and OUT button at the same time The duration between two points appears while the buttons are pressed To preroll to an IN OUT point Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the IN OUT section and press the IN button to preroll to an IN point or OUT button to preroll to an OUT point while holding down the PREROLL button The VTR prerolls to the point and stops For details on setting the preroll time see 4 2 6 Setting the Preroll Time PREROLL TIME on page 55 If the cursor is not on the IN OUT section when pressing the IN OUT button while pressing the PREROLL button the VTR prerolls to the cue point When pressing the PREROLL button only the VTR prerolls to the cue point regardless of the cursor position Automatic time data changes during IN OUT point data entry or modification The table below shows the automatic changes that occur in time data when either the IN point or OUT point is changed When IN point data is entered or modified Status of input data IN point OUT point The time sequence of the IN The datais The data is OUT point data is correct changed unchanged The time sequence of the IN The datais The data is OUT point data is not correct changed deleted The OUT point has not been The datais The data is input changed unchanged When OUT point data is entered or modified Status of the
175. ck Operations on page 44 F4 PF ASSIGN See 4 1 3 Registering Items to the VTR SETUP Menu on page 41 F5 PANEL SETUP See 4 7 2 PANEL SETUP Menu on page 109 F6 VTR SETUP See 4 7 1 VTR SETUP Menu on page 107 ALT F1 DEFAULT VTR See 4 1 10 Saving and Recalling DEFAULT Settings on a Bank on BANK page 51 ALT F2 DEFAULT See 4 1 11 Saving and Recalling DEFAULT Settings in a Memory Stick MEMORY CARD on page 51 ALT E7 REMOTE NET Selects access from the ETHERNET connector on off ALT F8 REMOTE 9 PIN Selects remote operation using a device connected to the REMOTE 1 on off IN 9P or REMOTE 1 I O 9P connector ALT F9 REMOTE 50 PIN Selects remote operation using a device connected to the REMOTE 2 on off PARALLEL I O 50P connector Selecting remote operation mode When operating the VTR with an external device set the ALT F7 REMOTE NET buttons ALT F8 REMOTE 9 PIN buttons or ALT REMOTE 50 PIN buttons to cc on 4 7 SET UP Menu When the ALT F7 REMOTE NET buttons are set to on You can operate the VTR from a computer or similar through the network to which the ETHERNET connector is connected When the ALT F8 REMOTE 9 PIN buttons are set to on You can operate the VTR with a device connected to the REMOTE 1 IN 9P or REMOTE 1 I O 9P connector When the ALT F9 REMOTE 50 PIN buttons are set to on You can operate the VTR with a device con
176. coaxial cable to carry one component video signal twelve digital audio channels and time code in time division multiplex this is separated for conversion to parallel data Audio recording can be switched between the digital audio signal multiplexed with the HD SDI signal and the audio signal from an AES EBU digital interface Bit rate reduction encoder The component video signal undergoes frame shuffling It is then compressed by a process in which it is subjected to DCT discrete cosine transform or DPCM differential pulse code modulation quantization control and variable length word encoding This is the core of the newly developed MPEG 4 Studio Profile Interlaced signals are compressed in fields and progressive signals are compressed in frames ECC encoder The outer ECC Error Correction Code is added to the compressed video and audio data followed by the inner ECC ID data and sync data Reed Solomon codes are employed in this error correction system Channel coding Video and audio data with the ECC added is recorded in the form of serial data The HDCAM SR format adopts a scrambled i NRZ channel coding system giving consideration to off track and noise characteristics Playback signal processing The playback digital signal is equalized by an equalizer circuit It then passes powerful inner and outer ECCs which can correct dropouts in the reproduced signal It further goes through an error concealment circuit to have
177. crease or decrease the value by 0 1 You can also change the setting with the MULTI CONTROL knob Adjusting the master output level HD Make this adjustment with the MASTER LEVEL button prst 100 4000H Numerical value 0 0 0H to 141 3 5A70H Adjustable range to 3 dB This setting can also be carried out in the VTR SETUP menu item 708 MASTER LEVEL HD Adjusting the Y output level HD Make this adjustment with the Y HD button prst 100 4000H Numerical value 0 0 OH to 141 3 SA70H Adjustable range to 3 dB This setting can also be carried out in the VTR SETUP menu item 709 Y LEVEL HD Adjusting the Pg output level HD Make this adjustment with the PB HD button prst 100 4000H Numerical value 0 0 OH to 141 3 S5A70H Adjustable range to 3 dB This setting can also be carried out in the VTR SETUP menu item 710 PB LEVEL HD Adjusting the Pp output level HD Make this adjustment with the PR LEVEL button prst 100 4000H Numerical value 0 0 OH to 141 3 SA70H Adjustable range to 3 dB This setting can also be carried out in the VTR SETUP menu item 711 PR LEVEL HD Adjusting the setup level HD Make this adjustment with the SETUP LEVEL button prst 0 0 Numerical value 10 0 to 10 0 Adjustable range 10 to 10 This setting can also be carried out in the VTR SETUP menu item 712 SETUP LEVEL HD
178. ction PRTEC of the whole Tele File menu ALT F10 WRITE Saves the changes and exits EXIT the Tele File menu To format a memory label T Press the ALT FORMAT T File buttons 2 Hold down the SFT button and press the FORMAT T File button A confirmation window appears To cancel Press the CLR button 3 Hold down the SFT button and press the FORMAT T File button COMPLETED appears To set write protection for the whole menu Press the ALT WRITE PRTEC buttons on Set write protection for the whole Tele File menu 84 4 4 CUE Menu off Clear write protection for the whole Tele File menu To change the TITLE data 1 2 Press the ALT ATTRIB EDIT buttons With the cursor t or l button select TITLE and press the ENTRY button With the cursor 4 or gt button select the character to be entered Press the SET LETTER button or cursor center button The selected character is entered Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the data To enter a space Press the SPACE button If you make an error in entry Press the BACK SPACE button then repeat the entry To return to the initial screen Pressing the CANCEL button returns to the initial screen To change a character during the operation Press the cursor T button then move the cursor to the title frame with the cursor lt or button change the character insertion position When
179. cts the test signal output by the signal generator built SIGNAL COLOR BARS 100 into the VTR GENERATOR HD COLOR BARS 75 off The test signal is not generated and the VTR operates SMPTE COLOR BARS normally ARIB COLOR BARS __ all other settings The test signal is output from the VTR At MULTI BURST 1 this time it is also possible to record the signal MULTI BURST 2 10 STEPS PULSE amp BAR RAMP BLACK T04 INTERNAL AUDIO off Selects the operation of audio test signal output SIGNAL silence off The audio test signal is not output GENERATOR 1 kHz sine silence Muted signal 1 kHz sine 1 kHz In this case a 1 kHz 20 dB FS sine wave is supplied to all audio inputs e When silence or 1 kHz sine is selected the AUDIO IN and AUDIO MONITOR L R buttons light up e When the unit is operated in the 23 98 PsF or 24 PsF mode with 1 kHz sine selected the output signal is 960 Hz a Supported only on units with serial numbers 15001 or higher excluding SRW 5000 serial numbers 90000 to 99999 and SRW 5500 serial numbers 30000 to 39999 Menu List Items T01 T02 and T04 are reset to their factory default settings whenever the power is turned off Recording and playback formats Recording and playback formats Cassette type Recording playback mode System frequency HDCAM SR 1920 x 1080
180. cue point 10 comes up as the next cue point In EXTEND mode if you press the ENTRY button after registering for example cue number 99 the next cue point is registered to cue number 99 again 4 4 CUE Menu sBunjes nue v Je deyo 75 suas nu y p saideuD 76 Registering cue points by the numeric buttons oaoooooaooooooa 9290000000000 00000000 Entered data PREV Blank 1 E0S100 13 00 001 PAGE PAGE o0 10 00 10 00 00 1 11 00 11 00 00 NEXT 2 12 00 12 00 00 PAGE 3 EEEE 4 14 00 14 00 00 5 15 00 15 00 00 6 16 00 16 00 00 7 17 00 17 00 00 a 8 18 00 18 00 00 eO y 19 00 19 00 00 STILL HDCAM SR CUE PAGE CUENUM M CUE l P ROLL SET SET CLEAR REMAIN 01H06M A CUE lt 1 2 Press the ALT PAGE MODE buttons or the ALT F9 EXTEND MODE buttons If you selected PAGE mode press the PREV PAGE button or NEXT PAGE button to select a desired page or use the numeric buttons to enter the page number in the data entry window then press the PAGE SET button Press the cursor t or l button to move the cursor to the cue number to be registered To modify current cue point data Press the or button enter the value to be added or subtracted then press the SET button The computation is performed and the results appear in the data entry window
181. d REGENE SOURCE button in the TC menu int LTC int VITC ext LTC SDI V SDI L page 59 TCG MODE button in the TC menu regene prst auto page 59 5 1 Preparing for Recording yoeghe q Bulpiooey G sa deyo 111 5 1 2 Selecting Audio Signals This section describes how to select the audio signals for input and monitoring Selecting the audio input signals Proceed as follows to select the audio input signal and channels aooooooaoooooooa oooo0oo0o0000000 a OO 0000 O o o o o g Q yoeghe q Bulpiooay G 13 deyo 112 1 Press the AUDIO button and in the AUDIO menu press the AUDIO IN button to access the AUDIO INPUT menu 2 Make the audio input signal settings for each channel SDI audio signal input from the HD SDI INPUT A B connector AES EBU audio signal input from the DIGITAL I O AES EBU connector To make settings for individual channels with the F buttons By pressing any of the A IN CH1 to A IN CH8 buttons in the AUDIO INPUT menu and the A IN CH9 to A IN CH12 buttons in the ALT AUDIO screen obtained by pressing the ALT button you can select the type of input signal for each channel To make input signal selections for individual channels with the numeric buttons 1 Press the cursor or gt button to align the cursor with the channel for which you want to make the selecti
182. de generator allows you to record time code LTC or user bits together with video and audio signals Time codes LTC or user bits can be read during playback using the time code reader Computer servo system Computer controlled servo motors provide direct drive for the drum capstan and two reels enabling quick and accurate tape access Capstan override function You can adjust the playback speed by 15 to ensure synchronization between for example two VTRs playing back the same program Independent audio level control It is possible to adjust the recording and playback levels either independently on each channel or simultaneously on all 12 channels or 4 channels for HDCAM format SRW 5500 only while monitoring the peak values Tele File memory label system This unit incorporates the Tele File memory label system to allow users to read write and update videocassette management information log data IN OUT points and cue point data on memory labels providing greater efficiency in cassette management and editing 1 Tele File A contact free system for writing reading and modifying video cassette related information on IC memory bearing labels Tele File is a trademark of Sony Corporation Program Play P PLAY Function Pitch Correction Function Program play is a function that allows play at 5 of normal speed Pitch correction of the audio is possible at the same time This function is available only for th
183. ditors and other external devices This function allows such devices to control channels 1 to 12 on this unit T Press the ALT REPLCE CH SEL buttons The REPL CH SEL menu appears together with the edit preset channel selection menu for each channel on this unit REPLACE TRI CH1 rrace EDIT PRESET REPLACE CH SELECT TR2 CH2 TR4 TRE rn REPLACE ca TG TR3 7 CH3 TRIG TRI ARIA REPLACE es CH10 CH11 CH12 CH4 REPLACE REPLACE REPLACE REPLACE REPLACE EXIT TRS TR6 TR TR8 CH SEL cHs che cuz chs ena 2 Press the REPLCE CH SEL button repeatedly until ena is displayed ena The settings of this menu are enabled dis The settings of this menu are disabled and the settings made in EDIT PRESET REPLACE MODE SELECT and ANALOG AUDIO EDIT PRESET REPLACE are used 3 Select the edit preset channel for each channel CH1 to CH12 The edit preset command of the selected edit preset channel controls the channel of this unit 4 Press the EXIT button The ALT AUDIO menu appears again Setting channels for individual tracks using the F button You can set channels for individual tracks by pressing the REPLCE TR1 to REPLCE TR8 buttons or by pressing the ALT button to go to the ALT REPL CH menu and then pressing REPLCE TR9 to REPLCE TR12 buttons Setting channels for individual tracks with the numeric but
184. e The JOG button is disabled in remote control enable mode enable The JOG button operates in remote control mode SHUTTLE disable disable The SHUTTLE button is disabled in remote control enable mode enable The SHUTTLE button operates in remote control mode VAR disable disable The VAR button is disabled in remote control enable mode enable The VAR button operates in remote control mode PREROLL disable disable The PREROLL button is disabled in remote control enable mode enable The PREROLL button operates in remote control mode PREVIEW disable disable The PREVIEW REVIEW button is disabled in REVIEW enable remote control mode enable The PREVIEW REVIEW button operates in remote control mode AUTO disable disable The AUTO button is disabled in remote control enable mode enable The AUTO button operates in remote control mode INPUT CHECK disable disable The INPUT CHECK button is disabled in remote enable control mode enable The INPUT CHECK button operates in remote control mode MENU amp CURSOR disable disable The menu buttons and the cursor control buttons enable are disabled in remote control mode enable The menu buttons and the cursor control buttons operate in remote control mode MONITOR disable disable The MONITOR button is disabled in remote enable control mode enable The MONITOR button operates in remote control mode Menu List xlpueddy 153 xlpueddy 154
185. e HD SD conversion mode 117 selects the conversion mode of the effective scanning line number 184 setting switches and menus 116 Preparing for recording 111 adjusting the recording level 113 selecting audio signals 112 setting switches and menus 111 Preread editing 136 PREREAD indicator 24 PREROLL button 22 Preroll time setting 55 PREVIEW REVIEW button 22 Program play function 12 Pulldown output 189 Pulldown time code displaying 67 presetting 64 R RCL button 21 REC INHIBIT indicator 24 REC LEVEL button 21 REC EDIT button 22 Recording 115 inhibit mode 54 REF SYNC indicators 24 REF INPUT 1 connectors 27 REF INPUT 2 connectors 27 Reference signal connections 35 REMOTE 1 I O connector 30 REMOTE 1 IN connector 30 REMOTE 2 PARALLEL I O connector 30 REMOTE buttons 18 RS232C connector 30 S SD OUT COMPOSITE MONITOR connector 28 SD OUT SYNC connector 27 SD SDI OUT connectors 29 Search control section 24 Search dial 24 Selecting audio input signals 112 audio signals to be monitored 112 Conversion mode of the effective scanning line number 184 CTL display mode 64 DMC playback 55 edit mode 54 HD SD conversion mode 117 multi cue mode 72 non audio data as the audio input signal 113 output signals 54 reference signal 34 remote operation mode 106 time code and the user bits to be recorded 61 SERVO indicator 24 SET button 21 SET UP menu 106 SFT button 21 SHUTTLE button 24 Shuttle mode playback 119 Slow motion pla
186. e Time data of the line to be moved Then press the or button Each press of the button moves the line up while each press of the button moves the line down If you perform the procedure above while the cursor is on any other data other than the Time data only the contents selected by the cursor will be moved To move the entire line be sure that the cursor is placed on the Time data Deleting a line Press the cursor button to move the cursor to the line to be deleted and then press the DEL POINT button while pressing down the SFT button The line is deleted and all the line numbers below are decreased by one Displaying other information saved to the MLB 1M 100 memory label Press the TAPE INFO button The TAPE INFORMATION window appears showing other information CUE REC DATE 2003 02 251 E0S 01 01 24 15 SCAN TITLEI TAPE INFORMATION t100 No ENTRY ID 001234567 POINT 0 o ADMIN Kanrisha ma MODEL HDW 700 gt SERIAL NUMBER 000123 TAPE THREAD COUNT 123 LABEL ID 0000000000 COMMNT EDIT ona w Looo CHANGE SIZE 1024 USED 234 DATA DEL MARK PRO TAPE CUENUM WRITE POINT TECT INFO POINT EXIT To close the window Press the TAPE INFO button again To change ID or ADMIN data aoaoooaooaoooooooa 9000000000090 00000000 1 4 6 2 3 4
187. e combination of SRW 5000 5500 serial number 12001 or higher and HKSR 5001 serial number 11001 or higher 2 Excluding SRW 5000 serial numbers 90000 to 99999 and SRW 5500 serial numbers 30000 to 39999 Features for ease of operation Compact lightweight low power consumption The VTR is small and light enough to be used in outside broadcast vans or in EFP Electronic Field Production assignments Remote control operation The VTR has a serial RS 422A 9 pin connector to allow control of the VTR by an external control unit The VTR also comes with 9 pin REMOTE 1 IN 9P and REMOTE 1 I O 9P connectors to support bridge connection of multiple SRW 5000 5500 units or other VTRs equipped with 9 pin remote connectors for simultaneous operation Furthermore you can control the VTR from an external control unit with a parallel 50 pin interface Digital hours meter The meter can show the total elapsed time since the VTR was turned on total drum revolution time total tape running time and total number of threadings and unthreadings Self diagnosis This function allows the VTR to perform self diagnostics when a malfunction occurs An error message is displayed and a history of all errors that have occurred is recorded Easy to maintain plug in boards The VTR uses plug in circuit boards to simplify servicing and inspection Mountable in standard 19 inch rack The unit can be mounted in an EJA standard 19 inch rack For
188. e cursor gt will not move when the cursor buttons are pressed To link the cursor gt with the cursor buttons Press the cursor center button Each press of the button alternately links and unlinks the cursor gt 2 Press the ENTRY button When the cursor buttons are aligned with the IN point and the IN point is at the OUT point when you press the ENTRY button at the OUT point the time code is either entered as a new value or updated To update the data the winding diameter measurement must be completed and the drum locked and then the tape information read in If the cursor P is not on the screen when the ENTRY button is pressed the time data on the line currently specified by the cursor gt changes to the current time data and the line is automatically displayed To clear the data With the cursor buttons align the cursor with the data you want to clear and in the case of the IN point hold down the IN button and in the case of the OUT point hold down the OUT button and press the CLR button to clear the data You can also clear the data by holding down the CLR button and pressing the IN button or OUT button Effect on other data of data entry or update When you enter or update the IN point or OUT point other data is updated as shown in the following table IN point entry update State of the already entered IN point OUT point data The already entered OUT Data is Data
189. e exists it flashes e Messages that have been cleared are not displayed For more information about clearing warning messages see Clearing warning messages on page 147 e When there are multiple warning messages each message flashes twice before it is replaced by the next message 168 Menu List Item number Item Setting Function 628 REMAIN TIME off Sets whether to display remaining time on the tape in DISPLAY 10min superimposed character position on off Do not display remaining time 10min Display remaining time when it is 10 minutes or less on Always display remaining time Note The remaining time on the tape is not displayed when no cassette is inserted The remaining time is not also displayed until the VTR finishes detecting the diameter of the wound tape and estimating the remaining time immediately after the cassette is inserted 629 CONDITION enable Sets whether or not to display playback signal status in DISPLAY VIDEO disable superimposed character position MONITOR enable Displays playback signal status disable Does not display playback signal status 630 TC CONVERT off Selects whether to convert the playback time code to the on operating frequency time code when tapes recorded with different frame rates are used for off speed playback off Does not convert the time code on Converts the time code 631 ORIGINAL TC off When item
190. e in search mode and the change to tape 40 sec protection mode 50 sec The selectable range of time is from 0 5 second to 30 1 min minutes 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 6 min 7 min 8 min 30 min 502 TAPE step fwd Specifies the tape protect mode to which the VTR changes PROTECTION standby off from still picture mode while searching JOG SHUTTLE MODE FROM tension release VAR SEARCH The unit enters automatically the specified tape protect mode after the time specified in item 501 has elapsed step fwd A two second step advance is repeated in forward direction at 1 30 times normal tape speed standby off The VTR enters standby off mode standby is canceled tension release The VTR enters tension release mode tape tension is released 503 TAPE standby off Specifies the tape protect mode to which the VTR changes PROTECTION tension release to from the stop mode MODE FROM STOP The unit automatically enters the specified tape protect mode after the elapse of time specified by item 501 standby off The VTR enters standby off mode standby is canceled tension release The VTR enters tension release mode tape tension is released 504 DRUM ROTATION off Sets the drum rotation to on or off during standby off IN STANDBY OFF on mode off Drum rotation is stopped on Drum rotation continues 505 STILL TENSION normal Sets the tape tension control in still picture mode loose normal Maintains the tape tension that ensures un
191. e made with the VIDEO menu and the VTR SETUP menu 2 Press the button for the channel for which you want to carry out the adjustment common with MONITOR L to make the channel active An orange border appears around the audio level meter indicating that it is active 3 Use the cursor buttons to make the adjustment To escape from the REC LEVEL adjustment mode Press the REC LEVEL mode button at the upper left of the control panel once more The vertical red line at the left of the audio level meter for each channel disappears or turns white To record at the reference level In the REC LEVEL adjustment mode make the channel active then press the MULTI CONTROL knob The setting becomes the reference value Press once more to return to the immediately previous value Press once more again to return to the reference value You can also return to the reference value with the cursor center button When you exit the REC LEVEL adjustment mode a vertical white line on the left of the audio level meter is not displayed To record with manual adjustment In the REC LEVEL adjustment mode make the channel active then at the mean volume make the adjustment with the MULTI CONTROL knob or cursor and l buttons so that the audio level meter is close to the reference 0 dB level When you exit the REC LEVEL adjustment mode the vertical white line on the left of the audio level meter and a horizontal red line indicating the setting are display
192. ecording Set the sub item REC of the VTR SETUP menu item 017 PB EE SELECT MENU to PB PB Both audio and video playback signals are output 5 1 5 Audio Level Meter Display Modes The audio level meter display changes for each mode depending on the current system recording mode settings and the type of cassette in use 5 1 Preparing for Recording REC Cassette EE PB EJECT format used HDCAM HDCAM SR_ 12ch 12ch 12ch SR HDCAM 4ch CUE D BETACAM SRW 5500 REC Cassette EE PB EJECT format used HDCAM HDCAM SR_ 12ch 12ch 12ch SR HDCAM 4ch CUE D BETACAM HDCAM HDCAM SR_ 4ch CUE 12ch 4ch CUE HDCAM 4ch CUE D BETACAM AUTO HDCAM SR 12ch 12ch 12ch HDCAM Ach CUE 4ch CUE D BETACAM 5 2 Recording To record follow the procedure below aoaooaooaoooooaoooooa 900000000000 0000 ooo OO 0000 088 0000 O 00000000 ia ooo Oo 1 Check that the REC INHIBIT indicator is off then insert a cassette For details on inserting a cassette see 3 3 2 Inserting and Ejecting Cassettes on page 36 2 Press the PLAY button while holding down the REC EDIT button Recording starts and the SERVO indicator lights up to indicate that the servo is locked 3 Press the STOP button to stop recording If the recording continues to the end of the tape If the VTR SETUP menu item 407 AUT
193. ected a warning mark is displayed in the upper left corner of the display Operation can continue even when the mark is flashing If you press the SFT button see page 21 and the DIAG button see page 19 when the mark is flashing an information display appears showing a warning message Error Messages Warning Messages Condition Messages The warning messages can be viewed in any menu except the CUE or SET UP menu Only one message will be displayed even if there are multiple messages The number of errors appears at the lower right and you can check the messages using the t and l buttons A history of errors is kept in the error log menu For more information about warning messages refer to the Maintenance Manual Use the displayed warning information to eliminate the cause of the warning For more information about eliminating the cause of warning refer to the Maintenance Manual To automatically display a warning message Whenever a warning occurs change the setting of the VTR SETUP menu item 120 WARNING DISPLAY to on To clear a warning message To cancel the display of a warning message see Clearing warning messages on page 147 PB EE RECINH off ASSEM BLE AIN IN STANDBY OFF 00 02 39 18 AOUT 00 00 OUT 00 00 off WARNING 08 NO SDI INPUT Total 8 message on
194. ecting the Drop Frame Mode DF NDF 4 64 4 3 6 Selecting the Content of the Second Time Code Display Area TC SEL e a a a Rear ee art ee 64 4 3 7 Selecting CTL Display Mode TAPE TIMER 64 4 3 8 Presetting Pulldown Time Code PDPSET MENU when HKSR 5001 is installed eee ee eeeeeeeeeneeeees 64 4 3 9 Presetting for Conversion from Frame Time Code TCCONV MENU ronio na e are 65 4 3 10 Displaying the Pulldown Time Code PDTC DISP when HKSR 5001 is installed 00 0 eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeneees 67 Table of Contets 7 8 Table of Contets 4 3 11 Superimposition of Character Information PD CHARA CHARA SUPER H POS V POS ce icescceeeeeeseeeeeeeees 67 4 4 CUE MO vicaducatutnauavenscvdnccaneasuetsntsserdnerastigitiaidiaeacwauause 71 4 4 Selecting a Multi Cue Mode ieee ceeeeeeceeeseeeeeeenees 72 4 4 2 Saving and Storing the Tele File Data eee 12 4 4 3 Registering Cue Points ssssessseeeseeeeseeessseessressersseeeseee 75 4 4 4 Erasing Cue Point Data eee eeececssceceneceeesneeeenaeeees 76 4 4 5 Prerolling to a Cue Point eee eeeceeeeeceesseeeenteeeeneeeees 77 4 4 6 Changing a Cue Point Into an Edit Point 78 AAT Tele Fl Menus reisiin a i aeiucaans 78 4 5 VIDEO Menu sisisssssscassectsansscccseisasienctanntecnindeannuranantusaeus 93 4 5 1 Selecting the Reference Signal SERVO REP 94 4 5 2 Adjusting the Output Video Signal MASTER to FINE MARAE E N er a E aR
195. ection The right cursor bar flashes 4 Move the cursor gt to the Memory Stick side using the cursor button and use the cursor t or l buttons to place the cursor bar by the memory bank where the settings were saved FORMAT ARD BANKO Saved data CARO p ELS OMT Prese 1 Preset UNDO Preset 2 2 Preset Preset 3 3 Preset Preset 4 4 Preset SHOW Preset 5 5 Preset Jeue Preset 6 6 Preset Preset 7 7 Preset SHOW Preset 8 8 Preset PUESET fF Preset EDIT SELECT DIREC COPY EXIT TITLE ALL TION gt 5 To change the title of the memory bank press the EDIT TITLE button The title can also be changed after the settings are recalled For details see 4 1 6 Adding Titles to the Data on page 49 6 Press the cursor button to move the cursor P to the VTR side then press the cursor or button to move the cursor to the VTR memory bank number where the recalled data are to be stored UNDO Preset 2 2 Preset Preset 3 3 Preset Preset 4 4 Preset SHOW Preset 5 5 Preset SEU Preset 6 6 Preset Preset 7 7 Preset SHOW Preset 8 8 Preset CUESET FF Preset EDIT SELECT DIREC COPY EXIT TITLE ALL TION gt FORMAT CARD BANK 0 gt RREN B EARD T Destination Preset 1 Prese flashing 4 1 Registering and Storing Menu S
196. ed indicating that the recording level is subject to manual adjustment You can also carry out the recording level adjustment using the VTR SETUP menu item 832 AUDIO REC LEVEL MONITOR L buttons 900000000000 OQQOO0000 Woe 0000 0000 00000000 ggg oo0o00 O OD 0000 Selecting the display range of the audio level meters You can switch the range of audio level meter display by pressing the FULL FINE button on the lower control panel 5 1 Preparing for Recording yoeghe dq Bulpiooey G sa deyo 113 yoeghe q Bulpiooay g Jajdeyo 114 FULL FINE button SRW 5000 FULL mode The meter range is 60 to 0 dB or 40 to 20 dB FINE mode The meter scale is enlarged and the signal level is indicated in 0 25 dB steps with the reference marker indicated in the middle of each meter The display range of the audio level meters in FULL mode can be set using the VTR SETUP menu item 814 LEVEL METER SCALE 5 1 4 Simultaneously Monitoring Playback of Video and Audio Signals Being Recorded Monitoring signals being recorded Using the VTR SETUP menu item 017 PB EE SELECT MENU you can make a setting so that the audio and video signals currently being recorded are simultaneously checked To check video and audio signals during r
197. effected playback even in still picture mode This is the normal setting for VTR operations loose Sets the tape tension lower than that of the normal setting after the VTR enters still picture mode In this case picture playback is not ensured For long standbys e g LMS in still picture mode this setting is recommended 506 DRUM ROTATION 1min When menu item 502 or 503 set to tension release or TIMER 2min when menu item 504 is set to on the drum motor of this 3min unit continues to rotate after tension release mode is 4min entered 5min This menu item sets the time until the unit enters standby 10min off mode and the drum motor stops rotating after entering 15min tension release mode 30min The selectable time ranges from one minute to eight hours 1H 2H 3H 4H 8H Menu List Items Relating to the Time Code Nos 601 to Item number Item Setting Function 601 DF NDF MODE drop frame Selects the timing mode for the time code generator and select non drop frame the CTL counter auto drop frame drop frame mode DF indication non drop frame non drop frame mode NDF indication auto Drop frame non drop frame mode is selected automatically on the basis of the frame frequency of the unit For 29 97 Hz drop frame mode is selected and for 30 Hz non drop frame mode is selected The setting of the frame frequency mode is carried out with the F
198. elated to recording are shown on the left If data is detected in the input signal the L1 L2 values are highlighted The right side shows playback values detected on the tape Page 7 Select FPS TAPE FORMAT Shows the playback format of the tape ACTUAL FORMAT Shows the recording format of the tape recorded with frames per second Select FPS mode specified Select FPS Shows the transportation speed and playback speed of the tape recorded with Select FPS mode specified Page 8 VPID Shows the VPID multiplexed with the input signal for LINK A and LINK B 1 VPID A packet standard defined by SMPTE 352M that identifies the format of multiplexed signals on the SDI 2 1 Control Panel 23 Sued Jo suooun pue suoyeco07 z saideyo seg Jo suogouny pue suoljes07 z seideyD 24 The ACTIVE LINE setting displayed on page 2 can be made in the SYSTEM screen The phase settings displayed on pages 3 to 5 and the settings relating to META DATA recording displayed on page 6 can be made in the PHASE SET META DATA menu under the ALT OTHERS CHECK menu in the MAINTENANCE menu For details refer to the Installation Manual REF SYNC reference signal indicators These indicate the signal selected as the reference signal If there is no reference signal input to the selected connector the STOP button flashes EXT SD Lights when extern SD is selected by the VTR SETUP menu item 006 EXTERNAL REFERENCE select E
199. emains in standby mode for more than eight minutes factory setting standby mode is automatically canceled in order to safeguard the tape PREROLL button Press to run the tape to the preroll point a position factory set to five seconds before the IN point Press this button while holding down the IN OUT AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT button to cue up the tape at the corresponding edit point For details on changing the preroll time see 4 2 6 Setting the Preroll Time PREROLL TIME on page 55 PREVIEW REVIEW button After the edit points are set press this button to preview on the monitor connected to the recorder the effect of the edit before it is performed In this operation the tape runs but no editing is carried out If you press this button after carrying out an edit the results of the edit are played back on the monitor connected to the recorder 2 1 Control Panel REC EDIT recording edit button Press this button while holding down the PLAY button to start recording If you press this button in play mode manual editing begins After setting edit points if you press this button while the AUTO button is lit automatic editing is performed PLAY button Press to start playback Press this button while holding down the REC EDIT button to start recording Pressing this button during recording or manual editing changes the VTR to playback mode STOP button Press this button to stop recording o
200. ems all take the same values 14 327 line 15 328 line 16 329 line 17 330 line 18 331 line 19 332 line 20 333 line 21 334 line 22 335 line 790 4 2 2 DUAL Stream A When playing back 4 2 2 DUAL format tapes recorded with STREAM select Stream B the SRW 1 or SRW 5800 on the SRW 5000 5500 selects whether to play back Stream A or Stream B Stream A Play back the video of Stream A Stream B Play back the video of Stream B 791 DOUBLE SPEED Normal When playing back a double speed tape 1080 4 2 2 PLAYBACK Dual stream 59 94P 1080 4 2 2 50P recorded with the SRW 1 or SRW 5800 on the SRW 5000 5500 selects the playback mode Normal Play back at normal speed In this case the video is played back at 0 5 times normal speed and time code advances at 0 5 times normal speed with respect to playback on the SRW 1 or SRW 5800 It is possible to reassign time code values by time code conversion Dual stream Play back at double speed using the Dual stream playback function of this unit You can select whether to play back frame 1 or frame 2 by using menu item 790 Stream A Frame 1 Stream B Frame 2 Audio is silent during playback of double speed tapes 1 AAROUNDING A method for rounding a 10 bit signal to 8 bits This process suppresses step noise that occurs when lines which differ slightly from the horizontal are displayed A ROUNDING is a trademark of Sony Corporation Menu List xlpueddy 173 Items Re
201. en the playback speed is in the off range 1 2 normal speed and LTC if outside this range LTC Displays LTC off Does not display time data in the second line Menu List xlpueddy 165 Item number Item Setting Function 605 TAPE TIMER 12H Selects whether the CTL counter operates in 12 hour DISPLAY 24H display mode or 24 hour display mode 12H 12 hour display mode 24H 24 hour display mode In the 12 hour display the tens digit of the hours value is dropped 606 TCG MODE select preset Selects the time code to which the internal time code regene generator synchronizes auto preset By an operation on the front panel or by remote control from a device connected to the REMOTE 1 IN 9P connector the initial value of the time code generated by the internal time code generator can be preset regene The internal time code generator is synchronized regene to the time code values read by the internal time code generator auto Operates in regene mode when either assemble or insert mode is selected and operates in preset mode when any other mode is selected 607 TCG REGENE SDI LTC If item 606 is set to regene this selects the source of the SOURCE select SDI VITC synchronization of the time code generated internally ext LTC int LTC When the time code played back from the time int VITC c
202. ency response 20 Hz to 20 kHz 0 5 dB 1 0 dB 0 dB at 1 kHz Dynamic range 96 dB or more at 1 kHz Distortion 0 05 or less at 1 kHz emphasis on reference level Crosstalk 80 dB or less at 1 kHz between any two channels Input connectors HD SDI INPUT A INPUT MONITOR BNC 2 HD SDI 1 485 Gbps conforming to SMPTE 292M BTA S004B B OPTION INPUT MONITOR BNC 2 when the optional HKSR 5003 is installed REF INPUT1 REF INPUT2 OPTION BNC 2 2 loop through HD Trilevel SYNC 0 6 Vp p 75 Q sync negative SD Black burst NTSC 0 286 Vp p 75 Q sync negative PAL 0 3 Vp p 75 Q sync negative Selecting HD or SD in a menu DIGITAL I O AES EBU INPUT BNC 6 CH1 2 to CH11 12 AES EBU format unbalanced AUDIO INPUT CUE SRW 5500 only XLR 3 pin female 1 TIME CODE IN XLR 3 pin female 1 0 5 to 18 Vp p 10 KQ balanced Output connectors HD SDI OUTPUT A BNC 3 MONITOR with superimposed text SDI 1 485 Gbps conforms to SMPTE 292M BTA S004B B OPTION BNC 3 when the optional HKSR 5003 is installed SD SDIOUT BNC 3 MONITOR with superimposed text SD OUT COMPOSITE SUPER 1 0 Vp p 75 Q sync negative SYNC Black burst 0 286 Vp p 75 Q sync negative FORMAT CONV OUT OPTION when the optional HKSR 5001 is installed BNC 2 with superimposed text FC OUT B OPTION when the optional HKSR 5001 is installed BNC 2 with superimposed text HD REF OUT BNC 2 1125 SYNC Tri le
203. epeat steps 3 and 4 to enter more characters To enter a space Press the SPACE button If you enter a wrong character Press the BACK SPACE button to go back Then re enter the character To start the procedure over again Press the CANCEL button to start again To change a character Press the cursor t button to move the cursor to the cut data to be changed Then press the cursor lt or gt button to move the insertion position 6 Press the SAVE EXIT button The screen that was on before the cut data was changed is displayed again To copy Cut data Move the cursor to the line to which the copied data is to be pasted Then press the RCL button The cut data from the line above is copied to the selected line Changing scene data Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the scene data to be changed Then enter the characters using the numeric buttons and buttons Press the numeric buttons while pressing down the SFT button to enter uppercase letters A to J A maximum of three characters can be entered Or do the procedure below to change the data 0 9 9ge990090090000 ao 3900000000000 Q 00000000 2 4 6 1 3 1 Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the scene data to be changed To move the cursor using the numeric buttons Enter the line number using the numeric buttons Then press the CUENUM POINT button The cursor wil
204. ere they exit from the apparatus Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer Use only with the cart stand tripod bracket or table specified by the manufacturer or sold gX with the apparatus When a cart is used use caution when moving the cart apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip over Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped Vii To prevent fire or shock hazard do not expose the unit to rain or moisture To avoid electrical shock do not open the cabinet Refer servicing to qualified personnel only THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED AVERTISSEMENT Afin d viter tout risque d incendie ou d lectrocution ne pas exposer cet appareil a la pluie ou a l humidit Afin d carter tour risque d lectrocution garder le coffret ferm Ne confier entretien de l appareil qu un personnel qualifi CET APPAREIL DOIT TRE RELI LA TERRE Um Feuergefahr und die Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages zu vermeiden darf das Ger t weder Regen noch Feuchtigkeit ausgesetzt werden Um einen elekt
205. ernal time code generator is locked to external time codes or to time codes read by the time code reader Setting the user bit value T Press the TIMER SEL button to select UBIT 2 Enter the desired user bit value in hexadecimal notation using the numeric buttons Press the 0 to 5 buttons while holding down the SFT button to enter the letters A to F 3 Press the F3 TIMER SET button Recording the current time 1 Press the DF NDF button to select DF 2 Press the RUN MODE button to select free 3 Enter the target time with the numeric buttons while verifying the data in the data entry window 4 When the target time arrives press the TIMER SET button The time code generator starts operating from the specified time To pause the current time Press the TIMER HOLD button The time is paused only while the button is held down 4 3 2 Setting the Time Code Reader TCR SEL Press the TCR SEL button to select the time code to be read by the time code reader during playback VITC Reads VITC auto Reads VITC when the playback speed is 1 2 times normal speed or less and LTC when it is greater than 1 2 times normal speed LTC Reads LTC Depending on the time code recorded on a tape VITC or LTC appears on the display Time codes that are read by the time code reader or played back are output from the TIME CODE OUT connector 4 3 3 Setting the Time Code Generator TCG SOURCE MODE
206. eroll time to at least 5 seconds 30 sec 303 POSTROLL TIME 0 sec This sets the tape running time after passing the OUT point postroll time in automatic editing Ea The range is from 0 to 30 seconds in steps of 1 second 30 sec 304 VAR SPEED RANGE 1 to 2 Specifies the variable tape speed range when the variable FOR 1 15 to 2 45 speed playback is executed by a remote control unit SYNCHRONIZATION connected to the REMOTE 1 IN 9P connector 1 to 2 1 to 2 times normal tape speed 1 15 to 2 45 1 15 to 2 45 times normal tape speed When an editing control unit such as BVE 9100 is connected for DT editing select 1 15 to 2 45 305 EDIT FIELD select 1F Selects the start timing for editing when performing tape 2F editing 1F 2F 1F Start editing from field 1 and end on field 2 2F Start editing from field 2 and end on field 1 1F 2F Following received timing commands When the system frequency of this unit is PSF mode the unit always operates with the 1F setting 306 SYNCHRONIZE accurate When this unit is used as a controller for editing control of rough another VTR connected through a 9 pin remote cable this off selects whether or not to carry out phase synchronization of the two VTRs and also the editing accuracy when carrying out synchronization accurate Editing is carried out with an accuracy of 0 frames rough Editing is carried out with an accuracy of 1 frame off Synchronization is not carried
207. esponding channels changes to reflect the settings 3 Press the EXIT button This returns to the AUDIO menu screen You can also make this setting using the VTR SETUP menu item 312 ANALOG AUDIO EDIT PRESET REPLACE See 4 6 8 External Device Digital Audio Edit Preset Command Replace Mode Selection AUDIO EDIT PRESET REPLACE page 103 for information about audio edit preset control of channels 1 to 8 4 6 10 PITCH GROUP Selection PITCH CORRECTION GROUP SELECT When pitch correction is performed during program play and play at a different frequency 23 98 frame 24 frame 23 98 24 frame 25 frame 29 97 frame 30 frame you can set up group relations between audio channels T Press the ALT PITCH GROUP buttons The PITCH CORRECTION GROUP SELECT menu appears together with an image window of channels groups for pitch correction CH1 PITCH CORRECTION GROUP SELECT Gre_A Gre A CH1 CH2 ene Gre B CH3 CH4 Gre_A Gre C CHS CHE CHS Gre D CH7 CH8 Gre E CH9 CH10 Gre_B Gre F CH11 CH12 CH4 OFF Gre_B CHS CH6 CH CH8 EXIT Grp_C Gre_C Gre_D Gre_D 2 Use the F1 CH1 to CH8 buttons and the ALT CH9 to ALT CH12 buttons to group channels Group A to F OFF The image of channels belonging to each group changes to reflect the selections 3 Press the
208. et Preset 5 5 Preset Preset 6 6 Preset Preset 7 7 Preset Preset 8 8 Preset fF Preset EDIT SELECT DIREC COPY EXIT TITLE ALL TION lt 2 7 8 D o 89000 o 0900000090000 O00000 oooo OG 0000000 639 1 4 5 1 Press the SET UP button The SET UP menu appears in the display 2 Press the MEMORY CARD button The MEMCARD menu appears in the display To store the current VTR menu settings Move the cursor P to the CURRENT SETUP position To store all VTR memory banks Press the SELECT ALL button If there are protected items at the destination end it is not possible to select the SELECT ALL button Move the cursor P to the Memory Stick side using the cursor button and use the cursor t or l button to move the cursor to the bank number Memory Stick side where the data is to be saved FORMAT ARD BANK CURRENT SETUP Destination CARD I Ease o FOOTBALL Prese 1 Preset flashing UNDO Preset 2 2 Preset Preset 3 3 Preset Preset 4 4 Preset SHOW Preset 5 5 Preset Seva Preset 6 6 Preset Preset 7 7 Preset SHOW Preset 8 8 Preset CUESET fF Preset EDIT SELECT DIREC COPY EXIT TITLE ALL TION e 4 1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings sBunjes nue p Je deyo 45 The flashi
209. etting Switches and Menus ceecceeseceeeseeeenteeeees 111 5 1 2 Selecting Audio Sigtial singe Ganciouhsagsveeenncest 112 5 1 3 Adjusting the Recording Level ssnnssnseeeseeesseesseeeeee 113 5 1 4 Simultaneously Monitoring Playback of Video and Audio Signals Being Recorded isso du Anduewegs borceewaess 114 5 1 5 Audio Level Meter Display Modes csseeseeeeeeeee 114 5 2 Recording oa tivincaccaticutis cavannrcnnaneaudisacderqucneductedstentsaiwsents 115 5 3 Preparing for Playback sseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 116 5 3 1 Setting Switches and Menus ceecceeeeeeeeeseeeeeteeeees 116 5 3 2 Adjusting the Audio Playback Level eeeeeeeeees 116 5 3 3 Selecting the HD SD Conversion Mode 008 117 5 4 Play Dak amp wicsiieccscccsicceecentavesavensennsenasensadtvacwensweussadawadasins 118 5 4 1 Normal Speed Playback ceeceesseceesteceseeceesneeeeaees 118 5 4 2 Variable Speed Playback eesceesecesssceeeseeeesteeeaes 118 5 4 3 Capstan Override Playback ccceeeceeeseeeesseeeenteeeeees 120 524 DMG Play Back eienen auch eevnand otian a a 120 5 4 5 Playing Back Non audio Data eeeesceeeseeeenteeeeees 121 5 4 6 Performing Program Play ceeceeesceessecesteceeneeenaees 122 Chapter 6 Editing 6 1 Basic Automatic Editing sseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 124 6 1 1 Overview of Automatic Editing ee eeeeeeesteeeeees 124 6 1 2 Setting Sw
210. ettings sBunjes nue p Je deyo 47 suas nu y p sa deuD 48 To change the current VTR menu settings Move the cursor P to CURRENT SETUP To replace all VTR memory bank contents with Memory Stick data Press the SELECT ALL button If there are protected items at the destination end it is not possible to select the SELECT ALL button Press the COPY button A message asking you to confirm the operation appears in the display Press the COPY button while holding down the SFT button The VTR recalls the contents of the Memory Stick After the recalling process is complete the title of the memory bank of the Memory Stick appears under the VTR indication Press the EXIT button The SET UP menu appears again Recalling a cue point list from a Memory Stick Recalling a cue point list from a Memory Stick replaces the current VTR cue point list with the recalled data CARD BANK 0 CURRENT SETUP Preset 1 1 Preset Preset 2 Preset Preset 3 Preset Preset 4 Preset Preset 5 Preset Preset 6 Preset Preset 7 Preset 8 NOUR WN Preset Preset fF Preset EDIT SELECT DIREC COPY EXIT TITLE ALL TION gt 3 Press the SHOW CUESET button The menu for storing cue point lists appears CUE POINT SET 1 CURRENT CUE SET gt Blank fF Blank Blank Blank Blank Blank
211. for EMC and product safety is Sony Deutschland GmbH Hedelfinger Strasse 61 70327 Stuttgart Germany For any service or guarantee matters please refer to the addresses given in separate service or guarantee documents This apparatus shall not be used in the residential area For the customers in Europe Australia and New Zealand WARNING This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Pour les clients en Europe Le fabricant de ce produit est Sony Corporation 1 7 1 Konan Minato ku Tokyo Japon Le repr sentant autoris pour EMC et la s curit des produits est Sony Deutschland GmbH Hedelfinger Strasse 61 70327 Stuttgart Allemagne Pour toute question concernant le service ou la garantie veuillez consulter les adresses indiqu es dans les documents de service ou de garantie s par s Ne pas utiliser cet appareil dans une zone r sidentielle Pour les clients en Europe Australie et Nouvelle Z lande AVERTISSEMENT Il s agit d un produit de Classe A Dans un environnement domestique cet appareil peut provoquer des interf rences radio dans ce cas l utilisateur peut tre amen prendre des mesures appropri es Fur Kunden in Europa Der Hersteller dieses Produkts ist Sony Corporation 1 7 1 Konan Minato ku Tokyo Japan Der autorisierte Repr sentant fiir EMV und Produktsicherheit ist Sony
212. g on the combination of the Memory Stick and Memory Stick compliant product you use 3 4 Using a Memory Stick Before using a Memory Stick Terminal Write protect tab LOCK oN Labeling position e When you set the Memory Stick erasure prevention switch to LOCK data cannot be recorded edited or erased e Data may be damaged if You remove the Memory Stick or turn off the unit while it is reading or writing data You use the Memory Stick in a location subject to the effects of static electricity or electric noise e We recommend that you make a backup copy of important data that you record on the Memory Stick e Do not attach anything other than the supplied label to the Memory Stick labeling position Attach the label so that it does not stick out beyond the labeling position Carry and store the Memory Stick in its case Do not touch the connector of the Memory Stick with anything including your finger or metallic objects Do not strike bend or drop the Memory Stick Do not disassemble or modify the Memory Stick Do not allow the Memory Stick to get wet Do not use or store the Memory Stick in a location that is Extremely hot such as in a car parked in the sun Under direct sunlight Very humid or subject to corrosive substances When the Memory Stick access
213. ge 131 To stop previewing Press the STOP button The tape stops immediately To rewind the tape to the preroll point Press the PREROLL button To rewind the tape to the edit point Press the PREROLL button together with the button corresponding to the edit point Monitoring signals during previewing During previewing you can monitor the following video and audio signals on a monitor connected to the recorder VTR e Between preroll and IN points Playback signal of the recorder VTR can be monitored e Between IN and OUT points Playback signal of the player VTR can be monitored in E E mode e Between OUT and post roll points Playback signal of the recorder VTR can be monitored This may be illustrated as shown below IN point OUT point v v PB EE PB player VTR recorder VTR recorder VTR 6 1 9 Modifying Edit Points If an edit point is incorrectly set for example if an OUT point is located before an IN point or the length of an edit section is different for the recorder and player VTRs the time data for the incorrectly set edit point flash indicating that the VTR cannot perform editing or previewing In this case delete the edit point then set a new one correctly You can also move an edit point position in one frame units Deleting edit points ooooooooooooa 9999900909900093 T Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to
214. h the cleaning cassette carefully as improper usage can damage the heads If you insert the cleaning cassette it is automatically ejected after a head cleaning operation which lasts for 10 seconds Do not run the cleaning tape more than 6 times in succession to avoid damaging the heads Please refer to the Maintenance Manual Volume I on cleaning the video and audio heads Moisture Condensation If you suddenly move the VTR from a cold location to a warm one or use the VTR in a very humid place moisture in the air can form on the head drum or tape guide This is called moisture condensation If you play a tape under these conditions the tape may adhere to the drum where moisture has collected and become damaged If moisture condenses on the head drum while you are operating the VTR the error message ERROR 10 appears in the time data display section PB EE ERROR 10 RECINH DEW DETECTED off ASSEM BLE off INS TC off Total 1 message INS INS INS INS INS INS VIDEO A CH1 A CH2 A CH3 A CH4 CUE off off off off off off When this error message appears the VTR enters the protection mode and certain operations become inoperable Once the moisture has evaporated the error message disappears and the VTR becomes normal Please refer to the Maintenance Manual Volume I on protection mode If ERROR 10 appears immediately af
215. haracter Press the cursor t button to move the cursor to the scene data to be changed Then press the cursor or button to move the insertion position 6 Press the SAVE EXIT button The screen that was on before the scene data was entered is displayed again To copy Scn data Move the cursor to the line to which the copied data is to be pasted Then press the RCL button The scene data from the line above is copied to the selected line Changing Comment data To display comment data press the button several times CUE REC DATE 2003 02 251 SCAN TITLEL No Out EOS 01 01 24 15 1 Rast100 Tk Cut Scn ENTRY POINT INOUT COMMNT EDIT 0 00 14 17 02 gt inn a CHANGE DATA DEL MARK PRO TAPE CUENUM WRITE POINT TECT INFO POINT EXIT To change Comment data D0 9 9g99009000000 2 2000000000000 OC D O O oO O O Oo 2 46 1 Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the comment to be changed To move the cursor using the numeric buttons Enter the line number using the numeric buttons Then press the CUENUM POINT button The cursor will move to the line specified by the numeric buttons 2 Press the COMMNT EDIT button 4 4 CUE Menu sBunjes nue p se deyo 89 suas nu y p saideuD 90 REC 2 081 TITLE COMMENT EDIT t100 No
216. he time code generator Field mark of the VITC data Operation mode The example above shows the factory set contents of data By changing the setting of the VTR SETUP menu item 626 DISPLAY INFORMATION select different types of information can also be displayed on the second line Types of time data PD CHARA CHARA CHARA VITC VITC CHARA SUPER H POS U POS POS 1 POS 2 Symbol Meaning CTL CTL counter data TCR LTC reader time code data UBR LTC reader user bit data TCR VITC reader time code data 4 3 TC Menu sBulyjes nuey p se deyp I 67 suas nu y p 13 dey9 68 Symbol Meaning UBR VITC reader user bit data TCG Time code data from the time code generator UBG User bit data from the time code generator DUR The duration between any two of the four edit points IN OUT AUDIO IN and AUDIO OUT When time data or user bits are not read correctly a will be displayed in this block so that the symbols become T R U R T R UFR etc Drop frame mark of the time code reader amp e drop frame mode non drop frame mode Drop frame mark of the time code generator e drop frame mode non drop frame mode Field mark of the VITC data gt blank space fields 1 and 3 gt fields 2 and 4 Operation mode The contents are divided in
217. he Commission of the European Community Compliance with this directive implies conformity to the following European standards e EN55103 1 Electromagnetic Interference Emission e EN55103 2 Electromagnetic Susceptibility mmunity This product is intended for use in the following Electromagnetic Environment E4 controlled EMC environment ex TV studio Pour les clients en Europe Ce produit portant la marque CE est conforme a la Directive sur la compatibilit lectromagn tique EMC mise par la Commission de la Communaut europ enne La conformit cette directive implique la conformit aux normes europ ennes suivantes e EN55103 1 Interf rences lectromagn tiques mission e EN55103 2 Sensibilit lectromagn tique immunit Ce produit est pr vu pour tre utilis dans l environnement lectromagn tique suivant E4 environnement EMC contr l ex studio de t l vision Fur Kunden in Europa Dieses Produkt besitzt die CE Kennzeichnung und erf llt die EMV Richtlinie der EG Kommission Angewandte Normen e EN55103 1 Elektromagnetische Vertr glichkeit St6raussendung e EN55103 2 Elektromagnetische Vertr glichkeit St rfestigkeit Fiir die folgende elektromagnetische Umgebung E4 kontrollierter EMV Bereich z B Fernsehstudio For the customers in Europe The manufacturer of this product is Sony Corporation 1 7 1 Konan Minato ku Tokyo Japan The Authorized Representative
218. he basic VTR operations and editing operations TC button Press this to go to the TC time code menu screen In the time code menu you can switch LTC 2 1 Control Panel seq Jo suooUNn pue suoneooq z saideyo 19 Sed Jo suogouny pue suoljeo07 z seideyD 20 VITC switch DF NDF set the time code to be displayed on an external monitor and so on VIDEO button Press this to go to the VIDEO menu screen Use it to make video related settings AUDIO button Press this to go to the AUDIO menu screen Use it to make audio related settings CUE button Press this to go to the CUE menu screen The cue menu provides 10 pages to set cue points You can set up to 10 cue points per page You can also make settings for the Tele File memory label system PF1 button Press this to go to the PF1 personal function 1 menu screen You can register frequently used items in the PF1 menu The factory default setting is blank PF2 button Press this to go to the PF2 personal function 2 menu screen You can register frequently used items in the PF2 menu The factory default setting is blank SET UP button Press this to go to the SET UP menu screen The setup menu provides functions to save menu settings in VTR banks or save to a Memory Stick registration operations in the PF buttons VTR SETUP menu settings and so on For details of menus see Chapter 4 Menu Settings on page 40 Color display This comprises princi
219. he cursor button A window for changing the setting value appears Menu number Category Nos 001 to Items related to VTR operations Nos 101 to Items related to operation panels Nos 201 to Items related to remote interface Nos 301 to Items related to editing Nos 401 to Items related to prerolling Nos 501 to Items related to recording protection Nos 601 to Items related to the time code Nos 701 to Items related to the video control Nos 801 to Items related to the audio control Nos 901 to Items related to digital process Nos A01 to Items related to pulldown control Nos T01 to Other To change the menu display Press any of the following buttons to change the menu display CATEGORY button Display the menus by category NAME button Display all menus in alphabetical order SCROLL button Display all menus in numerical order Changing settings CATEI UTR Cr UTR CONTROL 001 P01 PRE READ PANEL 002 R REMO1 003 R on EDITF 005 5 S x PAER 006 E TP PF 007 S TIME 008 L VIDEI 009 L VIDE 017 P AUDIC 018 A oo CHANGE SAVE DATA EXIT opoooooooo oboooooooo ooa oo T Press one of the CATEGORY NAME and SCROLL buttons This changes the menu display 4 7 SET UP Menu With the CHANGE DATA button or the cursor T
220. he line and renumbers the lines following the deleted line To display other information To display other information press the TAPE INFO button This opens a window to display the information To close the window Press the TAPE INFO button To change the ID ADMIN data T Press the ALT ATTRIB EDIT buttons 2 With the cursor t or l button select ID or ADMIN then press the ENTRY button 3 With the cursor 4 or gt button select the character to be entered 4 Press the SET LETTER button or cursor center button The selected character is entered 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the data To enter a space Press the SPACE button If you make an error in entry Press the BACK SPACE button then carry out entry Returning to the original settings Press the CANCEL button then carry out entry To change a character during the operation Press the cursor t button then move the cursor to the ID or ADMIN frame With the cursor lt or button change the character insertion position When not all characters can be shown within the ID or ADMIN frame On the left or right of the comment frame lt l or I gt appears 6 Press the SAVE EXIT button This returns to the original screen HDCAM format Tele File menu Accessing the Tele File menu screen There are two methods of accessing the Tele File menu screen as follows e In the CUE menu screen press the Tele File b
221. he playback video and audio signals are output PB MU The playback video signal is output The audio output is muted 018 AUTO EJECT off Selects the condition under which the cassette is LEVEL1 LEVEL1 automatically ejected after being played back for a few HDCAM SR LEVEL2 seconds When the cassette is ejected in accordance with this setting the warning message 17 PB FREQUENCY IS UNSUITABLE appears in the display off The cassette is not ejected LEVEL1 When a tape without video playback compatibility is played back the cassette is automatically ejected There is no playback compatibility between 4 2 2 format 4 4 4 format and 720P format LEVEL2 The cassette is ejected when the field frequency PsF mode or interlace mode of the tape differs from that of the VTR Menu List Item number 019 Item AUTO EJECT LEVEL2 HDCAM Setting off LEVEL1 LEVEL2 LEVEL3 Function Selects the tape conditions under which a cassette is automatically ejected in playback after approx 3 seconds playback When the cassette is automatically ejected a warning off The cassette is not ejected LEVEL1 When a tape without audio playback compatibility is played back the cassette is automatically ejected There is no playback compatibility between playback frame rates of 24 25 fps and 30 fps There is compatibility for PsF interlacing or 0 1 discrepancy LEVEL2 Excluding a tape with compatibility for a
222. he speed variation end point normal speed playback resumes To stop the tape during DMC playback Press the STOP button To exit DMC playback mode Press the ALT DMC buttons in the HOME menu to turn off the DMC indicator During DMC playback the tape runs as shown in the diagram below Preroll time x Speed variation initial speed IN point end point Vv _ _V M Tape runs at initial speed E sco cfseosse ese eo sesS Playback at the memorized speeds Playback at normal speed 5 4 5 Playing Back Non audio Data Non audio data recorded on a tape is detected automatically and played back 5 4 Playback yoeghe q Bulpiooey G saydeyo 121 yoeghe q Bulpiooay g Jajdeyo 122 When non audio data is being played back e Below the input display in the audio level meter section the DATA mark lights in white e For the audio level meters all regions light e The analog audio outputs main line monitor headphones are muted e The audio output level can be adjusted during non audio data playback but output non audio data is not affected 5 4 6 Performing Program Play Overview When using HDCAM SR tapes you can play them over the range 5 0 of normal speed This is called program play During program play you can correct the pitch of audio signals The program play function is available only when all of the following conditions are met e Combination of S
223. hose of the original In the case of repeated dubbings this shifting of pixels produces an accumulation of calculation errors during the compression expansion process this may result in an increase in low level noise within the signal The effect edit mode minimizes the production of this noise Note however that a slight loss in picture resolution may be observed in this mode Emphasis Emphasizing the high frequencies of a signal before processing pre emphasis and de emphasizing those high frequencies before output de emphasis This reduces deterioration of the signal to noise ratio in the high frequency range Glossary xlpueddy 149 External synchronization A method to maintain color subcarrier phase continuity by performing editing in two frame units in order to achieve stable video without horizontal fluctuation at the edit points For editing a recorder VTR and a player VTR or source VTR are used and external synchronization is commonly used to ensure that the operation timing control signals and time reference signals are synchronized Insert editing An edit mode for inserting new scenes into the middle of previously recorded scenes CTL signals previously recorded on the tape are used Consequently this mode cannot be used for blank tapes This mode assumes that CTL signals have somehow be recorded to the tape already See also Assemble editing Longitudinal time code See LTC LTC A
224. ignal is obtained from the HD SDI INPUT A B connectors auto During recording and in the edit preset state the reference signal is obtained from the HD SDI INPUT A B connectors When item 001 is not set to off the reference signal is always external In all other cases the servo operates using the signal selected in item 006 as the reference signal If the signal selected in item 006 is not present the servo operates using an internal reference signal external The servo reference signal is always external 006 EXTERNAL REFERENCE select extrn HD extrn SD When item 005 is set to external this selects the signal used as reference by this unit extrn HD The signal input to the REF INPUT 1 connector is used as the tri level HD reference signal for playback and audio signal recording extrn SD The signal input to the REF INPUT 1 connector is used as the SD reference signal for playback and audio signal recording 007 SYNC PLAY off on This is the mode for automatic correction at the start of playback In sync play mode for example when playing back the VTR from a preroll point the IN point is reached after exactly the preroll time has elapsed off Selects normal playback mode on Activates the sync play function for playback In sync play mode the time after the tape transport starts until the video and sound appear is longer than in the normal playback mode
225. indicator is lit or flashing Data is being read from or written to the Memory Stick at this time Do not shake the product or subject it to shock Do not turn off the power to the product or remove the Memory Stick Doing so may damage the data Precautions e To prevent data loss make backups of data frequently In no event will Sony be liable for any loss of data e Unauthorized recording may be contrary to the provisions of copyright law When you use a Memory Stick that has been pre recorded be sure that the material has been recorded in accordance with copyright and other applicable laws e The Memory Stick application software may be modified or changed by Sony without prior notice e Memory Stick and are trademarks of Sony Corporation e Memory Stick PRO and Memory Stick PRO are trademarks of Sony Corporation e Memory Stick PRO Duo and Memory Stick PRO Duo are trademarks of Sony Corporation The MSAC PC4 Memory Stick PC Card Adaptor is not supplied with the following units SRW 5000 Serial number 12203 and higher SRW 5500 Serial number 12810 and higher Using a Memory Stick with these units requires the MSAC PC4 or equivalent Memory Stick PC card adaptors are not required for the following units SRW 5000 Serial number 12524 and higher SRW 5500 Serial number 14578 and higher 1 Excluding SRW 5000 serial numbers 90000 to 99999 and SRW 5500
226. ing Cassettes 3 3 2 Inserting and Ejecting Cassettes Always turn on the VTR before inserting or ejecting cassettes Inserting a cassette L size cassette T Tur the POWER switch to ON 2 Before inserting a cassette check the following points e There is no slack in the tape e An error message does not appear in the menu display e The window of the cassette is facing up If there is any slack in the tape see Removing slack in the tape on page 36 When inserting an S size cassette make sure it is aligned with the marks on the cassette insertion slot The cassette is loaded automatically and the tape is wound around the drum Removing slack in the tape Press one of the reels in slightly then carefully rotate it in the direction of the arrow until it stops Preventing double cassette inserting When a cassette is loaded an orange lock out bar appears in the cassette insertion slot to prevent users from attempting to load another cassette Ejecting the cassette Press the EJECT button The tape is unthreaded and the cassette is automatically ejected This operation takes a few seconds To cancel ejecting a cassette Press any operation button before the cassette is completely ejected The cassette is loaded again and the operation corresponding to the button you pressed starts 3 3 3 Preventing Accidental Erasure To preve
227. ing with the MULTI CONTROL knob ALT F2 button Y D1 Pressing these buttons make them active and the cursor t and l buttons increase or decrease the value by 0 1 You can also change the setting with the MULTI CONTROL knob ALT button B Y D1 Pressing these buttons make them active and the cursor t and l buttons increase or decrease the value by 0 1 You can also change the setting with the MULTI CONTROL knob ALT F4 button R Y D1 Pressing these buttons make them active and the cursor t and buttons increase or decrease the value by 0 1 You can also change the setting with the MULTI CONTROL knob ALT F5 button V GAIN ALL Pressing these button makes it active and the cursor t and l buttons increase or decrease the value by 0 1 You can also change the setting with the MULTI CONTROL knob ALT button CRM GA ALL Pressing these button makes it active and the cursor t and l buttons increase or decrease the value by 0 1 You can also change the setting with the MULTI CONTROL knob ALT button CRM PH ALL Pressing these button makes it active and the cursor t and l buttons increase or decrease the value by 1 You can also change the setting with the MULTI CONTROL knob ALT button BLK LV ALL Pressing these button makes it active and the cursor t and l buttons change the setting with the MULTI CONTROL knob ALT F9 button SETUP CST Pressing these buttons make them active and the cursor t and l buttons in
228. input data IN point OUT point The time sequence of the IN The datais The data is OUT point data is correct unchanged changed The time sequence of the IN The datais The data is OUT point data is not correct unchanged unchanged The IN point has not been The datais The data is input unchanged changed Changing Tk data Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the take data to be changed Then use the numeric buttons to change the value Note that values from 0 to 255 can be entered Or move the cursor to the take data and press the CHANGE DATA button or the button repeatedly to increase the value in increments of 1 Press the button repeatedly to decrease the value in increments of 1 Note that the value cannot go below 0 Copying data Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the destination Mrk or Tk data and press the RCL button The Tk data from the line above is copied to the selected line Changing Cut data Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the cut data to be changed and then enter the new data using the numeric buttons and buttons Pressing the button enters the tilde Press the numeric buttons while pressing down the SFT button to enter uppercase letters A to J Note that a maximum of four characters can be entered Or do the procedure below to change the data 4 4 CUE Menu sBuljes nue p seideyo 87 suas nu y p sajdeuD 88
229. io output level of the PHONES jack Rotate the PHONES level control on the upper control panel Selecting non audio data as the audio input signal Do the procedure below to select non audio data such as a Dolby E or Dolby Digital AC 3 signal as the audio input signal Use the VTR SETUP menu item 831 NON AUDIO SELECT to select the audio input signal 1 Dolby is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories 2 AC 3 is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories The following processes are performed for the selected channels For the input signal the setting of the VTR SETUP menu item 831 NON AUDIO SELECT takes precedence over that of the menu item 830 AUDIO INPUT SELECT For the audio level meters the whole region lights Also below the input signal display the word DATA appears in white The analog audio outputs main line monitor headphones are muted The audio recording level adjustment itself is possible for the channel for which NON AUDIO is selected but the setting does not affect the recording or playback of DATA Non audio input channels are selected in stereo pairs 5 1 3 Adjusting the Recording Level Adjusting the Recording Level Press the REC LEVEL button at the upper left of the control panel to enter the REC LEVEL adjustment mode A vertical red line appears at the left of the audio level meter for each channel indicating the REC LEVEL adjustment mode The adjustment cannot b
230. io playback level 116 output video signal 94 Advanced Automatic Editing 135 ALT button 20 Assemble mode 124 AUDIO IN OUT buttons 22 AUDIO Menu 99 AUDIO OUTPUT CH1 to CH4 connectors 27 AUTO button 21 Automatic edit modes 124 Automatic editing 124 animation editing 136 confirming edit points 129 cuing up and prerolling 130 DMC editing 135 Modifying edit points 131 Non audio data 129 Overview 124 Preread editing 136 Previewing 130 Selecting the edit mode 126 Setting edit points 126 Setting switches and menus 125 Steps 124 Basic Automatic Editing 124 C Capstan override playback 120 Cassettes handling cassettes 36 inserting and ejecting cassettes 36 preventing accidental erasure 37 recommended cassettes 36 Changing menu settings 40 preroll time 130 CHANNEL CONDITION indicators 18 CLR button 21 Color display 20 Confirming edit points 129 Connecting external equipment 31 cascade connection 33 making HD digital connections 31 Index making NTSC PAL Digital Connections 32 Connector panel 26 ANALOG I O section 27 DIGITAL I O section 29 power supply 30 remote input output section 30 Control panel 17 lower control panel Display section 22 lower control panel Editing control section 21 lower control panel Menu control section 19 lower control panel Search control section 24 lower control panel System Set Up Panel 25 lower control panel Tape transport control secti
231. is pressed during VTR SETUP menu operations set default When a setting value is being selected selects the default value move window Move between the item window and the window for changing values Items Relating to Remote Interface Nos 201 to Item number 201 Item REMOTE 9 PIN Setting off on Function When this is set to on this unit is controlled from the device connected to the REMOTE 1 IN 9P or REMOTE 1 O 9P connectors When this unit is controlled by a device connected to the REMOTE 1 IN 9P or REMOTE 2 PARALLEL I O 50P connector the editing control buttons and all of the tape transport buttons except STOP and EJECT are disabled It is also possible to make a setting so that all of the buttons are disabled For details see item 008 202 REMOTE 50 PIN off on When this is set to on this unit is controlled from the device connected to the REMOTE 2 PARALLEL O 50P connector Menu List Item number 203 Item PARALLEL RUNNING Setting disable enable Function Selects whether two or more VTRs can be operated synchronized disable Synchronized operation is not carried out enable Synchronized operation is enabled For synchronized operation to be possible this item must be set to enable on all of the connected VTRs 204 VIDEO REMOTE CONTROL SELECT Sub item Make setti
232. is selected on the VTR this setting select PAL specifies the lines in which the VITC signal is inserted 19 332 line It can be inserted in any lines from 9 322 to 22 335 22 335 line Items 616 and 617 allow VITC to be inserted in two lines 617 VITC POSITION 2 9 322 line When 25PsF 50i mode is selected on the VTR this setting select PAL specifies the lines in which the VITC signal is inserted 21 334 line It can be inserted in any lines from 9 322 to 22 335 22 335 line Items 616 and 617 allow VITC to be inserted in two lines 618 LTC OUTPUT input Selects the LTC output phase PHASE select auto input Same phase as input video output auto When editing same phase as input video otherwise playback recording etc same phase as output video output Same phase as output video 619 EXT LTC MODE direct Selects the recording mode when the internal time code regene generator is set to regenerate the input from the TIME CODE IN connector menu item 607 is set to ext LTC and menu item 606 is set to regene direct Records the time code input from the TIME CODE IN connector unaltered on the tape regene Regenerates the time code input from the TIME CODE IN connector with the internal time code generator 620 SUPERIMPOSED off Specifies whether or not to superimpose time data and CHARACTER on operating status information on the signal output from the MONITOR connector of SD SDI OUT the SD OUT COMPOSITE connector and
233. istering and Storing Menu Settings m Memory Stick insertion slot To eject the Memory Stick Raise up the lower control panel and press the button on the right side of the insertion slot For details of opening and closing the control panel refer to the Maintenance Manual e When inserting a Memory Stick press it firmly in as far as it will go The stick recognition status is shown on the MEMCARD menu screen If not inserted properly reinsert it e While data is being read from or written to the Memory Stick the status appears on the screen During these operations do not remove the Memory Stick e When no directory is found on the inserted Memory Stick for storing the settings of the SRW 5000 5500 SRW5000 the message CONFIRMATION OF CREATING DIR appears in the MEMCARD menu display Press the FORMAT CARD button while holding down the SFT button to create a directory To cancel creating a directory press the CLR button Formatting a Memory Stick The Memory Stick must be formatted before you can use it o 682 oo0o 1 2 Insert the Memory Stick 2 Press the SET UP button The SET UP menu appears in the display 3 Press the MEMORY CARD button The MEMCARD menu appears in the display FORMAT CARD BANK 0 CURRENT SETUP PARDO Preset 1 1 Preset UNDO Preset
234. itches and Menus cecceeeseeeesseceeeteeeeees 125 6 1 3 Selecting the Edit Mode w5 cccidescacccetsvecseesvctaeccesaneesieess 126 6 1 4 Setting Edit Points seseseeeseeeesseessseesseesseeseeeesseessessee 126 6 1 5 Editing Non audio Data eee eeescesteeeenteeeenaeeesaees 129 6 1 6 Confirming Edit Points 0 0 0 0 ee eeeeeeeceeeeeceeeneeeenneeeeaes 129 6 1 7 Cuing Up and Prerolling eee eeeeeeesteeeeneeeneeenaees 130 6 1 8 PLS VIC Wingin dese aca snncesanamee ccna a hansones na 130 6 1 9 Modifying Edit Points eee ee eceeeeeneeeceteeeesteeeeneeeeaes 131 6 1 10 Performing Automatic Editing 133 6 2 Advanced Automatic Eiting ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 135 6 2 LDMC Editing eneinio 135 6 2 2 Animation Editing seesseesseeeesseeesseessersseresseeessressessee 136 6 2 3 Preread Editing nanunua aaceeetes 136 6 3 Manual Editing cccsecisccsnsenisnseseascesetetenetenciesnsestenrieerseenen 138 Table of Contets 9 10 Appendix Table of Contets Maint nan G ai cicccessacesiscecccttaceav cones stesncecbueantaveducnedtenetecueeis 139 HAC AG CLE ANI Fasc ss taza scaacaucebictus codastavid a E ENE 139 Moisture Condensation is caiccudnuchntwndukienadais 139 Specifications siisii ienaiiino aiaiai iiaia 140 Error Messages Warning Messages Condition MESSAGCS sei scsstndatrnstte ie senecetnsiincinmssveaudsauenduassnsssesineucitues 143 Error MICS SAB CS 5 os oa 5c conc anciccenedadesocadcestees A A
235. justs the up converter image enhancer UC Adjusts the gradient of the correction curve preset 0 0 120 Menu List 1 87 Item number Item Setting Function 961 BACKGROUND BACKGROUND COLOR Sets the background color for blank areas in up conversion COLOR UC 0 to FFH BACKGROUND COLOR Sets the color Sub items 0 to 80 to FFH BG COLOR Selects TABLE GRAY BLUE BLACK 0 to 80 to FFH Y R Y B Y Valid only when BG COLOR is set to TABLE BG COLOR Adjustable within the range from 0 to FFH Y TABLE R Y TABLE B Y TABLE 980 ALPHA CHANNEL white For 4 4 4 DUAL LINK output sets the output level of the LEVEL black ALPHA CHANNEL of LINK B output white Output white level black Output black level Stop freeze operation MODE Before STILL dynamic tracking on MODE After STOP TENSION OFF STDBY OFF DT picture DT picture DT picture CAPSTAN drive includes shuttling up to X10 normal tape speed non DT picture non DT picture non DT picture Reel drive includes shuttling over X10 normal tape speed non DT picture non DT picture non DT picture e A DT picture is a frozen picture in noiseless DT playback mode The picture freezes in frame mode when the dynamic tracking is performing a frame operation It freezes in field mode when dynamic tracking is not performing a frame operation e A non DT picture
236. l PHONES jack Cassette compartment POWER switch Pressing on the P side of this switch powers the unit and lights up the information display see page 22 and color display see page 19 To turn the unit off press on the O side of the switch ERROR indicator This lights when a serious problem occurs such as an operational malfunction or system internal error You can check the details on the lower control panel For details see Error Messages Warning Messages Condition Messages on page 143 WARNING indicator This flashes when there is a fault in the unit You can check the details on the lower control panel For details see Error Messages Warning Messages Condition Messages on page 143 EJECT button Pressing this button automatically ejects the cassette after several seconds Format indicators Digital BETACAM HDCAM HDCAM SR These show the format of the cassette loaded into the unit REMOTE buttons Press one of the following buttons to select how the VTR is controlled 2 1 Control Panel ETHERNET This button lights when pressed enabling access from the network connected to the ETHERNET connector on this unit 1 9P This button lights when pressed enabling this unit to be controlled from a device connected to the REMOTE 1 IN 9P connector or REMOTE 1 I O 9P connector 2 50P This button lights when pressed enabling this unit to be controlled
237. l panel once more The vertical blue line at the right of the audio level meter for each channel disappears or turns white To output at the preset level for a level recorded at reference 0 dB outputting at 4 dBm In the PB LEVEL adjustment mode make the channel active then press the MULTI CONTROL knob The setting becomes the preset value Press once more to return to the immediately previous value Pressing once more again to return to the preset value You can also return to the preset value with the cursor center button When you exit the PB LEVEL adjustment mode a vertical white line on the right of the audio level meter is not displayed For details on changing the factory set reference output level refer to the Installation Manual To adjust the audio playback level manually In the PB LEVEL adjustment mode make the channel active then adjust to the desired volume with the MULTI CONTROL knob or cursor t and l buttons When you exit the PB LEVEL adjustment mode the vertical white line on the right of the audio level meter and a horizontal white line indicating the setting are displayed indicating that the playback level is subject to manual adjustment PB LEVEL adjustment You can also carry out the playing level adjustment using the VTR SETUP menu item 833 AUDIO PB LEVEL 5 3 3 Selecting the HD SD Conversion Mode Select the conversion mode
238. l move to the line specified by the numeric buttons 2 Press the F4 CHANGE DATA button REC 2 081 TITLE SCENE No EDIT t100 ECDEFGHI JKLMNOPARSTUVUXYZ abcdefghjiklmnoparstuvwxyz 012345678911 lt gt 0 4 H 8 _ HD1D2CAM SPACE BACK SET CANCEL SAVE SPACE LETTER EXIT 3 Press the cursor 4 or button to select a character REC 2 081 TITLE SCENE No EDIT t100 gt 1 ABICDEFGHI JKLMNOPORSTUUUXYZ abcdefghjiklmnorarstuvuxyz 012345678911 lt gt t k 12551 H 8 _ HD1D2CAM SPACE BACK SET SAVE SPACE LETTER EXIT 4 Press the SET LETTER button or the cursor center button The selected character is entered REC 2 081 TITLE SCENE No EDIT t100 No E gt 1 ABICDEFGHI JKLMNOPORSTUUUXYZ abcdefghjiklmnoparstuvwxyz 01234567891 lt gt 0 4 i H 8 _ HD1ID2CAM SPACE BACK SET SAVE SPACE LETTER EXIT 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter more characters To enter a space Press the SPACE button If you enter a wrong character Press the BACK SPACE button to go back Then re enter the character To start the procedure over again Press the CANCEL button to start again To change a c
239. l to down converted SD output off Do not add 16 9 Squeeze identification signal to down converted SD output 930 DOWNCONVERTER EDGE CROP Selects the down converter mode MODE DC LETTER BOX EDGE CROP Selects edge crop mode SQUEEZE LETTER BOx Selects letter box mode SQUEEZE Selects squeeze mode 931 LETTER BOX 16 9 When item 930 is set to LETTER BOX this setting MODE DC 14 9 specifies the aspect ratio of the HD SD converter output 13 9 16 9 The aspect ratio of the HD SD converter output is 16 9 14 9 The aspect ratio of the HD SD converter output is 14 9 13 9 The aspect ratio of the HD SD converter output is 13 9 932 H CROP 120 When item 930 is set to EDGE CROP adjusts the down POSITION converted output H crop horizontal direction of portion cut DC 0 out in edge crop mode When item 930 is set to LETTER preset 0 BOX and item 931 is set to 14 9 or 13 9 adjusts the 120 downconverted output in the horizontal direction 934 CROSS COLOR 0 Cross color adjustment DC preset 8 3 15 935 DETAIL GAIN DC O Adjustment of the down converter image enhancer preset 64 adjusting the sharpness of enhanced contours 64 0 dB 127 936 LIMITER DC 0 Adjustment of the down converter image enhancer preset 32 adjusting the maximum detail level to be added to enhance 32 the previous signal 63 Menu List xipueddy 185
240. lating to the Audio Control Nos 807 to Item number 807 Item Setting AUDIO MONITOR L select Sub items A MON CH1 disable enable A MON CH2 disable enable A MON CH3 disable enable A MON CH4 disable enable A MON CH5 disable enable A MON CH6 disable enable A MON CH7 disable enable A MON CH8 disable enable A MON CH9 disable enable A MON CH10 disable enable A MON CH11 disable enable A MON CH12 disable enable Function Selects the audio channel output from the MONITOR OUTPUT L connector xlpueddy 174 Menu List Item number Item Setting Function 808 AUDIO MONITOR R Selects the audio channel output from the MONITOR select OUTPUT R connector Sub items A MON CH1 disable enable A MON CH2 disable enable A MON CH3 disable enable A MON CH4 disable enable A MON CH5 disable enable A MON CH6 disable enable A MON CH7 disable enable A MON CH8 disable enable A MON CH9 disable enable A MON CH10 disable enable A MON CH11 disable enable A MON CH12 disable enable 809 DIGITAL JOG on Switches digital jog sound on or off SOUND off off Digital jog sound is off In this case the audio from the digital channels is output even in STILL mode without speed correction processing on Digital jog sound is on
241. lect rec time data advances from a set value only during recording When you select free time code advances in real time after the initial value has been set e During recording VITC is always written to the AUX data area of the video signal eo ooaooooooooooo o 399909090990909099 Q O O oO oO O oO Q Press the TIMER SEL button to select the TC time code to be set Enter the new setting in the data entry window with the numeric buttons For example to enter 01 HOOM30SO00F press 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 The leading 0 is not required When the entered value is less than eight digits the leading digit s is are set to 0 when you press the SET button 4 3TC Menu 61 sBunjes nue p Je deyo suas nu y p sa deuD 62 Data entry window TIMER PLAY LOCK SEL TC net 00 00 00 00 RESET AUN lessesis GOT vesa a IN OUT TIMER SET SET 01 30 00 00 TIMER Ta oO STILL HDCAM SR TE REGENE TCG RUN DF NDF TC2 l SEL SOURCE MODE MODE SEL REMAIN 01HO6M VITC Prst rec DF TC lt 4 To cancel entered values Press the CLR button 3 Press the SET UP button to set the entered value If you pressed the or button then entered a value the result of calculation appears in the display SET is displayed
242. lllpy 9 seideyo 129 e Between AUDIO IN and AUDIO OUT points Durations are calculated as follows If both IN and OUT points are set the duration is the time between the points e If one of the edit points is not set the duration is set to 00 00 00 1 Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to select the VTR for which you want to confirm a duration The button lights up 2 Hold down any two IN OUT AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT buttons The duration between the points corresponding to the two buttons is displayed The value can be negative PLAY LOCK Duration between two edit points TCR JREGENE TCG RUN DF NDF TC2 SEL SOURCE MODE MODE SEL VITC int Prst rec df unpa 9 13 dey9 130 6 1 7 Cuing Up and Prerolling You can preroll the tape to a point prior to the edit start point or cue up the tape to any edit point Follow the procedure below to cue up or preroll the tape Q Q Q Q o o a a o Q m T Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to select the VTR which you want to operate The button lights up 2 Tocue up the tape to an edit point 6 1 Basic Automatic Editing Press one of the IN OUT AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT button while holding down the PREROLL button The tape moves to the edit point corresponding to the button then stops To preroll the tape Press the PREROLL button The
243. ly Pre read operation for video only 002 REC INHIBIT select off Selects the record inhibit mode all crash REC video off Recording is enabled The REC INHIBIT indicator CTL audio CTL does not light casst all crash REC video CTL audio CTL Recording is inhibited on the set channels The scope of inhibiting recording is determined by menu item 003 casst When the recording protection plug on the cassette is pushed in this setting is displayed This setting cannot be selected 003 REC INHIBIT all Selects the scope to which inhibiting recording applies AREA select crash REC all All recording is inhibited The REC INHIBIT indicator video CTL lights audio CTL crash REC The normal recording mode is inhibited Use casst this setting when you wish to record in assemble editing or insert editing only video CTL Recording of video and CTL is inhibited audio CTL Recording of audio and CTL is inhibited casst When the recording protection plug on the cassette is pushed in this setting is displayed This setting cannot be selected The REC INHIBIT indicator lights or flashes to indicate the state of the recording inhibit mechanism on the cassette For details see item 104 Menu List xlpueddy 151 xlpueddy 152 Item number 005 Item SERVO AV REFERENCE select Setting input auto external Function The servo reference is determined by the following menu input The reference s
244. marks that is the property of Sony Corporation and is intended solely e Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel for use by the purchasers of the equipment described in this Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other manual countries Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any e Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of portion of this manual or the use thereof for any purpose Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other other than the operation or maintenance of the equipment countries described in this manual without the express written e Adobe Acrobat and Adobe Reader are trademarks of permission of Sony Corporation Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries For Customer in China ASEH AE ARSE EARBS CHT fae ls ee BEJA Rae PERN AeA PROTA BK Ab Ay into Bis SW PF ERR http pro sony com cn AEn 4 ae S HARARE 20115A Sony Corporation SRW 5000 5500 http www sony net Printed in Japan SY Printed iad 2011 05 32 4 118 418 04 1 rinted on recycled paper 2003
245. mes in fixed field or frame units The procedure for editing after selecting animation editing is exactly the same as for normal insert editing To select animation editing use the VTR SETUP menu item 301 EDIT OPERATION MODE normal Selects normal insert editing CG Selects editing in frame units principally for recording computer graphics CG When the edit completes the OUT point 6 2 Advanced Automatic Editing automatically becomes the next IN point and the next OUT point is set automatically with 1 frame added Follow the procedure below to perform animation editing aoooooooooooaoa 99099009009900903 JO0 0000 0000 Set the IN point The OUT point is set automatically 2 Press the AUTO button The button lights up 3 Press the PREVIEW REVIEW button to preview 4 Press the REC EDIT button Automatic editing starts When the edit completes the OUT point automatically becomes the next IN point and the next OUT point is set automatically Repeat steps 3 to 4 to perform animation editing 6 2 3 Preread Editing Video and digital audio signals already recorded on the tape can be used as an edit source for insert editing This type of editing is called preread editing as the VTR uses preread heads to read signals in advance Signals that are read in advance can be sent to mixers for mixing then recorded to the original channels or o
246. mory ooooo0oo0oo0oo0o0000 200000000000 T Inthe HOME menu press the ALT DMC buttons to light up DMC on the display 2 Seta start point during recording or on a previously recorded tape by simultaneously pressing the ENTRY button and the IN button io Press the STOP button to enter stop mode 4 Rotate the search dial to select the initial playback speed The selected speeds are shown in the time data display window in the menu display If the VTR SETUP menu item 101 SELECTION FOR SEARCH DIAL ENABLE is set to dial direct initial speed settings cannot be made Change the setting of this menu item to via search key 5 Press the PREROLL button and PREVIEW REVIEW button simultaneously The tape is prerolled and played back at the initial speed from the preroll point to the speed variation start point The moment the tape passes the speed variation start point the MEMORY indicator in the display starts flashing The W indicator appears in the time data display window indicating that tape speed memorization in DMC mode is active 6 Rotate the search dial to the position for the desired playback speed The speed variation is stored in memory while the MEMORY indicator is flashing 7 Press the STOP button to stop the tape If the MEMORY indicator flashes before the tape reaches the speed variation end point Memory has been exceeded and the VTR cannot store any m
247. n STOP button code is detected OFF ON Stops for NORMAL PLAY only ON OFF A beeper sounds for 1 second ON ON Stops for NORMAL PLAY only and simultaneously a beeper sounds for 1 TAPE LOCK Se 00 02 39 18 ne UB 00 00 00 00 DETECT STOP off DETECT ADJUST off REC CODE CODE EXIT ADJUST REC ERASE off off off If DETECT STOP is set to ON D STOP appears at the side of the cassette indication as shown in the following figure TAPE LOCK P BEEP 00 0239 18 aft UB 00 00 00 00 DETECT STOP off DETECT ADJUST off SET 01 30 00 00 CO ST LL HDCAM SR REC CODE ADJUST REC off off CODE EXIT ERASE REMAIN O1HO6M off iron D STOP To detect stop codes F2 When playing a tape on which stop codes are recorded you can select four different operation modes according to the settings of the DETECT BEEP button and DETECT STOP button as follows DETECT F3 DETECT VTR operation when stop BEEP button STOP button code is detected OFF OFF No operation 4 2 HOME Menu second The tape transport modes and speed ranges in which stop codes can be detected are as follows Transport mode Detected Beeper Stop timing and speed timing NORMAL PLAY Yes When read Set by F4
248. n The SET UP menu appears again 4 1 6 Adding Titles to the Data When storing data to a memory bank in a Memory Stick or the VTR you can add a title to the data to make data management easier CURRENT SETUP TITLE EDIT Pre ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPORSTUUWXYZ abcdefjghiiklmnoparstuvuxyz 012345678911 lt gt t k 12275 H28 _ HDID2CAM fF Preset SPACE BACK SET CANCEL SAVE SPACE LETTER EXIT 4 Press the SET LETTER button or the cursor center button The selected letter is entered 4 eeobooe00000 0209000000 2 6 1 3 CURRENT SETUP TITLE EDIT Tes Pre 1 Move the cursor P to the item to be titled 2 Press the EDIT TITLE button to display the CURRENT SETUP TITLE EDIT window The VTR enters EDIT mode is entered and the window opens CURRENT SETUP TITLE EDIT gt Pre ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPORSTUUWXYZ abcdefghjiklmnoparstuvuxygy 012345678911 lt gt t k 12557 H 8 _ HDID2CAM fF Preset SPACE BACK SET CANCEL SAVE SPACE LETTER EXIT 3 Press the cursor lt or button to select a letter ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRSTUVUXYZ Q abcdefghjiklmnoparstuvwxyz 2 012345678911
249. n 23 98PsF 24PsF mode use the following procedure 3 4 5 dooooooaoaooaoa G o0000009000 1 Press the TC button then press the ALT button You can also press the ALT and TC buttons simultaneously 2 Press the PDPSET MENU button The PDPSET menu appears PRESET MODE 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 PD TC DF NDF NDF EXIT 3 Press the PRESET MODE button to select 24F or 30F time code to be preset The selected time code is framed with the thick line Each press of the button switches time code between 24F and 30F 24F Presets the 24 frames time code The A frame of the pulldown sequence is preset 30F Presets the 30 frames time code The A frame of the pulldown sequence is preset When 30F is selected in the step 3 Press the PDTC DF NDF button to select DF or NDF This selection is effective only for 30F time code DF Drop frame mode NDF Non drop frame mode auto The unit switches the running mode DF NDF automatically according to the frame frequency of the unit When the frame frequency is 23 98 Hz the unit switches to the drop frame mode and switches to the non drop frame mode when it is 24 Hz When 24F is selected in the step 3 Skip this step Enter the time code data in the data entry window with numeric buttons Data entry window PRESET
250. n or the cursor button to open the window for changing the setting 3 With the CHANGE DATA button the cursor t or l button or the MULTI CONTROL knob change the setting 4 Holding down the SET and ENTRY buttons at the same time press the center cursor button This saves the current settings as new DEFAULT values for CURRENT DEFAULT The asterisks indicating the DEFAULT values move If you press the center cursor button first the setting values return to the PRESET values before CURRENT DEFAULT is overwritten and it is not possible to change DEFAULT correctly To return the DEFAULT values to the factory default PRESET values Holding down the CLR and ENTRY buttons at the same time press the center cursor button This saves the factory default PRESET values as the DEFAULT values for CURRENT DEFAULT D Reset the current setting values if necessary then press the SAVE EXIT button You can save the changed CURRENT DEFAULT data set in DEFAULT VTR BANK or a Memory Stick For details see see 4 1 10 Saving and Recalling DEFAULT Settings on a Bank on page 51 and see 4 1 11 Saving and Recalling DEFAULT Settings in a Memory Stick on page 51 To check the items for which DEFAULT values have been changed In VTR SETUP menu item 131 CHANGED MENU HIGHLIGHT set DEFAULT SETTING to on Items for which the DEFAULT values are different from the factory setting values FACTORY PR
251. nected to the REMOTE 2 PARALLEL I O 50P connector When operating the VTR through an external device with the ALT or ALT buttons set to on all of the tape operation and editing buttons are disabled with the exception of the STOP and EJECT buttons You may also set the VTR so that all buttons are enabled or disabled Perform this setting using the VTR SETUP menu item 008 LOCAL FUNCTION ENABLE You cannot however disable the menu and remote operation mode selection buttons 4 7 1 VTR SETUP Menu All menu items required for setting up the VTR operating conditions are displayed in the scrollable VTR SETUP menu For HOME TC VIDEO AUDIO PF1 and PF2 including the screens displayed by pressing the ALT button you can register about 120 menu items For details on the VTR SETUP menu items see the Appendix Menu List on page 151 For details of the PF assign menu see 4 1 3 Registering Items to the VTR SETUP Menu on page 41 To activate the VTR SETUP menu Press the SET UP button then press the VTR SETUP button Item window PREV PAGE E NEXT PAGE ronmon vog 322 A PREVIEW SSS CATEGO SANGLI SCROLL CH RY 910 A LINE 1035 911 A LINE 1080 401 AFTER CUE stop 116 ALARM BEEP high 835 ANA OUT EXCG SUB 921 ASPECT FLAG of f 815 AU OUT PHAS Prst 821 AUDIO AVI ime off 317 AUDIO EDIT cut ANGE CANCEL SAVE DATA
252. ned in black translucent White characters on a gray screen background with BG White characters on a black background For the SD SDI OUT connector and SD OUT COMPOSITE MONITOR connector the translucent setting is automatically changed to with BG 625 CHARACTER SIZE x1 Sets the size of text information such as time codes output from the MONITOR of SD SDI OUT the SD OUT COMPOSITE connector and HD SDI OUTPUT connectors x 1 Normal size x 2 Twice normal size 626 xipueddy DISPLAY INFORMATION select time data amp status time data amp UB time data amp CTL time data amp VITC time data only When item 620 is set to on this setting specifies the content of text information output from the MONITOR connector of SD SDI OUT the SD OUT COMPOSITE connector and FORMAT CONV OUT OPTION connector time data amp status Timer counter display and status information time data amp UB Timer counter display and user bits time data amp CTL Timer counter display and CTL time data amp VITC Timer counter display and VITC time data only Timer counter display only 627 CHAR WARNING DISPLAY at dual line mode off on When item 626 is set to anything other than time data only this item specifies whether warning messages flash on the second line or not off Warning messages do not flash on If a warning messag
253. ng cursor bar indicates the storage destination 6 To change the title of the bank press the EDIT TITLE button For details see 4 1 6 Adding Titles to the Data on page 49 7 Press the F9 COPY button A message asking you to confirm the operation appears in the display 8 Press the COPY button while holding down the SFT button Storage begins After the storage is complete the title of the VTR memory bank appears on the Memory Stick side suas nu y p 13 dey9 46 FORMAT CARD BANK 0 CURRENT SETUP CARD gt 0 FOOTBALL Preset 1 1 Preset UNDO Preset 2 2 Preset Preset 3 3 Preset Preset 4 4 Preset SHOW Preset 5 5 Preset SEUL Preset 6 6 Preset Preset E 7 Preset SHOW Preset 8 8 Preset CUESET F Preset EDIT SELECT DIREC COPY EXIT TITLE ALL TION 1 Press the SET UP button The SET UP menu appears in the display 2 Press the MEMORY CARD button The MEMORY CARD menu appears in the display FORMAT CARD BANK 0 CURRENT SETUP CARD Preset 1 Preset Preset 2 Preset Preset 3 Preset Preset 4 Preset Preset 5 Preset 6 ie 8 2 3 4 5 Preset 6 Preset Preset 7 Preset Preset 8 Preset F Preset E EDIT SELECT DIREC COPY EXIT TITLE ALL TION gt 3 Press the SHOW CUESET button The display for storing cue point lists appears
254. ng split editing e The player VTR must support DT playback Tape movement during DMC editing During DMC editing the tape moves as shown in the diagram below IN point OUT point Preroll w y Post roll SSS SSS Recorder VTR Stop Playback DMC editing mode Playback i mode mode Preroll time x IN point Post roll time x initial speedy i final speed a a aes fi VTR i Moves at the initial lg a Playback at speeds Stop speed stored in memory Moves at the final speed Setting edit points and playback speed Use the procedure below to set edit points and playback speeds for DMC editing 2 aoaoooaooaoaooooaaoa gt 9090000000000 3 4 5 1 Press the ASSEMBLE button in the HOME menu or press the respective INSERT button F4 INS TC INS VIDEO or INS AUDIO button to select the edit mode that you want 2 Press the PLAYER button to set the connected VTR to act as the player VTR The PLAYER button lights up 3 Press the ALT DMC buttons in the HOME menu The system enters DMC editing mode 4 Press the IN button while holding down the ENTRY button to set an edit point You cannot set an OUT point for the player VTR for DMC editing 5 Press the STOP button to enter STOP mode e90000000000 900000000000 0 oO o0 0000 O O 0000
255. ng the insert editing mode 4 After preread editing undo all the connections used for the preread editing D Press the ALT PRE READ buttons to select off 6 Check that no loop connections remain 6 2 Advanced Automatic Editing unipg 9 seideyo 137 Bulipy 9 seideu9 6 3 Manual Editing Follow the procedure below to perform manual editing oaooooooooooa 9090000000 Enter jog or shuttle mode to position the tape at a place at least three seconds before the position at which you want to set an edit point Press the AUTO button to turn it off Press the ASSEMBLE button in the HOME menu or press the respective INSERT button F4 INS TC INS VIDEO or INS AUDIO button to select the edit mode that you want Press the PLAY button Playback starts Press the REC EDIT button at the point where you want to start editing IN point The REC EDIT button lights and editing starts Press the REC EDIT button at the point where you want to end editing OUT point Editing ends but the tape continues to run in playback mode 7 Press the STOP button to stop the tape To ensure a stable picture start playback at least three seconds before the IN point 138 6 3 Manual Editing Appendix Maintenance Head Cleaning Use the BCT HD12CL Cleaning Cassette to clean the video and audio heads Read the instructions included wit
256. ngs for control from HKDV 900 503 via the VIDEO CONTROL 9P connector 1 IMAGE ENHANCER U amp D UP DOWN Select whether to control the up converter or down converter whether controlling the image enhancer U amp D Control both the up converter and down converter UP Control the up converter DOWN Control the down converter 2 D2 SETUP BLACK SETUP Select the menu item to be controlled by the SETUP dial on the HKDV 900 503 with the D2 button pressed BLACK Control menu item 743 SETUP Control menu item 762 For details see items 743 and 762 After changing the setting for this item power off this unit or HKDV 900 503 and power it on again 205 REMOTE NETWORK on off Specifies whether or not control from a network is possible on Allows control from a network off Does not allow remote control from a network 211 REMOTE 1 PORT 1 amp 0 IN 1 0 Specifies whether to use one or both of the REMOTE 1 IN 9P and REMOTE 1 I O 9P connectors on the connector panel amp I O Use both the REMOTE 1 IN 9P connector and the REMOTE 1 l O 9P connector IN Use only the REMOTE 1 IN 9P connector I O Use only the REMOTE 1 I O 9P connector 212 MONITOR SELECTION FOR VTR TO VTR EDIT MAN AUTO For editing with two SRW 5000 5500 units specifies whether the recorder is forcibly switched to E E m
257. nnector m CONTROL PANEL PRO STDIDUO slot Card slot eject button PCM CIA card slot Access indicator e SRW 5000 serial numbers 12524 to 15000 e SRW 5500 serial numbers 14578 to 15000 CONTROL PANEL connector CONTROL PANEL e Serial numbers 15001 or higher 1 Excluding SRW 5000 serial numbers 90000 to 99999 and SRW 5500 serial numbers 30000 to 39999 CONTROL PANEL connector Pas PRO Memory Stick Memory Stick slot Access indicator For details see 3 4 Using a Memory Stick on page 37 2 1 Control Panel 25 Sued Jo suooUN pue suoneooq z saideyo seg Jo suonouny pue suolyjes07 z seideyD 26 2 2 Connector Panel ANALOG I O section see page 27 2 DIGITAL I O section see page 29 3 Remote input output section 4 Power supply see page 30 see page 30 2 2 Connector Panel 1 ANALOG I O input output section ANALOG I O AUDIO OUTPUT REF INPUT PTION HD REF OUT COMPOSITE MONITOR Oo SD OUT SYNC connector C HD REF OUT connectors MONITOR OUTPUT L R connectors AUDIO OUTPUT CH1 to CH4 connectors REF INPUT 1 connectors and 75Q termination s
258. ns ENTRY button D IN OUT buttons AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT buttons Numeric buttons and buttons Press to input time data or edit points data at the cursor position in menu display Press buttons 0 to 5 while holding down the SFT button to input hexadecimal A to F for user bits Use the buttons to increase or decrease settings SFT shift button Press buttons 0 to 5 while holding down this button to input hexadecimal A to F for user bits Use also in combination with other buttons to perform other operations RCL recall button Press to recall the previous setting etc CLR clear button Press to clear input data SET button Press to finalize input data INPUT CHECK button While you hold down this button the input signal is output from the monitor output connector so that you can monitor the input video and audio When the LTC VITC time code is shown on the display you can check the time code generator PLAYER RECORDER buttons Select which VTR is to be controlled by this VTR s control panel during editing when this VTR is used as a recorder and an external VTR is connected to the REMOTE 1 IN 9P or REMOTE 1 I O 9P connector as a player PLAYER The tape transport buttons and editing operation buttons on the control panel control the external player VTR RECORDER The tape transport buttons and editing operation buttons on the control panel control the recorder V
259. nt accidental erasure of material recorded on a tape push in the record protect plug L size cassette lt E D S size cassette O O Push in the record protect plug ON To restore the tape for recording return the plug to its original position OFF When a cassette with this plug pushed in is inserted into the VTR the REC INHIBIT indicator on the lower control panel lights up and recording will not start even if you press the REC EDIT button To restore the tape for recording return the plug to its original position 3 4 Using a Memory Stick When a Memory Stick is inserted in the VTR the file data can be stored on the Memory Stick which enables you to share data among VTRs Inserting a Memory Stick e For SRW 5000 serial numbers 12523 or lower and 90000 to 99999 e For SRW 5500 serial numbers 14577 or lower and 30000 to 39999 With the label side up and the connector facing forward insert the Memory Stick into an optional memory card adaptor Then with the Memory Stick still loaded insert the memory card adaptor into the memory card slot of the unit Memory card adaptor Eject button Memory Stick Label side up e For SRW 5000 serial numbers 12524 or higher e For SRW 5500 serial numbers 14578 or higher 1 Excluding SRW 5000 serial numbers 90000 to 99999 and SRW 5500 se
260. ntenance Manual Volume 1 VIDEO CONTROL Digital Video Processor Control connector D sub 9 pin female Connects to the optional HKDV 900 HD Digital Video Controller to enable remote control of the internal digital video processor Turn off the power before connecting the remote controller REMOTE 1 I O 9P connector D sub 9 pin female Use this with the supplied 9 pin remote control cable to connect the unit to another SRW 5000 5500 unit or another HD VTR unit to carry out editing with a BVE series editor BVE 900 9 10 2000 9000 9 100 USB connector This is used for manufacturing and services 2 2 Connector Panel ETHERNET connector Used for monitoring the VTR by SNMP or for setting or changing VTR settings by HTTP For safety do not connect the connector for peripheral device wiring that might have excessive voltage to this port Follow the instructions for this port ATTENTION Par mesure de s curit ne raccordez pas le connecteur pour le c blage de p riph riques pouvant avoir une tension excessive a ce port Suivez les instructions pour ce port Aus Sicherheitsgriinden nicht mit einem Peripheriegerit Anschluss verbinden der zu starke Spannung fiir diese Buchse haben k nnte Folgen Sie den Anweisungen fiir diese Buchse 4 Power supply AC IN connector NAC IN connector Connects to an AC outlet using an appropriate power cord Setting Up the VTR
261. nter button The selected character is entered REC TITLE No EDIT TITLE UN o BE ABICOEF GHI JKLMNOPORSTUVUXYZ abcdefghjiklmnorarstuvuxyz 012345678911 O lt gt t k 12 51 H28 _ HDID2CAM SPACE BACK SET CANCEL SAVE SPACE LETTER EXIT 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter more characters To enter a space Press the SPACE button If you enter a wrong character Press the BACK SPACE button to go back Then re enter the character To start the procedure over again Press the CANCEL button to start again To change a character Press the cursor i button to move the cursor to the title box Then press the cursor or button to change the insertion position If entered title exceeds the length of the title box lt l or I gt appears to the left or right of the box Press the SAVE EXIT button The screen that was on before the title was entered is displayed again To change IN OUT point time data 1 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor P to the line where you want to change IN OUT point time data To move the cursor using the numeric buttons With the cursor specifying IN or OUT enter the line number using the numeric buttons Then press the CUENUM POINT button The cursor will move to the line specified by the numeric buttons If the cursor P is not linked with the cursor buttons th
262. ntry window Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the IN OUT section to be recalled and then press the RCL button while holding down the IN button to recall IN point data or the OUT button to recall OUT point data To enter the current time code continuously 1 Set the VTR SETUP menu item 127 Tele File IN OUT Input Continue to on 2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the IN OUT section to be entered To move the cursor using the numeric buttons Enter the line number using the numeric buttons Then press the CUENUM POINT button The cursor will move to the line specified by the numeric buttons 3 Press the IN button or OUT button while holding down down the ENTRY button The movement of the cursor is automatic as described in the following table and data is entered continuously Input When the IN button When the OUT condition you press while button you press holding down the while holding ENTRY button down the ENTRY button Only IN point IN point data is OUT point data is data has been modified and the entered and the entered cursor stays on the IN cursor moves to the point data next IN point Only OUT IN point data is OUT point data is point data has been entered entered and the cursor moves to the next IN point modified and the cursor stays on the OUT point To display the duration between an IN point and an OUT point Use the cursor
263. o levels with the reference level set at 0 dB The CUE channel level is always displayed with the reference level set at 0 dB 815 AUDIO OUTPUT 0 Sets the output timing for the digital audio playback signal PHASE SDI and AES EBU only The 128 setting specifies the preset 128 128 reference position A setting lower than 128 advances the output timing and a 255 setting higher than 128 delays the output timing 128 samples or approx 2 7 ms with 1 sample approx 20 us 816 PITCH off Selects whether or not to perform pitch correction during CORRECTION on program play and play at a different frequency 23 98 frame gt 24 frame 23 98 24 frame gt 25 frame 29 97 frame gt 30 frame off Output audio with no pitch correction on Output audio with pitch correction Menu List Item number 817 Item Setting PITCH CORRECTION GROUP select Sub items PITCH Grp A Grp B Grp C CORRECTION Grp D Grp E Grp F OFF GROUP select CH1 PITCH Grp A Grp B Grp C CORRECTION Grp D Grp E Grp F OFF GROUP select CH2 PITCH Grp A Grp B Grp C CORRECTION Grp D Grp E Grp F OFF GROUP select CH3 PITCH Grp A Grp B Grp C CORRECTION Grp D Grp E Grp F OFF GROUP select CH4 PITCH Grp A Grp B Grp C CORRECTION Grp D Grp E Grp F OFF GROUP select CH5 PITCH Grp A Grp B Grp C CORRECTION Grp D Grp E Grp F OFF
264. ode track on the tape is used int LTC int VITC When the time code played back from the AUX data in the video signal on the tape is used ext LTC When the external time code input to the TIME CODE IN connector is used SDI VITC When the VITC input to the HD SDI INPUT connector is used SDI LTC When the LTC input to the HD SDI INPUT connector is used 608 TCG UBG REGENE TC amp UB Selects the regenerate signal when the time code MODE TC generator is in regenerate mode when item 606 is set to UB regene or during auto edit mode TC amp UB The time code signal and user bits signal are z both regenerated 3 TC The time code signal is regenerated UB The user bits signal is regenerated 609 REC RUN FREE free run This selects the way in which the time code advances RUN select rec run free run Regardless of the operation mode of this unit the time code advances all the time that the power is on rec run The time code advances only during recording When using this setting set item 606 to preset 610 DOWNCONVERTER on Selects whether or not to insert VITC data in the HD SD VICT output off converter output on VITC data is inserted off VITC data is not inserted 611 VITC POSITION 1 12 281 line When 29 97PsF 59 94i mode is selected on the VTR this select NTSC setting specifies the lines in which the VITC signal is 16 279 line inserted It can be inserted in any lines from 12 281 to 20 283 20 283 line
265. ode when the PLAYER button is pressed MAN The recorder is not forcibly switched to E E mode AUTO The recorder is forcibly switched to E E mode allowing you to monitor the player side video Items Relating to Editing Nos 301 to Item number 301 Item EDIT OPERATION MODE Setting CG normal KEEP DURATION Function Selects the animation edit mode For normal editing use the normal setting CG Primarily for recording computer graphics this setting allows editing by individual frames When the edit is completed the OUT point automatically becomes the next IN point The next OUT point is automatically set one frame ahead of the IN point normal Use this setting for normal editing KEEP DURATION This setting allows editing in certail intervals When the edit is completed the OUT point automatically becomes the next IN point The position of OUT point for the next edit is shifted automatically so that the duration is the same as the previous edit Menu List xlpueddy 159 xlpueddy 160 Item number Item Setting Function 302 PREROLL TIME 0 sec This sets the preroll time The range is from 0 to 30 seconds in steps of 1 second The preroll time should 5 sec generally be set to at least 3 seconds and for phase f adjustment with an editing controller it is recommended to set the pr
266. of the cursor position To enter or modify IN OUT point data using the numeric buttons CUE REC DATE 2003 05 141 E0S 00 00 12 08 SCAN TITLEL 1 Rest100 No Out Tk Cut Scn o UAG 9 El DEL mark PRO TAPE CUENUM WRITE POINT TECT INFO POINT EXIT ioe 0000 0000 1 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the IN OUT section to be entered or modified 4 4 CUE Menu 3 Press the IN button to enter IN point data or OUT button to enter OUT point data The number is entered or it replaces the existing IN OUT point data To clear the IN OUT point data Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the IN OUT section to be cleared and then press the CLR button while holding down the IN button to clear IN point data or OUT button to clear OUT point data or press the IN or OUT button to clear both IN and OUT point data while holding down the CLR button To increase or decrease IN OUT point data one frame at a time Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the IN OUT section to be increased or decreased and then press the button to increase the time data or the button to decrease the time data while holding down the IN button or the OUT button Each time you press the or button the time data is increased or decreased by one frame respectively To recall IN OUT point data to the data e
267. omparable to the HDCAM model HDW F500 in size weight and functionality The SRW 5500 only is a recorder supporting both the HDCAM SR and HDCAM formats 1 HDCAM is a trademark of Sony Corporation HDCAM SR format The HDCAM SR format exploits technological advances in signal processing and magnetic recording to provide functionality comparable to that of the HDCAM format while offering HD digital recording and playback with high image and sound quality The technology incorporated in this unit includes the following e Highly efficient and mild data compression using newly developed MPEG 4 Studio Profile e Powerful error correcting codes e High performance high accuracy heads and drum with dynamic tracking DT together with a new auto tracking technique yielding highly reliable narrow track recording and playback These technologies allow 120 minutes of recording on an HDCAMGSR cassette L type the same size as the HDCAM cassette Digital signal processing In this unit 4 2 2 component video signals obtained by quantization according to ITU R709 SMPTE 274M and BTA S 002B SMPTE 260M are compressed using MPEG 4 Studio Profile Audio signals are processed uncompressed according to the AES EBU format Chapter Input interface The input interface is based on the HD SDI HD Serial Digital Interface format specified by BTA S 004B 005B 006B SMPTE 291M 292M 299M and ARIB STD B4 allowing a single BNC
268. omplete data compatibility between the SRW 5000 and SRW 5500 However items which are not available on one model or the other do not appear in the VTR SETUP menu There is no data compatibility between the SRW 5800 5100 and SRW 5000 5500 However VTR SETUP data for the SRW 5800 5100 can be imported to the SRW 5000 5500 4 1 9 Automatic Reading from a VTR Bank at Power On By having the normally used settings saved in a bank and recalled automatically when the system is powered on you can always start operation from powering on with the same settings T Make the VTR SETUP menu and PF assignment settings 2 In the VTR BANK menu screen save the current settings in any VTR bank It is preferable to add a title to identify the settings and protect the settings not to be overwritten 3 Press the ALT button This switches to the ALT BANK menu screen 4 Press the POW ON RECALL button A red P appears to the left of the VTR BANK title Each time you press the POW ON RECALL button cycles the VTR bank from SETUP BANK 1 in sequence to the FACTORY PRESET item and then to blank 5 Press the ALT button to return to the VTR BANK menu screen Next time you power on the settings will automatically be recalled from SETUP BANK in the VTR bank with P set Unless VTR SETUP menu item 116 ALARM BEEP is set to off to distinguish the automatic recall from anormal startup a beep sound occurs twice
269. on 4 4 CUE Menu 4 4 4 Erasing Cue Point Data To erase any cue point data blank out the data entry window then do the cue point registration procedure oooooooooo0oo0oo 200000000000 00000000 T Press the ALT PAGE MODE buttons or the ALT F9 EXTEND MODE buttons 2 if you selected PAGE mode press the PREV PAGE button or NEXT PAGE button to select a desired page or use the numeric buttons to enter the page number in the data entry window then press the PAGE SET button Press the cursor t or button to move the cursor P to the cue number to be erased Blank l PAGE E0S 00 13 00 001 10 00 10 00 00 11 00 11 00 00 12 00 12 00 00 13 00 13 00 00 14 00 14 00 00 N15 00 15 00 00 16 00 16 00 00 SET 01 15 00 00 STILL HDCAM SR CUENUM M CUE l CLEAR REMAIN 01H06M A 17 00 17 00 00 18 00 18 00 00 19 00 19 00 00 oono v neo SET SET PAGE CUE4 To select the cue number directly by the numeric buttons Enter the cue number in the data entry window with the numeric buttons then press the CUENUM SET button Press the CLR button then press the SET button The cue point display disappears from the data entry window Data entry window PREU Blank l1 E0Sf00 13 00 001
270. on 2 Press the cursor t or l button to select the signal To return to the default settings Press the cursor center button 5 1 Preparing for Recording To select the same input signal simultaneously on all twelve channels Press the A IN ALL button This changes the input signal simultaneously on all twelve channels You can also make this setting using the VTR SETUP menu item 830 AUDIO INPUT SELECT Selecting audio signals to be monitored With the MONITOR L or R buttons at the upper left of the control panel switch the audio signal output from the PHONES jack and MONITOR OUTPUT L R connectors as follows Hoe 0000 0000 Check the audio level display area in the color display and make sure that the unit is not in the REC LEVEL PB LEVEL setting state with red or blue vertical lines appearing on the left and right of the audio level meter The channels for which the signals are currently being monitored are shown by reverse video characters L and R below the audio level meter 2 Press the buttons corresponding to each channel to light the L R reverse video indications below the audio level meter and specify channels to 12 with the MONITOR L or R button both L and R can also be specified This setting can also be made using the VTR SETUP menu items 807 AUDIO MONITOR L select and 808 AUDIO MONITOR R select To adjust the aud
271. on 22 upper control panel 18 CONTROL PANEL connector 25 CTL timer 62 CUE IN connector 28 CUE menu 71 CUE OUT connector 28 Cue point erasing 76 prerolling 77 registering 75 Cursor buttons 21 Cut editing 162 D Deleting edit points 131 DF drop frame mode 165 DIAG button 20 DIGITAL I O INPUT connectors 29 DIGITAL I O OUTPUT connectors 29 DISPLAY button 20 Display section 22 Displaying the duration 129 DMC editing 135 overview 135 performing 136 setting edit points and playback speed 135 DMC playback 55 overview 120 E Editing control section 21 Editing point confirming 129 deleting 131 modifying 131 moving 131 setting 126 128 Editing precautions 124 Effective scanning line number 184 EJECT button 18 Ejecting the cassette 37 Emphasis 149 ENTRY button 21 ERROR indicator 18 Error Log Menu adjusting the clock 148 clearing warning messages Error log menu 147 Error Messages 143 ETHERNET connector 30 EXTEND mode 163 147 F Fade in out 129 162 FC OUT B connectors 29 FORMAT CONV OUT OPTION connectors 29 Format indicators 18 FULL FINE button 20 Function buttons 20 H HD REF OUT connectors 28 HD SDI INPUT A B connectors 29 HD SDI OUTPUT connectors 29 HD SD conversion mode edge crop mode 117 letter box mode 117 squeeze mode 117 Head cleaning 139 HOME menu 53 IN OUT buttons 22 Information display 22 INPUT CHECK button 21 Insert mode 124 J JOG button 24 Jog mode playback 118
272. on video reference signal selected in item 005 is not present or out of phase with the input video signal off No warning is displayed on Warning is displayed by flashing STOP button 104 REC INHIBIT off Specifies whether the REC INHIBIT indicator lights or LAMP FLASHING on flashes when record protect plug on the back side of the inserted cassette tape is pressed down off The REC INHIBIT indicator lights up on The REC INHIBIT indicator flashes Menu List xlpueddy 155 Item number Item Setting Function 107 JOG DIAL typet 1 to 1 Selects the tape speed VTR commana characteristics for RESPONSE type2 2 to 2 search dial rotation type3 2 to 2 TYPE1 Tape speed changes linearly in a range of 1 to 1 times normal tape speed TYPE2 Tape speed changes in a range of 2 to 2 times normal tape speed as shown below in TYPE2 Tape speed does not change when the search dial is within a range of 1 times normal tape speed TYPES Tape speed changes linearly in a range of 2 to 2 times normal tape speed as shown below in TYPES TYPE2 speed TYPE3 speed A A sof FWD 42 FWO__ RVS FWD RVS FWD a rotation rotation avsi Rvs 109 KEY INHIBIT off When this is set to ON the KEYINH indicator in the on information display appears and the editing control block
273. ooooooo000 Coroa cooo ooto SRW 5000 5500 Recorder gt a The figure shows the SRW 5500 3 1 Connecting External Equipment HLA eur dN umes g Jeideuo 33 3 2 Reference Signals This section describes how reference signals for the video output are selected 3 2 1 Reference Signals for Output Video Depending on the operating condition VTR SETUP menu settings the input signal and the video output signal from the VTR can be synchronized as follows HLA 24 dn umes Je deyo 34 C Start gt a The signal on the REF INPUT 2 connector is the signal for FORMAT CONV output Use the A08 FC REFERENCE select menu item to switch between HD and SD for the signal input to the REF INPUT 2 connector What is the setting of the VTR SETUP menu item 005 SERVO AV REFERENCE select ext input Is the VTR currently recording or is EDIT PRESENT on Yes What is the setting of the VTR SETUP menu item 006 EXTERNAL REFERENCE select extrn SD extrn HD Is there an input signal on the HD SDI INPUT connector Is there a signal of the correct frequency on the REF INPUT 1 or 2 9 connector Is there a signal of the correct frequency on the REF INPUT 1 or 2 9 connector Yes Yes Yes No No y No y Synchronization Synchronization ii with the reference with
274. oooooooo 2900000000000 ioe 0000 0000 T Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to select the VTR for which edit points are to be set The button lights up 2 Rotate the search dial in jog or shuttle mode to position the edit point 6 1 Basic Automatic Editing 1 Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to select the VTR for which edit points are to be set The button lights up 2 Enter the edit point data with the numeric buttons For example to enter 01 HOOM30SOOF press 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 You need not input leading zeros If the entered value consists of less than eight digits the leading digit s is are set to zero s when you press the SET button Data entry window PB EE PLAY LOCK PB ott 01 04 58 00 LAIN 00 01 10 00 AOUT 00 02 10 00 ASSEM IN 00 01 10 00 OUT 00 02 10 00 BLE off LEZ mea Q1 04 58 00 off STILL HDCAM SR INS INS l VIDEO AUDIO REMAIN 01H06M off v A ALT TC q To delete entered data Press the CLR button 3 Press the SET button to set the input data SET is displayed PLAY LOCK 0110415800 AIN 00 01 10 00 AOUT 00 02 10 00 ASSEM IN 00 01 10 00 OUT 00 02 10 00 SET O1 00 30 00 BLE PB EE PB off w 01 04 58 00 OQO TC H M S F S off STILL HDCAM SR INS INS l VID
275. opened page mode PAGE mode extend mode EXTEND mode 406 CUE MENU PREROLL OFFSET O sec 30 sec Sets the preroll time for a cueing up operation from the CUE menu 407 AUTO REWIND off on s rew Selects the rewind mode for the end of the tape off The tape transport stops at the end of the tape on The tape is automatically rewound from the end of the tape s rew The tape is automatically rewound from the end of the tape For HDCAM SR L cassettes the tape is rewound smoothly to its beginning in SOFT REWIND mode The cassette is not automatically ejected For cassettes other than HDCAM SR L SOFT REWIND mode is disabled and the tape is rewound in standard REW mode 408 AUTO CUE UP Selects whether or not to cue up when switching from standby off to standby on off No cue up on Cue up to the time code immediately before switching to standby off Menu List xipueddy 163 xlpueddy 164 Items Relating to Recording Protection Nos 501 to Item number Item Setting Function 501 STILL TIMER 0 5 sec Select the amount of time after which the VTR to 5 sec automatically enters tape protect mode for the purpose of 10 sec protecting the video head and tape 20 sec This is the time between stopping of the tape stop mode or 30 sec still picture mod
276. or control signal A pulse signal that can be counted to determine the number of frames and therefore the tape s running time Used mainly for adjusting the tracking position of video heads and to achieve time code continuity during continuous recording This signal is recorded on a longitudinal tape track Cue point A point used to mark the beginning of a section of tape so that it can be located for later playback or editing Drop frame mode When the field frequency of this unit is 59 94 Hz the actual number of frames per second is approximately 29 97 while the time code value advances one second every 30 frames In drop frame mode the time code is advanced such a way that this difference in the value between real time and the time codes is corrected Specifically two frames are skipped at the beginning of each minute except for every tenth minute so that the frame value for time codes matches that for real time See also Non drop frame mode E E mode Abbreviation for Electric to Electric mode In this mode the signals are passed through the VTR s electronics before output but do not pass through the magnetic converter circuits such as the tape and head circuits This mode is used for confirming input signals or adjusting the input level Effect edit mode When editing a tape using a switcher or when editing special effects the pixels comprising the picture are often not dubbed to the same positions as t
277. orded in phase with the video output signal 1Frame Recorded one frame delayed with respect to the video input signal AES EBU amp ANA OUTPUT Shows the phase of the AES EBU and ANALOG AUDIO outputs REF Output in phase with reference FC In phase with the FC output 90H HD 90H HD advanced with respect to reference 2H SD 2H SD advanced with respect to reference Page 5 Phase TC TC INPUT DELAY Shows the recording phase of the input time code OFF Recorded in phase with the input video signal 1Frame Recorded one frame delayed with respect to the input video signal LTC OUTPUT Shows the phase of the output LTC LINE Output in phase with the main line HD SDI output FC Output in phase with the FC output Page 6 Meta Data The display changes depending on the tape format in use e HDCAM SR META DATA LINE REC Shows the status of the three lines for metadata recording on this unit META DATA LINE OUT Shows the status of the three lines of main HD SDI output into which metadata is multiplexed META DATA LINE FC Shows the status of the three lines of output from the optional HKSR 5001 format converter board into which metadata is multiplexed META DATA LINE SD Shows the status of the three lines of SD SDI output into which metadata is multiplexed HDCAM Displays L1 L2 DID SDID This combination is counted as 1 packet Up to 3 packets can be recorded On the SRW 5500 the system settings r
278. ore data for playback speed variations Notes on the W indicator and the MEMORY indicator The Ml indicator shows that the tape speed memorization in DMC mode is taking place The MEMORY indicator flashes during playback speed memorization and goes out when memorization of the playback speed has been completed Performing DMC playback There are two methods of starting DMC playback e Starting playback at the on air cue from the on air start point e Starting playback immediately after prerolling To avoid operation errors we recommend that you use the VTR alone when performing DMC playback oooooooooooo 900000000 OO Q O O O O O OO To start playback at the on air cue from the on air start point T Press the PREROLL button turning it on The tape is cued up to the on air start point 2 Press the PREVIEW REVIEW button at the moment the on air cue is given The PREVIEW REVIEW button lights up When the tape passes the speed variation start point DMC playback starts and continues at the speed s stored in memory When the tape passes the speed variation end point normal speed playback starts To start playback immediately after prerolling Press the PREVIEW REVIEW button The PREVIEW REVIEW button lights up When the tape passes the speed variation start point DMC playback starts and continues at the speed s stored in memory When the tape passes t
279. orrection Some menu settings are required to enable audio pitch correction during program play When audio pitch correction is enabled it is also carried out at times other than during program play whenever an HDCAM SR tape is played that has a system setting frame frequency that is different from the current system setting However the difference between system settings must be within 5 as shown below 23 98 frames 24 frames 23 98 24 frames 25 frames 29 97 frames gt 30 frames To enable pitch correction Set VTR SETUP menu item 816 PITCH CORRECTION to on Pitch correction group settings You can use VTR SETUP menu item 817 PITCH CORRECTION GROUP select to assign the 12 audio channels to groups You can assign up to 6 channels to 1 group Pitch correction is performed at the same time for all channels in a group so phase differences do not arise However phase differences may arise between different groups Pitch correction detection mode settings You can use VTR SETUP menu item 818 PITCH CORRECTION DETECT MODE select to specify the detection mode for each pitch correction group Mode1 Search for zero cross points in the audio data and connect the zero cross points Mode2 Search for zero cross points in the same way as Model but connect zero cross points only when low level samples are detected around the zero cross points Mode3 At a regular interval corresponding to
280. osed to dripping or splashing No objects filled with liquids such as vases shall be placed on the apparatus ATTENTION Eviter d exposer l appareil un gouttement ou des claboussures Ne placer aucun objet rempli de liquide comme un vase sur l appareil VORSICHT Das Ger t ist nicht tropf und spritzwassergesch tzt Es d rfen keine mit Fl ssigkeiten gef llten Gegenst nde z B Vasen darauf abgestellt werden CAUTION The unit is not disconnected from the AC power source mains as long as it is connected to the wall outlet even if the unit itself has been turned off ATTENTION Cet appareil n est pas d connect de la source d alimentation secteur tant qu il est raccord la prise murale m me si l appareil lui m me a t mis hors tension VORSICHT Solange das Netzkabel an eine Netzsteckdose angeschlossen ist bleibt das Ger t auch im ausgeschalteten Zustand mit dem Strommetz verbunden For the customers in the U S A for SRW 5000 5500 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when 3 4 the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmf
281. ound off no alarm sound 4 7 SET UP Menu Setting the time until the color display screen saver is activated Press the SCREEN SAVER button repeatedly 3min The screen saver is activated 3 minutes after the last button operation 10min The screen saver is activated 10 minutes after the last button operation 60min The screen saver is activated 60 minutes after the last button operation off The screen saver is not activated Setting the information display screen saver Press the SCREEN SAVER S button on The screen display is periodically switched between normal video and reverse video off The screen saver is not activated Recording Playback 5 1 Preparing for Recording Chapter 5 1 1 Setting Switches and Menus Before recording set the switches and menus as shown in the diagram below For details see the pages indicated in the parentheses POWER switch ON REMOTE buttons None of these buttons light up MONITOR L R buttons Audio channels to be monitored page 112 Recording level indication Reference level or appropriate recording level page 113 Indicators Check the reference signal OOUOO0U F2 Fi F6 F7 Menu settings REC INH button in the HOME menu off TIMER SEL button in the TC menu Select the time data to be displaye
282. out Menu List Item number Item Setting Function 310 EDIT PRESET Specifies the channel of the edit preset command to be REPLACE assigned with the edit preset settings for each channel CHANNEL SELECT Sub item REPLCE CH SEL disable disable The setting in this menu is disabled and the enable settings in the REPLACE MODE menu and the ANALOG REPLACE menu are used enable The setting in this menu is enabled REPLCE TR1 CH1 to CH1 to CH12 The edit preset setting of this track turns on or off according to CH12 to the specified channel of the edit preset REPLCE TR2 CH1 to CH2 to CH12 Rian REPLCE TR3 CH1 to CH3 to CH12 REPLCE TR4 CH1 to CH4 to CH12 REPLCE TR5 CH1 to CH5 to CH12 REPLCE TR6 CH1 to CH6 to CH12 REPLCE TR7 CH1 to CH7 to CH12 REPLCE TR8 CH1 to CH8 to CH12 REPLCE TR9 CH1 to CH9 to CH12 REPLCE TR10 CH1 to CH10 to CH12 REPLCE TR11 CH1 to CH11 to CH12 REPLCE TR12 CH1 to CH12 311 EDIT PRESET normal normal Assigns edit preset command channels 1 to 8 to REPLACE MODE parallel track channels 1 to 8 SELECT reverse parallel Assigns edit preset command channels 1 to 4 to stereo channel pairs 1 5 to 4 8 reverse Assigns edit preset command channels 1 to 4 to channels 5 to 8 and channels 5 to 8 to channels 1 to 4 stereo Assigns edit preset command channels 1 to 4 to track channel
283. pairs 1 2 to 7 8 312 ANALOG AUDIO no def When the edit presets for VTR channels 9 to 12 are EDIT PRESET ch1 specified by an editor or remote controller these are set on REPLACE ch2 or off according to the analog audio edit presets 7 ch1 2 no def Not set Sub items ch1 Follows analog channel 1 edit preset ANALOG AUDIO ch2 Follows analog channel 2 edit preset EDIT PRESET ch1 2 Follows the edit preset for analog channel 1 or REPLACE FOR CH9 ANALOG AUDIO EDIT PRESET REPLACE FOR CH10 ANALOG AUDIO EDIT PRESET REPLACE FOR CH11 ANALOG AUDIO EDIT PRESET REPLACE FOR CH12 analog channel 2 Menu List xlpueddy 161 Item number 317 Item AUDIO EDIT MODE Setting cut edit cross fade fade in out Function Specifies the type of editing for digital audio signals cut edit Cut editing discontinuity in audio signal may result at the join causing noise cross fade Cross fade see figure below fade in out Fade out and fade in see figure below CROSS FADE OUT PB INPUT FADE IN OUT e The t in the figures above is the time set by item 811 e When editing non audio data be sure to select cut edit e Noise may be produced during the editing of certain non audio data 318 EDIT RETRY off on Set this item when the VTR is used as a recorder during VTR to VTR editing Specifies the action taken when the recorder
284. pally the audio level display and menu display Audio Level display In recording mode or E E mode this displays the audio recording levels In playback mode or CONFI mode this displays the playback levels The display mode can be changed with the FULL FINE button The factory default display is a reference level of 20 dB and peak level 0 dB Menu display This displays the menu screen selected by the menu selection buttons Each menu screen shows the functions assigned to the function buttons F1 to F10 and shows simultaneously information required for time code display settings and so on 1 E E mode An abbreviation for Electric to Electric mode In this mode video or audio input signals are passed and output only through the VTR s internal circuitry and not through the magnetic conversion system comprising tape and heads 2 1 Control Panel Note on faulty pixels on the LCD panel The LCD panel fitted to this unit is manufactured with high precision technology giving a functioning pixel ratio of at least 99 99 Thus a very small proportion of pixels maybe stuck either always off black always on red green or blue or flashing In addition over a long period of use because of the physical characteristics of the liquid crystal display such stuck pixels may appear spontaneously These problems are not a malfunction Note that any such problems have no effect on recorded data
285. peat steps 3 and 4 to enter the data A maximum of 15 characters can be entered If the number of entered characters is too large a memory overflow may occur and it may become impossible to enter other cue point data Press the TAPE INFO button to check the free memory capacity To enter a space Press the SPACE button then carry out entry If you make an error in entry Press the BACK SPACE button then carry out entry Canceling and repeating the process Press the CANCEL button then carry out entry To change a character during the operation Press the cursor t button then move the cursor to the comment frame With the cursor button or gt button change the character insertion position 6 Press the SAVE EXIT button This returns to the original menu screen 4 4 CUE Menu sBuljes nue p saideyo 81 suas nu y p sai deuD 82 Cueing up to the IN point T Hold down the CUE SCAN button and press the PREROLL button This sets the cursor movement direction Each press cycles through the settings FWD REW No setting FWD Pressing the PREROLL button moves the cursor to the next line and cues up to the time data of that line Invalid time data is ignored REW Pressing the PREROLL button moves the cursor to the previous line and cues up to the time data of that line Invalid time data is ignored 2 Press the PREROLL button To write protect the cue point data To write p
286. point shows For how to select on or off for the recording starting point setting see Changing the recording starting point setting on page 85 IN Shows log IN point data OUT Shows log OUT point data Tk take Shows the take number of a cue point cut Shows the cut number of a cue point Scn scene Shows the scene number of a cue point 4 4CUE Menu 83 Comment Shows a comment on a cue point Button Indication Function F1 CUE SCAN Sets the cursor movement direction when the PREROLL button is pressed E2 ENTRY Selects whether or not to POINT display log IN OUT point information E3 COMMNT Edits the Comment box EDIT F4 CHANGE Changes the value of data DATA F5 DEL POINT Deletes time data F6 MARK Changes the setting in the Mrk box F7 PROTECT Prevents the cue point data from being changed F8 TAPE INFO Shows information on the Q memory label 8 F9 CUENUM Moves the cursor to the line R POINT number entered with the z numeric buttons 3 F10 WRITE Saves the changes and exits a EXIT the Tele File menu ALT F1 FORMAT T Formats a memory label s File ALT F2 UNDO ALL Cancels all changes ALT F3 ATTRIB Changes the ID ADMIN and EDIT TITLE within the tape information window ALT F4 COPY to Copies time data to the CUE CUE menu screen cue point data ALT F7 WRITE Sets or unsets write prote
287. practical method for inserting new video data This should be done with insert editing See also Insert editing Bridging connection A connection that allows a signal input to an input terminal to pass through the unit and exit from an output terminal for input to a third piece of equipment Capstan A drive mechanism that moves the tape at a specified speed Its rotation is normally synchronized with a reference sync signal Color frame A color subcarrier phase having one cycle that consists of two frames four fields in the NTSC format Color frame locking A procedure in which the time code frame value is set to an odd number for the first and second color fields and to an even number for the third and fourth color fields Color framing A method to maintain color subcarrier phase continuity by performing editing in two frame units in order to achieve stable video without horizontal fluctuation at the edit points when editing downconverted composite video signal Component video signal A video signal that consists of a luminance signal Y and two chrominance color difference signals R Y B Y Composite video signal A signal that consists of video luminance and color sub carrier sync horizontal and vertical and color burst signals Condensation Moisture that collects on the head drum of the tape transport mechanism causing damage to the tape and malfunction of the VTR CTL Abbreviation f
288. put signal selections for individual channels with the numeric buttons 1 Press the cursor or gt button to align the cursor with the channel for which you want to make the selection 2 Press the cursor t or button to select the source track to be output To return to the default settings Press the cursor center button The cursor item returns to the default To revert the source tracks of all channels to default settings Press the DIGITAL ALL RESET button in the ALT DIG OUT menu The source tracks of all channels return to their default settings You can also make the source track selection using VTR SETUP menu item 834 DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT EXCHANGE 4 6 3 Analog Audio Output Signal Source Track Selection ANAOUT EXCHNG To make the source track selection for the analog audio output signal on each of CH1 to CH4 use the following procedure 1 Press the ANAOUT EXCHNG button The ANAOUT menu appears together with a source track selection window for the analog audio output signals ANAOUT CHI TRI anaout RSME serene CH2 TR2 ater CRT CH2 CHS CHa TR3 TR2 TR3 TR4 ANAOUT CH4 TR4 EXIT 2 Carry out the source track selection for the analog audio output signal on each channel TR1 to TR12 Select the audio signals recorded on tracks 1 to 12 3 Press the EXIT button This returns to the AUDI
289. r LINE Time code information of main output signal is returned In pulldown conversion mode 24 frame sec time code information is returned FC Time code information of FC output signal is returned In pulldown conversion mode 30 frame sec time code is returned e Pulldown output signal and 30 frame sec time code are synchronized only when this unit is set to PLAY LOCK mode To synchronize the signals set item A05 PD EXT SD REF LOCK MODE to lock2 e When editing pulldown output signals with a VTR operating in 30F mode it may not be possible to achieve sync within 5 seconds If this occurs set the preroll time to 7 seconds Also normal operation is not possible with devices engaged in player sync A20 Black Clip for 444 to 422 Conversion on off When a 4 4 4 signal is converted to a 4 2 2 signal this item specifies whether the signal that goes below the black level 040H is suppressed or not on Signals that drop below the black level are suppressed off Signals that drop below the black level are not suppressed Other Items Nos T01 to Item number Item Setting Function TO1 AUTO REPEAT off Selects the repeating operation of PREVIEW in automatic MODE on editing off PREVIEW in automatic editing is not repeated on PREVIEW in automatic editing is repeated To stop press the STOP button T02 INTERNAL VIDEO off Sele
290. r playback When you insert the cassette the VTR automatically enters STBY OFF mode The STOP button flashes in the following cases e The SERVO REF button in the PF1 menu is set to input but there is no video input signal e The SERVO REF button in the PF1 menu is set to ext but there is no external reference video signal e The input signal is out of synchronization with the external reference video signal You can change the setting of the VTR SETUP menu item 102 REFERENCE SYSTEM ALARM so that the STOP button will not flash in these cases 4 Display section Information display REF SYNC indicators SYS 23 98PSF 108 4 2 2 HDCAM SR M REFSYNC INPUT EXT 1080 4 2 2 HD VIDEO THR 02 01 01 28 Oo E FC 59 9 4i REC INHIBIT SERVO PREREAD PREREAD indicator SERVO indicator REC INHIBIT indicator Information display The information display shows a number of different pages To change the page displayed with no other items selected in the menu display HOME TC VIDEO AUDIO PF1 and PF2 turn the MULTI CONTROL knob while holding it down The currently selected page number also appears at the upper right of the information display Each page can be set so that it is not displayed in the INFO SELECT menu under the OTHERS CHECK menu in the MAINTENANCE menu For details refer to the Maintenance Manual Volume 1 Page 1 System status SY
291. re Output FREEZE For still picture output press the ALT FREEZE buttons The picture that was playing just before the button was pressed will be frozen on the screen Make the field or frame selection using the VTR SETUP menu item 902 FREEZE MODE To maintain the still picture Set the VTR SETUP menu item 903 FREEZE CONTROL FROM KEY PANEL to latch The still picture output is maintained until the button is pressed again To temporarily output a still picture Set the VTR SETUP menu item 903 FREEZE CONTROL FROM KEY PANEL to momentary A still picture is output as long as you hold down the button Stop freeze function To automatically output a still picture when the VTR is changed to stop mode set the VTR SETUP menu item 905 STOP FREEZE CONTROL to enable Regardless of the setting of the VTR SETUP menu item 902 FREEZE MODE stop freeze is a frame freeze picture during playback of a PsF recorded tape and a field freeze picture in other modes 4 2 6 Setting the Preroll Time PREROLL TIME Set the preroll time by pressing the ALT PREROLL buttons You can set a preroll time of 0 to 30 seconds in 1 second units During editing on this VTR a preroll time of 5 seconds or more is recommended Setting the preroll time o o Q Q Q m o a O ee 1 3 2 T Press the ALT F6 PREROLL buttons A dat
292. red page number with the numeric button then press the PAGE SET button If you enter 1 for example page one appears containing cue point numbers 10 to 19 EXTEND mode Press the ALT EXTEND MODE buttons In EXTEND mode you can do operations that cannot be done in page units such as the consecutive registration of more than 10 cue points Display The screen displays a list of 100 consecutive cue points which can be scrolled Press the t or l button to scroll the list Page columns are not displayed To quickly scroll through a list Press the t or l button while holding down the SFT button SAVE TFW LOAD TFW SAVE CSU ADD CSU NAME DATE LABEL LOAD EXIT ID ADD Select the format of the file to be saved To save the Tele File data as a tfw file Press the SAVE TFW button To save the Tele File data as a csv file Press the SAVE CSV button A message asking you to confirm the operation appears in the display SAVE TFW LOAD TFW A CONFIRMATION OF SAVING SAVE CSU PRESS SFTI F1 to SAVE eeu PRESS CLR to CANCEL V NAME DATE LABEL LOAD EXIT ID ADD 4 4 2 Saving and Storing the Tele File Data Tele File data can be saved to a Memory Stick in tfw or csv file format The tfw or csv file saved to a Memory Stick can also be written to the Tele File label
293. rial numbers 30000 to 39999 With the label side up and the connector facing forward insert the Memory Stick into the Memory Stick slot The access indicator flashes when data is being accessed 3 4 Using a Memory Stick HLA eur dn umes g Jeideuo 37 HLA 24 dn umes Je deyo 38 Access indicator oe Memory Stick slot Memory Stick Label side up Never insert remove a Memory Stick during access to data To remove a Memory Stick e For SRW 5000 serial numbers 12523 or lower and 90000 to 99999 e For SRW 5500 serial numbers 14577 or lower and 30000 to 39999 Push the eject button on the memory card adaptor and pull the Memory Stick out e For SRW 5000 serial numbers 12524 or higher e For SRW 5500 serial numbers 14578 or higher 1 Excluding SRW 5000 serial numbers 90000 to 99999 and SRW 5500 serial numbers 30000 to 39999 Push the Memory Stick in and then pull it out 3 4 1 Notes on Memory Stick Usable type of Memory Stick You can use a Memory Stick PRO with this unit The Memory Stick PRO Duo can also be used but using the Memory Stick PRO Duo adaptor is required The operations of this unit have been checked using Memory Stick PRO media up to 2 GB Operations checked with MSH 128 MSX 512S MSX M2GS Note on data read write speed Data read write speed may vary dependin
294. rishen Schlag zu vermeiden darf das Geh use nicht ge ffnet werden Uberlassen Sie Wartungsarbeiten stets nur qualifiziertem Fachpersonal DIESES GER T MUSS GEERDET WERDEN RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance WARNING THIS WARNING IS APPLICABLE FOR USA ONLY If used in USA use the UL LISTED power cord specified below DO NOT USE ANY OTHER POWER CORD Plug Cap Parallel Blade with ground pin NEMA 5 15P Configuration Cord Type SJT three 16 or 18 AWG wires Length Minimum 1 5 m 4 ft 11 in less than 2 5 m 8 ft 3 in Rating Minimum 10 A 125 V Using this unit at a voltage other than 120 V may require the use of a different line cord or attachment plug or both To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock refer servicing to qualified service personnel WARNING THIS WARNING IS APPLICABLE FOR OTHER COUNTRIES 1 Use the approved Power Cord 3 core mains lead
295. rotect individual cue point data items align the cursor with the line you want to write protect then press the PROTECT button When appears to the right of No then it is not possible to change the IN OUT and File Name settings Canceling the write protect setting To cancel the write protect setting press the PROTECT button After a confirmation message appears hold down the SFT button and press the PROTECT button To insert a new line 1 Use the cursor buttons to position the cursor P below the line where a new line will be inserted To move the cursor with the numeric buttons To move the cursor enter a line number with the numeric buttons then press the CUENUM POINT button The cursor moves to the line number you entered If the cursor buttons are not linked to movement of the entry cursor P it is not possible to move the entry cursor with the cursor buttons To link the cursor buttons to movement of the entry cursor gt Press the cursor center button To unlink press the cursor center button once again 2 Press the ENTRY button while pressing down the SFT button A new line is inserted above the line specified by where the cursor P is placed and the current time data is entered on that line 4 4 CUE Menu To delete a line To delete a line with the cursor buttons align the cursor with the line to be deleted hold down the SFT button and press the DEL POINT button This deletes t
296. ry Stick can be used on control panels connected to other SRW 5000 5500 VTRs Although data is completely compatible between VTRs with different optional equipment take note of the following 4 1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings Consider data copied from VTR A to VTR B and then to VIR C VTR A HKSR 5001 FORMAT CONVERTER installed VTR SETUP menu ii i A08 FC REFERENCE select extern HD Internal VTR processing extern HD oo Ooo 93338 o on 5 99090 o aD 50229 000 00000 4 2 22000 Copy VTRB HKSR 5001 NOT installed VTR SETUP menu A08 FC REFERENCE select extern HD Internal VTR processing off Copy VTRC HKSR 5001 installed VTR SETUP menu A08 FC REFERENCE select extern HD Internal VTR processing extern HD Gea o 900 200 g eee sss O m oo Sooo eeen 69D oo a ott o aD 5 o0 o 220800 0A j 2 000000 a Z 00000000 Even though the optional equipment is different in VTRs A and B the VTR SETUP menu settings are preserved Even though the VTR SETUP menu settings are copied to VTR C after being copied to VTR B the settings from VTR A are copied to VTR C Even though settings are copied for optional equipment that is not present the settings are adjusted and processed by the VTR internally There is c
297. s an OUT point and editing stops To confirm the results of the editing Press the PREVIEW REVIEW button to confirm the edit results When the view ends the tape rewinds to the OUT point then stops Modifying edit points for automatic editing later After you perform automatic editing the time data of IN OUT AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT points remain stored in 6 1 Basic Automatic Editing memory The stored data can be used later to modify edit points or to execute automatic editing again Follow the procedure below to modify edit points after executing automatic editing inthe HOME menu press the ALT LAST EDIT buttons The edit points used in the last automatic edit are restored 2 Modify the edit points For details on modifying edit points see 6 1 9 Modifying Edit Points on page 131 3 Press the REC EDIT button The VTR performs automatic editing 6 2 Advanced Automatic Editing This section describes the following advanced editing methods e DMC editing e Animation editing e Preread editing 6 2 1 DMC Editing If your player VTR has DT Dynamic Tracking capability you can perform variable speed editing by controlling the playback speed from the lower control panel This type of editing is called DMC editing Overview of DMC editing Requirements for DMC editing e DMC editing may be done during assemble or insert editing but not duri
298. s edit mode and edit channel F4 INS TC Selects TC insert editing mode F5 INS VIDEO Selects VIDEO insert editing mode F6 INS AUDIO Opens the INS AUDIO menu F7 INS CUE Selects CUE insert editing mode on off SRW 5500 only ALT F1 PRE READ Makes a setting for pre reading off on video only ALT F3 FREEZE Selects still picture output ALT F6 PREROLL Sets the preroll time 0 to 30s ALT F7 DMC DMC mode on off ALT F8 STOP CODE Sets the stop code ALT F9 PB EE SEL Selects the output signal in various operation modes ALT F10 LAST EDIT Restores the last edit point set 4 2 HOME Menu sBunjes nue p se deyo 53 suas nu y p 13 dey9 54 4 2 1 Selecting the Output Signals PB EE The audio video output signals from the line output and monitor output connectors can be temporarily changed from their current settings to another set of settings by pressing the PB EE button The video digital audio and analog cue channel output signals are toggled to the other set of settings while the button is pressed Output signal selection Select the output signal with ALT PB EE SEL or VTR SETUP menu item 017 PB EE SELECT MENU Output signal types for different operation modes of this VTR are shown below Output Channel Video Audio Standby off EE EE PB MUTING Standby on PB MUTING EE EE EE MUTING Playback PB PB2 Record EE EE PB PB Shuttle PB MUTING
299. signal 4000H 100 4000H gt E 141 3 5A70H g 762 SETUP LEVEL 0 0 Adjusts the setup level of the analog composite video CST signal output from SD OUT COMPOSITE MONITOR preset 7 5 IRE 7 5 connector 10 0 763 SYNC PHASE SD 128 Adjusts the sync phase of the D1 video signal output from preset 0 SD SDI OUT and analog composite video signal output 0 from SD OUT COMPOSITE MONITOR connector 127 764 FINE SD 0 Makes fine adjustments to the sync phase of the D1 video preset 0 signal output from SD SDI OUT and analog composite 1024 video signal output from SD OUT COMPOSITE MONITOR connector Menu List 1 71 xlpueddy 172 Item number Item Setting Function 775 VIDEO OUTPUT 8bit Sets the bit size of the output data from the HD SD DATA 10bit converter 8bit When connected to an 8 bit system 10bit When connected to a 10 bit system e Make sure the bit length matches the destination device e This setting is only active when the HD SD converter output is set to D1 776 DOWNCONVERTER disable Selects the HD SD converter mode when the INPUT INPUT CHECK enable CHECK button on the control panel is pressed ENABLE disable The INPUT CHECK button is not linked to HD SD converter output enable The INPUT CHECK button is linked to HD SD converter output The INPUT CHECK button works for all of the HD SD converter output connectors 777 DOWNCONVE
300. splay 4 1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings sBunjes nue p Je deyo 43 suas nu y p saideuD 44 CURRENT SETUP SETUP BANK 2 1 Preset UNDO 3 Preset 4 Preset 5 Preset 6 Preset 7 Preset 8 Untitled FF Preset EDIT DIREC COPY EXIT TITLE TION e 3 Press the DIRECTION button to select the lt 4 direction The left cursor bar flashes 4 Press the cursor t or l button to move the cursor P to the number of the VTR memory bank to be recalled 5 Press the F9 COPY button A message asking you to confirm the operation appears in the display To cancel the recalling operation Press the CLR button 6 Press the COPY button while holding down the SFT button The menu settings are recalled from the selected VTR memory bank When the recalling process has been completed the title of the VTR bank appears under CURRENT SETUP in the display cUR MUSES ee Preset _ ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPORSTUUWXYZ abcdefghJiklmnoparstuvuxygd 012345678911 lt gt t k 2 57 H 8 _ HDID2CAM b fF Preset SPACE BACK CANCEL SAVE SPACE EXIT T Press the SAVE EXIT button The SET UP menu appears again 4 1 5 Memory Stick Operations You can store menu settings in the VTR memory banks and cue point data to a Memory Stick for recall later 4 1 Reg
301. standard mode For up conversion the mode in which the ratio of carrying out conversion from frames or fields is set to the standard value ADAPTIVE 2 still image priority mode For up conversion the mode in which the ratio of carrying out conversion from frames is increased ADAPTIVE 3 movie priority mode For up conversion the mode in which the ratio of carrying out conversion from fields is increased 954 DETAIL GAIN UC O Adjusts the up converter image enhancer preset 64 Adjusts the sharpness of outlines 64 127 955 LIMITTER UC 0 Adjusts the up converter image enhancer preset 32 Adjusts the detail maximum level added to emphasize the 32 original signal 63 956 CRISP 0 Adjusts the up converter image enhancer THRESHOLD UC Sets the amplitude value for which small amplitude signals preset 8 8 are not emphasized 15 957 LEVEL DEPEND 0 Adjusts the up converter image enhancer THRESHOLD UC Sets the luminance range for edge enhancement preset 8 8 i 5 o 15 2 x lt 958 H DETAIL 3 2MHz Adjusts the up converter image enhancer FREQUENCY UC 4 5MHz Sets the central frequency and frequency characteristics for 5 0MHz edge enhancement 4 0MHz 3 2MHz 3 2 MHz 1 1 MHz 4 5MHz 4 5 MHz 1 4 MHz 5 0MHz 5 0 MHz 0 7 MHz 4 0MHz 4 0 MHz 2 0 MHz 959 H V RATIO UC 0 Adjusts the up converter image enhancer preset 3 Sets the vertical to horizontal ratio for edge enhancement 3 7 960 GAMMA LEVEL 128 Ad
302. stem settings recording format system line etc This display applies only to HDCAM HDCAM SR cassettes SRW 5500 only 73 NO REFERENCE INFORMATION Cannot lock because there is no 30 frames second reference information in 720 59 94p HD SDI input signals 74 ASYNCHRONOUS VIDEO INPUT When external sync is selected the external sync signal and the HD SDI INPUT signal are more than 5H out of phase 77 AUTO CUEUP ABORT Auto cue up was aborted because the target cue up time code is 1 second or more away from the current time code 1 46 Error Messages Warning Messages Condition Messages Condition Messages When deterioration in playback signal is detected a If condition messages are emitted continuously condition message is recorded in the error log menu When Head cleaning or internal inspection is required more than one error occurs you can check the messages using the 1 and l buttons Item number Display Meaning indicator is lit red 0B VIDEO DATA ERROR Video playback signal is deteriorated and the channel condition OF AUDIO DATA ERROR Audio playback signal is deteriorated and the channel condition indicator is lit red Error Log Menu The time and time codes of errors and warnings occurring To open the error log menu pokes yea aa ae in a list form in the Press the SFT button see page 21 and the
303. still picture and normal speed playback 3 Set the search dial to center position for still picture or press the STOP button to stop variable mode playback To return to normal speed playback Press the PLAY button To alternate between normal speed playback and variable mode playback After you have set the search dial to the angle that corresponds to the desired playback speed pressing the PLAY button or VAR button selects normal speed playback or variable mode playback respectively To stop or start variable mode playback press the STOP button or VAR button respectively The VTR is factory set so that pressing the JOG SHUTTLE or VAR button is required in order to enter variable speed playback mode To change this setting use 5 4 Playback yoeghe q Bulpiooey G Jay deyo 119 the VTR SETUP menu item 101 SELECTION FOR SEARCH DIAL ENABLE 5 4 3 Capstan Override Playback When playing back the same program on two VTRs you can adjust the playback phases of the two VTRs so that they are synchronized There are two ways to make this adjustment A Using the search dial B Using the buttons When using method A change the system setup so that jog shuttle mode playback is inhibited even when the search dial is rotated Doing so prevents the VTR from accidentally entering jog shuttle mode during capstan override playback Set the VTR SETUP menu item 101 SELECTION FOR SEARCH DIAL ENABLE to
304. t roll point 4 v v 4 n a Preroll Post roll Over a Preroll time Factory set to 5 seconds Can be set from 0 to 30 seconds in units of seconds through the VTR SETUP menu b The post roll time can be set between 0 and 30 seconds in units of seconds using the VTR SETUP menu c Over recording time 2 seconds 6 1 Basic Automatic Editing unipg 9 seideyo 133 Monitoring signals during editing During editing you can monitor signals between preroll and postroll points including portions between IN and OUT points through the CONFI confidence heads This allows you to monitor the video and audio signals that are just being edited The video and audio signals that can be monitored are shown in the diagram below IN point OUT point v v PB PB PB recorder VTR recorder VTR recorder VTR To perform automatic editing To carry out automatic editing press the AUTO button turning it on then press the REC EDIT button During editing the REC EDIT button lights up and goes off at the end AUTO button PREVIEW REVIEW button Bunip3 9 13 dey9 134 ooooo0oo0oo0o00000 200000000000 00000000 goo 0000 O Jo 0000 0000 REC EDIT button OUT button ENTRY button To stop automatic editing Press the OUT button while holding down the ENTRY button The point where the OUT button is pressed is treated a
305. tape is rewound to a point before the edit start point by the amount determined by the preroll time setting When the TIMER SEL button in the TC menu is set to CTL mode cuing up is slightly slower than in TC mode This is to maintain the accuracy of the CTL signals You can set up the VTR so that priority is placed on cuing accuracy or speed Change the setting of the VTR SETUP menu item 403 CUEUP BY TC and menu item 404 CUEUP BY CTL Changing the preroll time The preroll time is factory set to 5 seconds but can be set to any time between 0 and 30 seconds in 1 second steps For details see 4 2 6 Setting the Preroll Time PREROLL TIME on page 55 When changing the preroll time set it so that the recorded section prior to the edit start point is longer than the preroll time The preroll time used in automatic editing is the preroll time set for the recorder 6 1 8 Previewing Follow the procedure below to preview the edit AUTO button PREVIEW REVIEW button aooooaooaooooaooao 9900000090000 PREROLL button STOP button To preview the edit press the AUTO button to switch to AUTO mode then press the PREVIEW REVIEW button During previewing the PREVIEW REVIEW button lights up After previewing correct the edit points as required then do the preview again For details on modifying edit points see 6 1 9 Modifying Edit Points on pa
306. ted the duration in the uncorrected VTR is used to automatically set OUT points and AUDIO IN OUT points AUDIO AUDIO IN point IN point OUT point OUT point Recorder VTR Y M v v Player VTR j N A A A A UDIE FIN po AUDIO OUT point yen Vg OUT point AUDIO b IN point IN point Automatically Corrected set edit point IN point You can use the VTR SETUP menu to select an audio edit mode from among cut cross fade and fade in out and set the duration of the selected edit For details see the menu items in the 300 range in the VTR SETUP menu Using a VTR without the split editing function If the player VTR does not support the separate setting of edit points for video and audio you can set AUDIO IN and AUDIO OUT points on the recorder and three video edit points to enable split editing 6 1 5 Editing Non audio Data Before editing non audio data set the VTR SETUP menu item 317 AUDIO EDIT MODE to cut edit Noise may be produced during editing of certain non audio data 6 1 6 Confirming Edit Points Displaying the duration between two edit points The following six kinds of duration can be displayed in the time data display window e Between IN and OUT points e Between IN and AUDIO OUT points e Between IN and AUDIO IN points e Between OUT and AUDIO OUT points e Between OUT and AUDIO IN points 6 1 Basic Automatic Editing Bu
307. ter 4 4 CUE Menu To start the procedure over again Press the CANCEL button to start again To change a character Press the cursor t button to move the cursor to the comment to be changed Then press the cursor or button to move the insertion position If the entered text is longer than the comment box lt l or I gt appears to the left or right of the box 6 Press the SAVE EXIT button The screen that was on before the comment data was changed is displayed again Prerolling to a cue point T Press the CUE SCAN button repeatedly to specify the direction in which the cursor moves when the PREROLL button is pressed Each press of the button changes the direction as follows FWD forward REW reverse gt unspecified FWD Pressing the PREROLL button causes the cursor to move to the next line and the VTR to preroll to the time code on that line Invalid time codes are ignored REW Pressing the PREROLL button causes the cursor to move to the previous line and the VTR to preroll to the time code on that line Invalid time codes are ignored 2 Press the PREROLL button Write protecting cue point data Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the line that is to be write protected Then press the PROTECT button appears between the Time and Mrk columns to indicate that the line clip is write protected CUE REC DATE 2003 02 251 EOS 01 01 24 15 SCAN TITLEL 1 Rast100
308. ter turning the VTR on Leave the VTR turned on and wait until the error message goes off Inserting a cassette is not possible while the message is on When the error message disappears you can use the VTR If you move the VTR from a cold to a warm location Leave the VTR turned off for about ten minutes since some time is needed for the condensation detection mechanism to work Maintenance xipueddy 139 xlpueddy 140 Specifications General Record format HDCAM SR SRW 5000 5500 or HDCAM SRW 5500 Power requirements 100 to 240 V AC 50 60 Hz Power consumption 320 W with all option boards installed Peak inrush current 1 Power ON current probe method 54 A 240 V 17 A 100 V 2 Hot switching inrush current measured in accordance with European standard EN55103 1 33 A 230 V Operating temperature 5 C to 40 C 4 41 F to 104 F Storage temperature 20 C to 60 C 4 F to 140 F Humidity 25 to 80 relative humidity Mass 30 kg 66 lb 26 oz Dimensions 427 x 218 x 544 mm w h d 16 7 g x 8 g X 21 5 inches Tape system Tape speed HDCAM SR 94 1 mm s with the frame frequency of 24 Hz 98 1 mm s with the frame frequency of 25 Hz 117 6 mm s with the frame frequency of 29 97 Hz HDCAM 96 7 mm s with the frame frequency of 29 97 Hz 80 6 mm s with the frame frequency of 25 Hz 77 4 mm s with the frame frequency of 24 Hz Digital Betacam 96 7 mm s HDCAMSSR
309. the playback speed connect the audio data before and after the processing target with a cross fade OFF Output audio data by performing rate conversion processing This changes the frequency characteristics and pitch according to the specified program play speed Cross fade processing may be performed if zero cross points cannot be detected in Model or Mode2 processing 5 4 Playback yoeghe d Bulpiooey G saj deyo 123 6unip3 g seideu9 124 Editing 6 1 Basic Automatic Editing 6 1 1 Overview of Automatic Editing Automatic edit modes The VTR provides the following two modes for automatic editing Assemble mode New scenes are added to the end of previously recorded scenes CTL signals time codes video and audio signals on tape in the player are recorded onto tape in the recorder VTR Insert mode New scenes are inserted between previously recorded scenes CTL signals on tape in the recorder VTR are not overwritten Video digital audio and time code signals can be recorded separately Both of these two edit modes support DMC editing In insert mode you can also use split editing Interpolation of time codes by the CTL counter To use time codes as addresses of edit points the time codes must be recorded on the tape in ascending order As long as they are in ascending order time codes do not have to be continuous The CTL counter automatically interpolates data for editing even if there are
310. the Data ceeeeeeeeeneeeneeenneeenees 49 4 1 7 Details on VTR Memory Bank and Memory Stick PUNCUGHS 1 iniia e EE R ER 49 4 1 8 Memory Stick Data Compatibility 0 00 0 eee 50 4 1 9 Automatic Reading from a VTR Bank at Power On 51 4 1 10 Saving and Recalling DEFAULT Settings on a Bank 51 4 1 11 Saving and Recalling DEFAULT Settings in a Memory SUCK E E nine E ines ieee E 51 4 2 HOME MeN U inca cassia nc cccataasuavaniecenauendsrtssenvencwenducinaanaeacuiacse 53 4 2 1 Selecting the Output Signals PB EE eee 54 4 2 2 Record Inhibit Mode REC INH ccccccccccseeseneeeees 54 4 2 3 Selecting the Edit Mode and Edit Channel ASSEMBLE INS TC INS VIDEO INS AUDIO and INS CUE 54 4 2 4 Preread Settings PRE READ eeceeeceeeeteeeesteeeteees 55 4 2 5 Still Picture Output FREEZE ccc eeeceeesseeeesteeeneees 55 4 2 6 Setting the Preroll Time PREROLL TIME 55 4 2 7 Selecting DMC Playback DMC ee eeeceeeseeeesteeeeees 55 4 2 8 Setting the Stop Code STOP CODE secere 56 4 3 TO MOI seve ciissatansccsceinterassducueeemnsenadsiacsincentensuatavanncenteonacd 59 4 3 1 Setting the Time Data TIMER SEL RESET SET HOLD APAE RT ARETA EA TE E A ETER 60 4 3 2 Setting the Time Code Reader TCR SEL 63 4 3 3 Setting the Time Code Generator TCG SOURCE MODE Ee ENEE E poten at SE EEE EEA 63 4 3 4 Selecting the Time Code Running Mode RUN MODE aa r a R E E ON ce en R E 63 4 3 5 Sel
311. the VTR to be reset to these values at any time Memory sticks Each Memory Stick can hold the current VTR settings as well as up to eight pages of settings A single Memory Stick thus allows you to store and recall the entire contents of the VTR memory banks Title function This function allows you to add titles when storing data to the VTR memory bank or Memory Stick thus facilitating data retrieval and management Write protect function Setting pages stored in VTR memory banks or Memory Sticks can be write protected on an individual basis A full range of editing functions Two SRW 5000 5500 units can be connected allowing automatic or manual assemble and insert editing The VTR also features a full range of editing functions including preview review preroll and the setting or changing of edit points Quick access to edit points The following methods are provided for the setting of edit points e Multi cuing for up to 100 edit points e Search dial with shuttle and jog functions e Direct input through numeric buttons DMC Dynamic Motion Control editing Using the DT Dynamic Tracking heads you can play back a section of an edit at speeds between 1 and 2 times normal speed and store the speed variation in memory for later use in automatic editing Split editing In insert mode audio and video edit points can be set separately Preread editing Video and audio signals that have
312. the line on which the entry cursor is present and the current time data is written To delete a time code 1 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the Time section to be deleted To move the cursor using the numeric buttons Enter the line number using the numeric buttons Then press the CUENUM POINT button The cursor will move to the line specified by the numeric buttons 2 Press the F5 DEL POINT button A deletion confirmation window appears 3 Press the DEL POINT button while holding down the SFT button The time code section becomes blank and is ready for new time data input To delete the line as well as the time code Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the time code to be deleted Then press the DEL POINT button while holding down the SFT button The line is deleted and all the line numbers below are decreased by one CUE REC _DATE 2003 02 251 EOS 2 SCAN TITL m t 85 Now A Delete Cue Point rmat ENTRY POINT py 80 CUE COMMNT EDIT 1 80 2 80 3 Press SFTI1 F5 to DELETE __ Press only CLR to CANCEL CHANGE DATA DEL MARK PRO TAPE CUENUM WRITE POINT TECT INFO POINT EXIT To undo the deletion of a time data or line Press the ALT UNDO ALL buttons A message appears in the control panel display requesting confirmation of the undo operation Press the UNDO A
313. the system is operated in 4 4 4 mode no up converted HD output can be obtained HKSR 5003 RGB Processor Board This allows you to accept dual link HD SDI input and record and play back RGB 4 4 4 Units with serial numbers 15001 or higher are standard equipped to support RGB 4 4 4 recording and playback and therefore do not require an HKSR 5003 1 Excluding SRW 5000 serial numbers 90000 to 99999 and SRW 5500 serial numbers 30000 to 39999 HKDV 900 HD Digital Video Controller This allows you to remotely control the parameters for video signals and image enhancement References In addition to this Operation Manual the following manuals are available Maintenance Manual Volume 1 optional Provides detailed information necessary to maintain the VTR Maintenance Manual Volume 2 optional Provides information on spare parts Maintenance Manual Volume 3 optional Contains circuit diagrams Maintenance Manual Volume 4 optional Contains circuit diagrams and block diagrams Installation Manual supplied Provides necessary information to install and operate the VTR For information about changing the video system refer to 1 11 System Setting in the Installation Manual 9 pin Protocol Manual optional Provides information on the 9 pin protocol 1 2 Optional Accessories MBIAJOAC 19 dey9 15 M Q Je deuD 16 1 3 Using the CD ROM Manual The supplied CD ROM includes operation
314. ther digital audio channels The preread editing settings are performed with the ALT PRE READ buttons in the HOME menu For details on the settings see 4 2 4 Preread Settings PRE READ on page 55 Video source Digital video output Video Digital video input switcher ecd ooo Digital audio input Digital audio output Audio source N In preread editing if an input video signal is used as the reference signal for the output video signal oscillation may occur because of loop connections To avoid this select the external reference signal for preread editing by setting the VTR SETUP menu item 005 SERVO AV REFERENCE select to external When preread mode is selected no E E signals are output in any operation modes to prevent oscillation caused by loop connections If preread mode is deselected while a loop between the input and output of the same channel exists E E signals are output and oscillation occurs To prevent oscillation do the procedure below to select PB mode for both the video and digital audio channels before the start of preread editing Press the ALT PRE READ buttons in the HOME menu and select on Make the required connections for preread editing 3 Perform preread editing after selecti
315. to blocks A and B as shown below Block A Indicates the operation mode Block B Indicates the tape speed or servo lock status Block C A W mark here indicates an edit section for automatic editing COREE a AAA A B C 4 3 TC Menu Display NEET BEET Operation mode TAPE UNTHREAD Cassette not inserted STANDBY OFF Standby off mode T RELEASE Tension release mode STOP Stop mode PREROLL Preroll mode PLAY Playback mode servo unlocked PLAY LOCK Playback mode servo locked PLY SPD Speed shift from Capstan override mode normal speed REC Record mode servo unlocked REC LOCK Record mode servo locked EDIT Edit mode servo unlocked EDIT LOCK Edit mode servo locked JOG STILL Still picture jog mode JOG FWD Forward jog gt is lit JOG REV Reverse jog lt is lit E SHUTTLE speed Shuttle mode 2 VAR speed Variable mode S DMC speed DMC memorize mode p D PREV speed DMC edit preview mode Fi DMC EDIT DMC edit mode DMC SPD speed DMC initial speed setting PREVIEW Preview mode AUTO EDIT Auto edit mode REVIEW Review mode a Initial speed or memorized speed To display a warning message The first 16 characters of the warning message Set the VTR SETUP menu item 626 DISPLAY INFORMATION select to any setting other than time data only and set the menu item 627
316. to obtain the desired playback speed Shuttle mode REV F FWD The tape is played back at a speed that corresponds to the angle of the search dial A direction indicator lt or gt lights up to indicate the direction of playback The search dial clicks at the positions for still picture and 10 times normal speed playback 3 Set the search dial to center position for still picture or press the STOP button to stop shuttle mode playback To return to normal speed playback Press the PLAY button The audio signal output status is specified by the following settings of the VTR SETUP menu item 017 PB EE SELECT MENU EE The input audio is always output MU The audio output is always muted PB The playback signal is always output Variable mode playback Follow the procedure below to play back in variable mode e900000000000 200000000000 ggg oo00 O OO 0000 00000000 Hoe 0000 0000 T Press the VAR button turning it on The VTR enters VAR mode 2 Rotate the search dial in the desired playback direction and set the angle of rotation as required to achieve the desired playback speed Variable mode YZ 1 2 The tape is played back at a speed that corresponds to the angle of the search dial A direction indicator lt or gt lights up to indicate the direction of playback The search dial clicks at the positions for
317. to_ITU R709 lut A meee 5 10SLogAto10 lut 6 1OSLogAtol6FL lut 8 12FLto12SLogA ut EXIT To display the LUT curve Press the cursor t or l button or rotate the MULTI CONTROL knob to select the LUT file and press the DETAIL button The LUT curve appears DETAIL LUT BANK 5 10SLogAtol10 lut FC LUT LOAD ut FC LUT SAVE 12 FC LUT RESET FC LUT EXIT MODE Bank 3 DETAIL Load LUT to FC LUT Bank DIR MSSONY PRO VUTR SRWSOOO LUT File Name 10tol0SLogA lut FC LUT LOAD A CONFIRMATION OF LOADING FC LUT SAVE PRESS SFT F9 to LOAD PRESS CLR to CANCEL FC LUT RESET NAME DATE LOAD EXIT 2 You can return to the previous screen by pressing the DETAIL button Perform the necessary operation Saving LUT data stored on the Memory Stick to the VTR 1 2 Press the cursor T or l button or rotate the MULTI CONTROL knob to select the bank to which to save Press the FC LUT LOAD button The LUT data stored on the Memory Stick appears DETAIL Load LUT to FC LUT Bank DIR MSSONY PRO UTR SRW5000 LUT File Name 10to10SLogA lut FC LUT Date 2009 08 12 17 29 20 LOAD No File Name Total 60 4 10SLogAto12FL lut FC LUT 5 10SLosAto1GFL lut SAVE 6 10SLosAto8 lut FC LUT 8 12
318. tons T Press the cursor lt or button to align the cursor with the track to be assigned with a channel 2 Press the cursor or l button to select the channel To restore the default settings Press the cursor center button The item selected by the cursor is restored to its default setting To restore all tracks to their default channel settings Press the REPLCE CH ALL button in the ALT REPL CH menu All tracks are restored to their default settings You can also do the above procedure with the VTR SETUP menu item 310 EDIT PRESET REPLACE CHANNEL SELECT 4 6 8 External Device Digital Audio Edit Preset Command Replace Mode Selection AUDIO EDIT PRESET REPLACE You can replace the channel settings for digital audio edit preset commands received from editors and other external devices For example some devices are capable of issuing digital audio edit preset commands only for channels 1 to 4 CH1 to CH4 This function allows such devices to control channels 1 to 8 on this unit T Press the ALT REPLACE MODE buttons The REPLACE MODE menu appears together with a REPLACE image window 4 6 AUDIO Menu sBunjes nue p se deyo 103 suas nu y p saideuD 104 REPLCE MODE stere AUDIO EDIT PRESET REPLACE REPLACE MODE STEREO commann H1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHS CH6 CH7 CH8 PRESET eu ICH2 CH3 CH4 CHS CH6 CH7 CH8
319. tting To check the running of the internal time code generator Press the INPUT CHECK button 4 3 4 Selecting the Time Code Running Mode RUN MODE Press the RUN MODE button to select the time code running mode free The time code advances when the power is on regardless of the VTR s operation mode rec The time code advances only during recording 4 3 TC Menu sBuljes nue p seideyo 63 suas nu y p saideuD 64 4 3 5 Selecting the Drop Frame Mode DF NDF Press the DF NDF button to select the running mode for the CTL counter and the time code generator DF Drop frame mode DF is displayed NDF Non drop frame mode NDF is displayed auto The unit switches to drop frame mode when the field frequency is 29 97 Hz and switches to non drop frame mode when the field frequency is 30 Hz 1 Drop frame mode In order to compensate for differences between time code values from the time code generator and the actual time that occurs when the frame frequency of this unit is 29 97 Hz the drop frame mode causes the time code generator to omit the first two frames frame 00 and 01 in each minute except the tenth 2 Non drop frame mode In this mode drop frame mode processing is not performed Since there is no frame cutting a discrepancy of about 86 seconds occurs each day in the case of a frame frequency of 29 97 Hz e This setting is only active when the frame frequency of the unit is
320. tting of the VTR SETUP menu item 018 AUTO EJECT LEVEL because the system frequency of the VTR and the frequency of the signal recorded on the tape do not match 19 NO A1 A2 INPUT No carrier detected on digital audio input on channels 1 and 2 1A NO A3 A4 INPUT No carrier detected on digital audio input on channels 3 and 4 1B NO A5 A6 INPUT No carrier detected on digital audio input on channels 5 and 6 1C NO A7 A8 INPUT No carrier detected on digital audio input on channels 7 and 8 1D NO A9 A10 INPUT No carrier detected on digital audio input on channels 9 and 10 Error Messages Warning Messages Condition Messages xipueddy 145 Item number Display Meaning 1E NO A11 A12 INPUT No carrier detected on digital audio input on channels 11 and 12 21 REC INHIBIT MODE The menu settings are to a mode inhibiting recording or the tape format does not allow recording 22 CASSETTE REC INHIBIT The cassette is set to inhibit recording 29 VPID MISMATCH BIT DEPTH The bit depth specified in the VPID of the input signal does not match the bit length of the system 2A VPID MISMATCH COLOR SPACE The color space specified in the VPID of the input signal does not match the color space of the system 2B VPID MISMATCH LINK The link information specified in the VPID of the input signal does INFORMATION not match the actual connector connection 2D INVALID SD
321. ttle mode In this mode the button lights and playback at the speed corresponding to the angle of rotation of the search dial is possible The playback speed range depends on the frame frequency of the unit In this mode the search dial clicks at the positions for 0 still picture and 10 times normal playback speed HDCAM Digital Betacam or 8 times normal playback speed HDCAM SR Frame frequency Playback speed 23 98 24 Hz Ranging from 50 25 Hz Ranging from 48 29 97 30 Hz Ranging from 40 JOG button Press to select jog mode In this mode the button lights up and playback is possible at 1 to 1 times normal speed 2 times normal speed HDCAM HDCAM SR or 3 times normal speed Digital Betacam determined by the setting in the VTR SETUP menu item 107 JOG DIAL RESPONSE In this mode the search dial does not click VAR variable button Press to select variable speed playback mode for noiseless playback in the range from 1 to 2 times normal speed HDCAM HDCAM SR or 1 to 3 times normal speed Digital Betacam Playback exceeding this speed range is not possible The search dial clicks at the positions for still picture and normal playback speed Search dial Rotate to search for edit points Rotate the dial clockwise for forward playback the indicator lights up or counterclockwise for reverse playback the lt indicator lights up The W indicator lights up while the VTR
322. u For details on registering items see 4 1 3 Registering Items to the VTR SETUP Menu on page 41 The menu configuration of the VTR is shown in the following figure 4 1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings Chapter HOME menu TC menu VIDEO menu PF button 1a2 O S ASSIGN menu AUDIO menu CUE menu Registration VTR SETUP lt menu list PF1 menu PF2 menu SETUP menu Va PF ASSIGN button S E VTR SETUP button gt gt _ J PF button assignment allows you to assign the same item also to a different menu screen or button 4 1 2 Changing Menu Settings To activate the HOME TC VIDEO AUDIO CUE PFI PF2 or SET UP menu press the respective menu button Menu items are assigned to function buttons F1 to F10 in each menu When two items are registered to the same function button you can display the second item by pressing the ALT button The example below describes the procedure for changing the setting specified by the ALT CHARA SUPER button in the TC menu 1 Press the TC button The first page of the TC menu appears in the display TIMER SEL TC PLAY LOCK TIMER RESET 00 02 39 18 AIN S ie issis AGUT assisas TIMER SET IN i i QUT TIMER HOLD TCR SEL LTC REGENE TCG RUN DF NDF TC2 SOURCE MODE MODE SEL
323. ul interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to operate this equipment All interface cables used to connect peripherals must be shielded in order to comply with the limits for a digital device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation For the customers in Canada This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Pour les clients au Canada Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada Do not install the appliance in a confined space such as book case or built in cabinet Ne pas installer l appareil dans un endroit confin par exemple une biblioth que ou un placard encastr Das Ger t nicht an Orten aufstellen z B in Biicherregalen oder Einbauschr nken wo keine ausreichende Bel ftung gew hrleistet ist For the customers in Europe This product with the CE marking complies with the EMC Directive issued by t
324. uojamaadoituskoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan F r kunderna i Sverige Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag For the customers in the USA Lamp in this product contains mercury Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations For disposal or recycling information please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance www eiae org For the customers in Taiwan only 1 U5 2S aS 5 Table of Contents Chapter 1 Overview 1 1 Features Seca densadssusvcccendceneataasciancduecdweesuataueusiecdendudisnensazen 11 1 1 1 Features of the SRW 5000 SRW 5500 cscceeseeeeteee 11 1 1 2 Features of the Control Panel eee eeeeeeesteceeneeeenee 13 1 2 Optional Accessories cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeess 15 1 3 Using the CD ROM Manual ccsseeeeeeseeeeeeeeteeeeees 16 1 3 1 Preparations iiisscasacverscdesnsscdensscoaieesanssnseesnissamausractusncetones 16 1 3 2 Reading the CD ROM Manual 0 cceeeseeeseeeesteeeeees 16 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts 2 1 Control Panel ccstsvissssesctaustendavasaeavaiecdscrraasteurneccesageat 17 2 1 1 Upper Control Panel 2 20 Cee 18 2 1 2 Lower Control Panel sit scecaasiicsascdscianisgenadelditiaincne 19 2 1 3 System Set Up Panel ntsA ee ertiae eee ana 25 2 2 Connector Panel csssiscccssccasvidastivensbcedasacnceealenctseeetebearnes 26 Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR
325. using the VTR SETUP menu item 930 DOWNCONVERTER MODE e Edge crop mode CROP 1 4 of the HDVS image on each side is cut off Horizontal adjustment of the edge cropping Use the VTR SETUP menu item 932 H CROP POSITION DC e Letter box mode LETTER BOX When the letter box mode is selected you can select one of the following three conversion methods using the VTR SETUP menu item 931 LETTER BOX MODE DC The signal is compressed maintaining an aspect ratio of 16 9 Vi When 14 9 is selected The sides of the HDVS image are cut and the signal is compressed changing the aspect ratio to 14 9 When 13 9 is selected The sides of the HDVS image are cut and the signal is compressed changing the aspect ratio to 13 9 e Squeeze mode SQUEEZE HD The 16 9 signal is compressed changing the aspect ratio to 13 9 5 3 Preparing for Playback yoeghe d Bulpiooey G sa deyo 117 JO 0000 0000 yoeghe q Bulpiooay G 13 deyo 118 5 4 Playback There are four types of playback e Normal speed playback e Jog Shuttle Variable mode playback e Capstan override playback e DMC Dynamic Motion Control playback 5 4 1 Normal Speed Playback Follow the procedure below to play back at normal speed e090000000000 9200000000000
326. utton Set the VTR SETUP menu item 124 Tele File MENU auto popup to on then in the HOME VIDEO AUDIO TC CUE or SETUP menu screen insert a cassette that has an MLB 1M 100 memory label option attached To scroll the Tele File menu screen horizontally Press the cursor or button There are two ways of displaying log IN OUT point data in the Tele File menu screen as follows In the Tele File menu screen press the ENTRY POINT button and select IN OUT point e Set the VTR SETUP menu item 126 Tele File ENTRY POINT to IN OUT point While the data is being changed if the write protect setting has been made for the whole Tele File menu then data changed before the setting was made is rewritten To exit the Tele File menu without overwriting the changed point s Press the EJECT button or press the ALT UNDO ALL buttons After a window that confirms cancelation is displayed hold down the SFT button and press the UNDO ALL button The memory label contents when the cassette was inserted are restored If you inadvertently press the EJECT button without rewriting the data Reinsert the ejected cassette within 30 seconds and press the WRITE EXIT button This writes the data from immediately before ejection The Tele File menu screen scrolls in the following four stages Scroll the screen with the cursor lt or button REC DATE 2003 02 251 ITLEL E
327. uttons prst 100 4000H Numerical value 0 0 OH to 141 3 5A70H Adjustable range gt to 3 dB This setting can also be carried out in the VTR SETUP menu item 758 R Y LEVEL D1 Adjusting the video gain output level HD SD Make this adjustment with the ALT V GAIN ALL buttons prst 100 4000H Numerical value 0 0 OH to 141 3 5A70H Adjustable range 0 0 to 141 3 This setting can also be carried out in the VTR SETUP menu item 740 VIDEO GAIN ALL 4 5 VIDEO Menu sumes nue p saideyo 95 suas nu y p saj deuD 96 Adjusting the chroma gain output level HD SD Make this adjustment with the ALT CRM GA ALL buttons prst 100 4000H Num erical value 0 0 0H to 141 3 5A70H Adjustable range 0 0 to 141 3 This setting can also be carried out in the VTR SETUP menu item 741 CHROMA GAIN ALL Adjusting the chroma phase output level HD SD Make this adjustment with the ALT F7 CRM PH ALL buttons prst 0 Numerical value 127 to 127 Adjustable range 30 to 30 This setting can also be carried out in the VTR SETUP menu item 742 CHROMA PHASE ALL Adjusting the black output level HD SD Make this adjustment with the ALT BLK LV ALL buttons prst 0 0 110H Numerical value 31 0 OH to 31 0 220H Adjustable range 31 0 to 31 0 This setting can also be carried out in the VTR SETUP menu item 743
328. vel SYNC 0 6 Vp p 75 Q sync negative DIGITAL I O OUTPUT AES EBU BNC 6 CH1 2 to CH11 12 AES EBU format unbalanced AUDIO OUTPUT XLR 3 pin male 5 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 and CUE CUE for HDCAM or Digital Betacam playback only 4 dBm with 600 Q load low impedance balanced Specifications xlpueddy 141 xlpueddy 142 MONITOR OUTPUT L R XLR 3 pin male 2 4 dBm with a 600 Q load low impedance balanced TIME CODE OUT XLR 3 pin male 1 2 2 Vp p low impedance balanced JM 60 stereo phone jack oo to 12 dBu with an 8 Q load unbalanced PHONES Remote connectors ETHERNET RJ 45 modular jack REMOTE 1 IN 9P D sub 9 pin female REMOTE 1 I O 9P D sub 9 pin female VIDEO CONTROL D sub 9 pin female for optional HKDV 900 REMOTE 2 PARALLEL I O S0P D sub 50 pin female Accessories supplied Operation Manual English version x 1 Japanese version x1 Installation Manual English version x 1 Japanese version x 1 CD ROM 1 Optional accessories HKSR 5001 Format Converter Board HKSR 5002 Digital Betacam Playback Board HKSR 5003 RGB Record Playback Board RMM 110 Rack Mount Adaptor BCT HD12CL Cleaning Cassette Recommended accessories For details about recommended accessories contact your Sony service representative Memory card adaptor MSAC PC4 Memory Stick PC Card Adaptor or equivalent Parallel serial converters HD 694 ASTRO DESIGN Corporation or equivalent XLR BNC
329. vel meter turn the MULTI CONTROL knob for a desired audio level Clicking the MULTI CONTROL knob resets the playback audio level to the factory set level a reference level of 0 dB is displayed for a 4 dBm input Clicking the MULTI CONTROL knob again restores the adjusted level Press this button again to exit from the playback audio level adjustment mode and the MONITOR L and R buttons return to the normal status this status is called the MONITOR SELECT mode REC recording LEVEL button Press this button to enter the recording audio level adjustment mode In this mode you can use the MONITOR L button to select the adjustment target channels from channels 1 to 12 While watching the audio level meter turn the MULTI CONTROL knob for a desired audio level Clicking the MULTI CONTROL knob resets the recording audio level to the factory set level a reference level of 0 dB is displayed for a 4 dBm input Clicking the MULTI CONTROL knob again restores the adjusted level Press this button again to exit from the recording audio level adjustment mode and the MONITOR L and R buttons return to the normal status this status is called the MONITOR SELECT mode 2 Editing control section Numeric buttons and buttons SFT button RCL button CLR button SET button INPUT CHECK button INPUT CHECK o HO En RY 5 D PLAYER RECORDER buttons AUTO button Cursor butto
330. video signal track during the vertical blanking interval This VTR writes this time code in the AUX data area in the video signals It can be read correctly even during slow or still picture playback See also LTC Menu List This section describes all of the VTR SETUP menu items The VTR SETUP menu items are divided into the following categories by the function Items relating to VTR operations Nos 001 to Items relating to operation panels Nos 101 to Items relating to the remote interface Nos 201 to Items relating to editing Nos 301 to Items relating to prerolling Nos 401 to Items relating to recording protection Nos 501 to Items relating to the time code Nos 601 to Items relating to the video control Nos 706 to e Items relating to the audio control Nos 807 to e Items relating to digital process Nos 902 to e Items relating to pulldown control Nos A01 to e Other items Nos TO1 to For VTR SETUP menu operations see 4 7 1 VTR SETUP Menu on page 107 In the Setting column of the table the factory default settings are indicated by an exclosing box Items Relating to VTR Operations Nos 001 to Item number Item Setting Function 001 PRE READ off Selects the pre read read before write mode for insert on editing video only off No pre read operation on Pre read operation video on
331. witch REF INPUT 2 connectors and 75Q termination switch SD OUT COMPOSITE MONITOR connector seq Jo suooUNn pue suoneooq z saideyo TIME CODE OUT connector TIME CODE IN connector CUE OUT connector CUE IN connector SRW 5500 only MONITOR OUTPUT L R connectors XLR 3 31 male These output the audio signals for monitoring L and R channels To select the signals to output use the MONITOR R and MONITOR L buttons on the lower control panel For details see 5 1 2 Selecting Audio Signals on page 112 AUDIO OUTPUT CH1 to CH4 connectors XLR 3 31 male These output up to four analog audio signal lines channels 1 to 4 REF INPUT 1 connectors BNC and 75Q termination switch Input a reference video signal of the selected field frequency Select HD or SD with the VTR SETUP menu item 006 EXTERNAL REFERENCE select When HD is selected input a tri level SYNC signal When SD is selected input a video signal with chroma burst VBS or a monochrome video signal VS A loop through connection is possible Set the 75Q termination switch to OFF if you are using a loop through connection and set it to ON if you are not using a loop through connection REF INPUT 2 connectors BNC and 75Q termination switch Input a reference video signal of the field frequency selected for the format converter output Select HD or SD with the VTR SETUP menu item A08 FC REFERENCE select When
332. yback improve the vertical resolution 185 Specifications 140 Split editing 127 STANDBY button 22 STOP button 22 Superimposition of character information 67 System set up panel 25 T Tape transport control section 22 TC menu 59 Tele File 12 Tele File menu 78 Time code presetting for conversion from Frame time code 65 running mode 63 setting 63 time code generator TCG SOURCE MODE 63 TIME CODE IN connector 28 TIME CODE OUT connector 28 Index _ Ih 199 X pUu MM 200 Time code reader TCR 63 Time data resetting 62 selecting the time data display 60 setting 60 U Upper control panel 18 USB connector 30 User bits setting 62 Using a Memory Stick 37 Using the CD ROM manual 16 V VAR button 24 Variable speed playback 118 VIDEO CONTROL connector 30 VIDEO Menu 93 VTR memory banks 42 adding titles 49 recalling 43 storing 42 VTR SETUP menu 107 items related to digital processing 184 items related to editing 159 items related to operation panels 155 items related to prerolling 163 items related to recording protection 164 items related to remote interface 158 items related to the audio control 174 items related to the pulldown control 188 items related to the time code 165 items related to the video control 170 items related to VTR operations 151 Other items 190 W WARNING indicator 18 Warning messages 144 Index The material contained in this manual consists of information Trade

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Sony VAIO VGC-RB30 / VGC-RB30C 512MB DDR PC-3200 Desktop Memory  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file